《阿摩昼经》的注释巴利
3. Ambaṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
长途跋涉的解说巴利
Addhānagamanavaṇṇanā
254 254. 这样注释完《沙门果经》之后,现在要注释《阿摩昼经》。为了说明注释次第如何达成,并表明结集时紧接在《沙门果经》之后的那部经就是《阿摩昼经》,所以说:“如是我闻……于憍萨罗国……《阿摩昼经》”。在这类情况下,“iti”这个词是表示起始的意思;而表示词义颠倒的“iti”则被省略不提,或者这里就是省略了“ādi”这个词,又或者是一种举例性的说明。所谓“前所未有之词的注释”,是指对前面没有提到过、因而显得陌生的词进行词义分析。因为说过:“舍弃一再重复之义,我将阐明义理。”有些地方读作“anupubbapadavaṇṇanā”,但那是不对的,因为复注中没有引出这种读法,也没有这样注释。巴利
254. Evaṃ sāmaññaphalasuttaṃ saṃvaṇṇetvā idāni ambaṭṭhasuttaṃ saṃvaṇṇento yathānupubbaṃ saṃvaṇṇokāsassa pattabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ, sāmaññaphalasuttassānantaraṃ saṅgītassa suttassa ambaṭṭhasuttabhāvaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ…pe… kosalesūti ambaṭṭhasutta’’nti āha. Evamīdisesu. Itisaddo cettha ādiattho, padatthavipallāsajotako pana itisaddo luttaniddiṭṭho, ādisaddalopo vā esa, upalakkhaṇaniddeso vā. Apubbapadavaṇṇanā nāma heṭṭhā aggahitatāya apubbassa padassa atthavibhajanā. ‘‘Hitvā punappunāgata-matthaṃ atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) hi vuttaṃ, ‘‘anupubbapadavaṇṇanā’’ti katthaci pāṭho, so ayuttova ṭīkāya anuddhaṭattā, tathā asaṃvaṇṇitattā ca.
论师说:“王子们因为族姓而被称为憍萨罗人。”但文字学家们说:“他们收取‘藏’(kosa),或者询问‘善’(kusala),所以叫憍萨罗人。”“Janapadino”的意思是拥有国土的人,或者是国土的统治者。虽然只要说“名为憍萨罗的王子们”就已经成立了,但还要说“janapadino”,是为了表明:即使那里还住着其他以各自名字著称的人,正是因为他们住在那里,这个国土才得到这个名称。用“他们的住处”这句话,是在说明派生词“憍萨罗人的住处就是憍萨罗”。而用“即使是一个国土”这句话,则是在说明:从词形上看这是复数,但从意义上看这只是一个。这里的“api”一词表示认可,也就是说:虽然这确实只是一个国土,但因为这个原因,用复数形式也是说得通的。如果只是一个国土,为什么那里用复数呢?回答说“因为是惯用语”等等,意思是:因为是惯用语,所以复数形式说得通。把用在所依处的复数形式,或者说复数性,安放到所依处上,这就是这里的惯用语。因此论师在这里以及《中部复注》等其他地方说:“文字学家们在这样的场合,认为这种性和数的形式就像合理的一样,这就是这里的惯用语,比如‘也在俱卢人那里住’、‘在鸯伽人那里住’。”但有些人想把“憍萨罗”这个名称安立为单数,这是不合理的,因为复数形式不应该这样用。因为如果是安立名称,单数也可以成立,比如“狮子在吼叫”。即使在特指时,“国土”一词因为是类名,也只用单数。因此说“在那憍萨罗国中”,意思是在那个名为憍萨罗的国土中。因为惯用语只是不真实的言说,真实的意义才应该被判定。譬如——巴利
‘‘Rājakumārā gottavasena kosalā nāmā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.254) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Akkharacintakā pana vadanti ‘‘kosaṃ lanti gaṇhanti, kusalaṃ vā pucchantīti kosalā’’ti. Janapadinoti janapadavanto, janapadassa vā issarā. ‘‘Kosalā nāma rājakumārā’’ti vutteyeva siddhepi ‘‘janapadino’’ti vacanaṃ santesupi aññesu taṃtaṃnāmapaññātesu tattha nivasantesu janapadibhāvato tesameva nivasanamupādāya janapadassāyaṃ samaññāti dassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Tesaṃ nivāso’’ti iminā ‘‘kosalānaṃ nivāsā kosalā’’ti taddhitaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ekopi janapado’’ti iminā pana saddatoyevetaṃ puthuvacanaṃ, atthato panesa eko evāti vibhāveti. Api-saddo cettha anuggahe, tena kāmaṃ ekoyevesa janapado, tathāpi iminā kāraṇena puthuvacanamupapannanti anuggaṇhāti. Yadi ekova janapado, kathaṃ tattha bahuvacananti āha ‘‘ruḷhisaddenā’’tiādi, ruḷhisaddattā bahuvacanamupapannanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nissitesu payuttassa puthuvacanassa, puthubhāvassa vā nissaye abhiniropanā idha ruḷhi, tena vuttaṃ ācariyena idha ceva aññattha ca majjhimāgamaṭīkādīsu ‘‘akkharacintakā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu yutte viya īdisaliṅgavacanāni icchanti, ayamettha ruḷhi yathā ‘aññatthāpi kurūsu viharati, aṅgesu viharatī’ti cā’’ti. Keci pana kosalanāmābhiniropanamicchanti, ayuttametaṃ puthuvacanassa appayujjitabbattā. Nāmābhiniropanāya hi ekavacanampi bhavati yathā ‘‘sīho gāyatī’’ti. Tabbisesitepi janapadasadde jātisaddattā ekavacanameva. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiṃ kosalesu janapade’’ti, kosalanāmake tasmiṃ janapadeti attho. Abhūtato hi vohāramattaṃ ruḷhi, bhūtatoyeva attho vinicchinitabbo. Yathā hi –
毗提诃国有儿子,名叫长寿,是使国土繁荣的人。
他们将在弥提罗城治理王国,生主啊。在《本生经》2.22.276等中——巴利
‘‘Santi puttā videhānaṃ, dīghāvu raṭṭhavaḍḍhano; Te rajjaṃ kārayissanti, mithilāyaṃ pajāpatī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.276) ādīsu –
对于被称为“其子”的同一个事物,依照惯用语而用复数“puttā”;同样,在这里,对于被称为“其住处”的同一个事物,也是依照惯用语而用复数“kosalesu”。又比如在“不应杀生,不应取未给予之物”等(《增支部》8.42, 43, 45)中,依照类别而对多个事物用了单数;同样,在这里,依照类别、依照部分的区分,对多个事物也用了单数“janapade”。论师在《中部复注》中也说:“即使是在修饰它的‘国土’一词上,因为是表示类别的词,所以也用单数。因此说‘在那个盎葛国土中’。”巴利
Taṃputtasaṅkhātassa ekatthassa ruḷhivasena ‘‘puttā’’ti bahuvacanapayogo, tathā idhāpi tannivāsasaṅkhātassa ekatthassa ruḷhivasena ‘‘kosalesū’’ti bahuvacanapayogo hoti. Yathā ca ‘‘pāṇaṃ na haññe, na ca’dinnamādiye’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.42, 43, 45) jātivasena bahvatthānamekavacanapayogo, tathā idhāpi jātivasena avayavappabhedena bahvatthassa ‘‘janapade’’ti ekavacanapayogo hoti. Vuttañca ācariyena majjhimāgamaṭīkāyaṃ ‘‘tabbisesanepi janapadasadde jātisadde ekavacanameva. Tenāha ‘tasmiṃ aṅgesu janapade’ti’’.
像这样,按照惯用说法,本来在可以说成“多”的地方,已经显示了复数;现在为了说明按照“多义”的用法,即使在应当说成“多”的地方也用复数,所以说了“然而古昔说”等话。这里的“pana”一词,是用来点出差别含义的,它表明:这里用复数是因为所涉对象具有“多”的含义,而不是依照惯用说法——这就是接下来要说明的差别。因为那个地区方圆三百由旬,有种种不同的部分,所以在这个义理中,应当理解为“在那些憍萨罗国土中”。“大般那陀”是指在《大般那陀本生经》(本生经1.3.40, 41, 42)和《须卢吉本生经》(本生经1.14.102等)中出现的、名为须卢吉的毗提诃王之子、名叫大般那陀的王子。“种种戏剧”是指以般度、甘度、般度甘度等为首的六十万种各类戏剧。有些地方还见到“等”字,但在《本生经注》中没有出现;如果出现了,就应当知道它涵盖了跳跃戏等。“只是微笑”就是仅仅笑了一下。据说因为他前世在无间地狱中见过天界的戏剧,所以人间的戏剧舞蹈对他而言并不悦意。“连犁也扔掉”是指因为放弃耕作而丢下犁,这只是举例。并不只是农夫,两国其他的居民也都放下各自的工作,聚集到那个吉祥的地方。据说当时为大般那陀王子把宫殿吉祥、伞盖吉祥、婚娶吉祥这三件吉祥事合在一起举办,迦尸国和毗提诃国的居民也聚集到那里,享受庆典超过七年。不过现在看到的文本写作“犁等”,这不是古读,因为注释中没有引用过。巴利
Evaṃ ruḷhivasena bahumhi viya vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ dassetvā idāni bahvatthavasena bahumpi eva vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ dassento ‘‘porāṇā panāhū’’tiādimāha. Pana-saddo cettha visesatthajotano, tena puthuatthavisayatāya evetaṃ puthuvacanaṃ, na ruḷhivasenāti vakkhamānaṃ visesaṃ joteti. So hi padeso tiyojanasataparimāṇatāya bahuppabhedoti, imasmiṃ pana naye tesu kosalesu janapadesūti attho veditabbo. Mahāpanādanti mahāpanādajātaka (jā. 1.3.40, 41, 42) surucijātakesu (jā. 1.14.102 ādayo) āgataṃ surucino nāma videharañño puttaṃ mahāpanādanāmakaṃ rājakumāraṃ. Nānānāṭakānīti bhaṇḍukaṇḍapaṇḍukaṇḍapamukhāni chasatasahassāni nānāvidhanāṭakāni, katthaci pana ādisaddopi diṭṭho, so jātakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ na dissati, yadi ca dissati, tena naṭalaṅghakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sitamattampīti mihitamattampi. Tassa kira dibbanāṭakānaṃ anantarabhaveyeva diṭṭhattā manussanāṭakānaṃ naccaṃ amanuññaṃ ahosi. Naṅgalānipi chaḍḍetvāti kasikammappahānavasena naṅgalāni pahāya, nidassanamattañcetaṃ. Na hi kevalaṃ kassakā eva, atha kho aññepi ubhayaraṭṭhavāsino manussā attano attano kiccaṃ pahāya tasmiṃ maṅgalaṭṭhāne sannipatiṃsu. Tadā kira mahāpanādakumārassa pāsādamaṅgalaṃ, chattamaṅgalaṃ, āvāhamaṅgalanti tīṇi maṅgalāni ekato akaṃsu, kāsivideharaṭṭhavāsinopi tattha sannipatitvā atirekasattavassāni chaṇamanubhaviṃsūti, adhunā pana ‘‘naṅgalādīnī’’ti pāṭho dissati, so na porāṇapāṭho ṭīkāyamanuddhaṭattā.
大众聚集时,有些人说“我们要表演逗乐的手法,让王子笑出来”,有些人说“我们要看那场表演”,就这样大众成群地聚在一起。他们展示了攀藤、钻木堆等各种游戏。据说帝释天派来的天界艺人站在王宫广场的空中,表演所谓的“半身”把戏:只有一只手、一只脚、一只眼、一颗牙在舞动、在动,半边身子在颤动,其余部分保持不动。大帕那陀看到后微微笑了一下。针对这个意思,才说“他展示天界艺人的表演,让他笑了起来”。所谓“好友”,是指可信赖的人,因为“他们的心很好”。用“等”字涵盖了亲戚、随从等人。“因此”,是因为那样的说法。“依那句‘善’的话”——在这里,由于“您善吗?是的,善”这样的问答方式而流传的善之说,那些人最初就获得了“善”这个称呼。这些善者的主人——王子们,就被称为“憍萨罗”,而由于是他们居住的地方,那个地区就按前面所说的方式被称为“憍萨罗”。所以说“那个地区被称为憍萨罗”。在《中部经集注》中,论师正是这样说的。这里的意思可能是:说“那个地区被称为憍萨罗”时,由于“想”和“名想”依次用单数和复数来表达,所以像前面的方式一样,这里也是依惯用法而用复数。王子们获得名称的原因,在这里只是一个区别点。不过在这里,论师说“那个地区”,是从地区的笼统角度说的,或者是语词倒置,意思是“那些地区”。所谓“憍萨罗”,就是“善者”即“憍萨罗”。(《长部经集注》1.254)这里的意思可能是:说“那个地区”时,是从种姓词的角度说的,或者是语词倒置,因此由于涉及多种含义,就用复数。地区获得名称的原因,在这里是一个区别点。因为“善”这个词,依惯用名称的方式,就像“yevāpanakaṃ, natumhākavaggo”那样,成为“憍萨罗”。再者,由于问答的方式,人们在这里说“善”,所以是“憍萨罗”。因为派生词的用法是多样的。而“善”也指健康,如“尊者您善吗?尊者您无病吗”等处,意思是“您健康吗”;或者指灵巧,如“善巧舞蹈歌唱的、受过训练的四类女子”等处,意思是“那些表演灵巧吗”。巴利
Mahājanakāye sannipatiteti keci ‘‘pahaṃsanavidhiṃ dassetvā rājakumāraṃ hāsāpessāmā’’ti, keci ‘‘taṃ kīḷanaṃ passissāmā’’ti evaṃ mahājanasamūhe sannipatite. Atulambābhiruhanadārucitakapavesanādi nānākīḷāyo dassetvā. Sakkapesito kira dibbanāṭako rājaṅgaṇe ākāse ṭhatvā upaḍḍhabhāgaṃ nāma dasseti, ekova hattho, eko pādo, ekaṃ akkhi, ekā dāṭhā naccati calati, upaḍḍhaṃ phandati, sesaṃ niccalamahosi, taṃ disvā mahāpanādo thokaṃ hasitamakāsi, imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘so dibbanāṭakaṃ dassetvā hasāpesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Suhajjā nāma vissāsikā ‘‘suṭṭhu hadayametesa’’nti katvā. Ādisaddena ñātakaparijanādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Tasmāti tathā vacanato. Taṃ kusalanti vacanaṃ upādāyāti ettha ‘‘kacci kusalaṃ? Āma kusala’’nti vacanapaṭivacanavasena pavattakusalavāditāya te manussā ādito ‘‘kusalā’’ti samaññaṃ labhiṃsu, tesaṃ kusalānaṃ issarāti rājakumārā kosalā nāma jātā, tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānatāya pana padeso kosalāti pubbe vuttanayameva. Tenāha ‘‘so padeso kosalāti vuccatī’’ti. Evaṃ majjhimāgamaṭīkāyaṃ ācariyeneva vuttaṃ. Tatrāyamadhippāyo siyā – ‘‘so padeso kosalāti vuccatī’’ti saññīsaññā yathākkamaṃ ekavacanabahuvacanavasena vuttattā purimanaye viya idhāpi ruḷhivaseneva bahuvacanaṃ hoti. Rājakumārānaṃ nāmalābhahetumattañhettha visesoti. Idha pana ācariyena evaṃ vuttaṃ so padesoti padesasāmaññato vuttaṃ, vacanavipallāsena vā, te padesāti attho. Kosalāti vuccati kusalā eva kosalāti katvā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.254) tatrāyamadhippāyo siyā – so padesoti jātisaddavasena, vacanavipallāsena vā vuttattā puthuatthavisayatāya eva bahuvacanaṃ hoti. Padesassa nāmalābhahetu hettha visesoti. ‘‘Kusala’’nti hi vacanamupādāya ruḷhināmavasena vuttanayena kosalā yathā ‘‘yevāpanakaṃ, natumhākavaggo’’ti. Apica vacanapaṭivacanavasena ‘‘kusala’’nti vadanti etthāti kosalā. Vicitrā hi taddhitavuttīti. Kusalanti ca ārogyaṃ ‘‘kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ, kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.145; jā. 2.20.129) viya, kacci tumhākaṃ ārogyaṃ hotīti attho, chekaṃ vā ‘‘kusalā naccagītassa , sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.94) viya, kacci tesaṃ nāṭakānaṃ chekatā hotīti attho.
“行”就是游行,“行”或者“游”也是游行,那本身就是游行。这里所指的正是道路上的行走,不是为了说明仅仅像碎步那样走,才说“长途旅行”。这是个抽象中性词,说的是“正在从事可称为长途旅行的游行”。或者,虽然本身没有分别,却用有分别的说法来表达,就像“他坐着度过白天”(中部 1.256)那样,意思是“正在从事可称为长途旅行的游行,正在做行走这件事”。因为 kar 和 bhū 等词根的意义是普遍通用的。有些地方读作“addhānamagga”(长途道路),那种读法不好,因为“cārikā”这个词并不是用来指道路的。现在,通过分类说明之后,为了确定这里所指的意思,才接着说“所谓的游行”等。由于弟子们按惯例也有游行,为了加以区别,才用“世尊的”这个词。正如《中部经集注》所说:“‘正在游行’:在这里,虽然这种游行确实只有诸佛为了摄受大众才具有,但依于佛陀,以惯用的说法,也用于弟子们,就像用芦苇等做的扇子也被称为‘tālavaṇṭa’一样。”“在远处也”这里,用 pi 字或 api 字,包含了“也不太远”的意思,因为那里也可能有游行。应受教化的人,是指以通达四谛而值得教化的人。急速行走,就是快速行走。对于“迎接大迦叶等”所说的内容,现在以“世尊确实……”等来如实说明。迎接,就是迎面走去,也就是起身相迎。以“同样”这个词,承接“三十由旬”这句话。帕库萨是犍陀罗国王。大迦毗那是鸡足城的国王。达尼耶是科兰达长者之子,是个牧牛人。巴利
Caraṇaṃ cārikā, caraṇaṃ vā cāro, so eva cārikā, tayidaṃ maggagamanameva idhādhippetaṃ, na cuṇṇikagamanamattanti dassetuṃ ‘‘addhānagamana’’nti vuttaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ, addhānagamanasaṅkhātāya cārikāya caramānoti vuttaṃ hoti, abhedepi vā bhedavohārena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘divāvihāraṃ nisīdī’’ti, (ma. ni. 1.256) addhānagamanasaṅkhātaṃ cārikaṃ caramāno, caraṇaṃ karontoti attho. Sabbatthako hi karabhūdhātūnamatthoti. ‘‘Addhānamagga’’ntipi katthaci pāṭho, so na sundaro. Na hi cārikāsaddo maggavācakoti. Idāni taṃ vibhāgena dassetvā idhādhippetaṃ niyamento ‘‘cārikā ca nāmesā’’tiādimāha. Sāvakānampi ruḷhivasena cārikāya sambhavato tato viseseti ‘‘bhagavato’’ti iminā. Tathā hi majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cārikaṃ caramānoti ettha kiñcāpi ayaṃ cārikā nāma mahājanasaṅgahatthaṃ buddhānaṃyeva labbhati, buddhe upādāya pana ruḷhisaddena sāvakānampi vuccati kilañjādīhi katabījanīpi tālavaṇṭaṃ viyā’’ti. Dūrepīti ettha pi-saddena, api-saddena vā nātidūrepīti sampiṇḍanaṃ tatthāpi cārikāsambhavato. Bodhaneyyapuggalanti catusaccapaṭivedhavasena bodhanārahapuggalaṃ. Sahasā gamananti sīghagamanaṃ. ‘‘Mahākassapassa paccuggamanādīsū’’ti vuttameva sarūpato dasseti ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādinā. Paccuggacchantoti paṭimukhaṃ gacchanto, paccuṭṭhahantoti attho. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘tiṃsayojana’’nti padamanukaḍḍhati. Pakkusāti nāma gandhārarājā. Mahākappino nāma kukkuṭavatīrājā. Dhaniyo nāma koraṇḍaseṭṭhiputto gopo.
就这样,先通过赞叹对法的恭敬这一话题,简略地展示了迎接大迦叶等人(相应部注 2.154)的情形;现在为了详细讲述住林者提萨沙弥的故事,进而说明游行的事迹,便以“有一天”等语开始。那么,这位提萨沙弥究竟是谁呢?他出生在舍卫城法将(舍利弗)的施主家中,福德广大,以前曾叫“施食者提萨”“施毯者提萨”,后来以“住林者提萨”闻名,是一位已断尽烦恼的沙弥。详细的故事见于《法句经注》(法句经注 1.74 住林者提萨沙弥的故事)。世尊想和那些能在空中行走的人一起从空中前往,就说:“去通知那些有六神通的人。”他——也就是提萨沙弥——看到世尊和比丘僧团一起披着衣……这里承接的意思是:他既不是长老,也不是平庸之辈;也就是说,在德行上,他绝不是低劣、微不足道的人。巴利
Evaṃ dhammagarutākittanamukhena mahākassapapaccuggamanādīni (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.154) ekadesena dassetvā idāni vanavāsitissasāmaṇerassa vatthuṃ vitthāretvā cārikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekadivasa’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Ko panesa tissasāmaṇero nāma? Sāvatthiyaṃ dhammasenāpatino upaṭṭhākakule jāto mahāpuñño ‘‘piṇḍapātadāyakatisso, kambaladāyakatisso’’ti ca pubbe laddhanāmo pacchā ‘‘vanavāsitisso’’ti pākaṭo khīṇāsavasāmaṇero. Vitthāro dhammapade (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.74 vanavāsītissasāmaṇeravatthu). Ākāsagāmīhi saddhiṃ ākāseneva gantukāmo bhagavā ‘‘chaḷabhiññānaṃ ārocehī’’ti avoca. Tassāti tissasāmaṇerassa. Tanti bhagavantaṃ saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena cīvaraṃ pārupantaṃ. No thero no oramattako vatāti sambandho, guṇena lāmakappamāṇiko no hotīti attho.
“在自己的座位上”是指比丘们座位的末端。为那些村民说了与布施相应的吉祥话之后。那么,世尊明明是包括天界在内的世间之道的教导者,为什么还这样说呢?为了澄清这个质疑,才说了“据说世尊”等话。“道的教导者”是指涅槃之道的教导者,或者善趣之道的教导者。巴利
Attanopattāsaneti bhikkhūnaṃ āsanapariyante. Tesaṃ gāmikānaṃ dānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ maṅgalaṃ vatvā. Kasmā pana sadevakassa lokassa maggadesakopi samāno bhagavā evamāhāti codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Maggadesakoti nibbānamaggassa, sugatimaggassa vā desako.
“Tāyā”指的是阿兰若想。具足戒虽然是靠僧团羯磨而成立的,但因为它是依导师的命令而成立,所以说“我将把佛的遗产给你”这句话是依导师的命令而说的。另一些人则说:“导师在允许那位未满二十岁的人受具足戒时,说了‘我将把佛的遗产给你’。”注释书里说,由法将(舍利弗)担任戒师为他授具足戒后,他就成了法将的共住弟子。不过,《法句经注释》中记载,依小诵师的观点,法将等长老各有四万比丘为眷属,各自带着自己的随众分别而行,世尊则独自而行;而在这里以及《中部义注》中,应当知道,依长诵师和中诵师的观点,出行的方式有所不同。“Ayaṃ”指的是为大迦叶等人而作的游行。至于世尊不加带他人而独行的这种方式,就叫作“不匆忙的游行”,这是前后文的关联。巴利
Tāyāti araññasaññāya. Saṅghakammavasena sijjhamānāpi upasampadā satthu āṇāvasena sijjhanato ‘‘buddhadāyajjaṃ te dassāmī’’ti vuttanti vadanti. Apare pana ‘‘aparipuṇṇavīsativassasseva tassa upasampadaṃ anujānanto satthā ‘buddhadāyajjaṃ te dassāmī’ti avocā’’ti vadanti. Dhammasenāpatinā upajjhāyena upasampādetvā, tatoyevesa dhammasenāpatino saddhivihārikoti aṭṭhakathāsu vutto. Dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dhammasenāpatiāditherānaṃ cattālīsabhikkhusahassaparivārānaṃ attano attano parivārehi saddhiṃ paccekaṃ gamanaṃ, bhagavato ca ekakasseva gamanaṃ khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttaṃ, idha, pana majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyañca (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.65) aññathā gamanaṃ dīghabhāṇakamajjhimabhāṇakānaṃ matenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayanti mahākassapādīnamatthāya cārikā. Yaṃ pana anuggaṇhantassa bhagavato gamanaṃ, ayaṃ aturitacārikā nāmāti sambandho.
至于“此游行”,指的是不匆忙的游行。“大区域”是指较大的区域,因为它是按属于中部地区的外围标准来划定的。“中区域”是指在另外两者之间运作的区域。“内区域”是指比另外两者小的区域,或者因为包含在另外两者之内而称为最后的区域,也就是最内部的区域。那么,这些区域的量度是多少呢?于是说“在哪里”等。其中,九由旬的量度应当只按属于中部地区来理解,因为此后就不再作不匆忙的游行了。因为再往后,如来只作匆忙的游行,不作不匆忙的游行。游行之前必定先举行自恣,这是诸佛的常行,所以说“在大自恣中自恣后”等。“在初日”是指在第一个迦提月满月之后的初日。“周围”是指所到之处的四方周围。由于大众聚集,先到的人就能得到邀请。为了说明这样的聚集,所以说“在其他地方”等。止观尚嫩:这里,“止的嫩”是指近行定;“观的嫩”则应按四种智来理解,即名色分别智、度疑清净智、思惟智、道非道智。所谓“嫩观”,就是这四种智的别名。“给予自恣摄受”是指以给予许可的方式摄受。“在迦提月满月”是指在最后的迦提月满月。“在米伽西罗月的第一个初日”是依中部地区的用语,指米伽西罗月的第一个初日;若依现今的用语,则应知是最后一个迦提月黑半月的初日。巴利
Imaṃpana cārikanti aturitacārikaṃ. Mahāmaṇḍalanti majjhimadesapariyāpanneneva bāhirimena pamāṇena paricchinnattā mahantataraṃ maṇḍalaṃ. Majjhimamaṇḍalanti itaresaṃ ubhinnaṃ vemajjhe pavattaṃ maṇḍalaṃ. Antomaṇḍalanti itarehi khuddakaṃ maṇḍalaṃ, itaresaṃ vā antogadhattā antimaṃ maṇḍalaṃ, abbhantarimaṃ maṇḍalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ panimesaṃ pamāṇanti āha ‘‘katthā’’tiādi. Tattha navayojanasatikatā majjhimadesapariyāpannavaseneva gahetabbā tato paraṃ aturitacārikāya agamanato. Taduttari hi turitacārikāya eva tathāgato gacchati, na aturitacārikāya. Pavāretvāva cārikācaraṇaṃ buddhāciṇṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā’’tiādi. Pāṭipadadivaseti paṭhamakattikapuṇṇamiyā anantare pāṭipadavase. Samantāti gatagataṭṭhānassa catūsu passesu samantato. Mahājanakāyassa sannipatanato purimaṃ purimaṃ āgatā nimantetuṃ labhanti. Tathā sannipatanameva dassetuṃ ‘‘itaresū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathavipassanā taruṇā hontīti ettha samathassa taruṇabhāvo upacārasamādhivasena, vipassanāya pana saṅkhāraparicchedañāṇaṃ, kaṅkhāvitaraṇañāṇaṃ, sammasanañāṇaṃ, maggāmaggañāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ vasena veditabbo. Taruṇavipassanāti hi tesaṃ catunnaṃ ñāṇānamadhivacanaṃ. Pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvāti anumatidānavasena datvā. Kattikapuṇṇamāyanti pacchimakattikapuṇṇamiyaṃ. ‘‘Migasirassa paṭhamapāṭipadadivase’’ti idaṃ majjhimadesavohāravasena migasiramāsassa paṭhamaṃ pāṭipadadivasaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, etarahi pavattavohāravasena pana pacchimakattikamāsassa kāḷapakkhapāṭipadadivaso veditabbo.
“也因其他理由”是指:除了比丘们的止观还嫩之外,还有其他理由,比如在中区域应受度化的众生智慧成熟等。“四个月”是指从阿沙荼月满月的初日起,直到最后的迦提月满月为止,一共四个月。“周围百由旬”等,按前面所说的方式理解。“Vassa”就是雨安居,即安住的行为;已经住过雨安居,就叫“vutthavassa”,也就是他的雨安居已经住过。因为应当由如来调伏,所以说“世尊的应度化众生”,这是用属格来表达作者,或者也可以看作作者格。所谓“应度化众生”,是指应当依照他们的性行来调伏的众生。“等待根器成熟”是指等待信等根以解脱成熟的方式成熟。出发是在普沙月、摩伽月、颇勒具那月、质多月这四个月中的某一天,所以这里并没有限定月份。因此说“在那里住一个月、两个月或四个月”。“在那里”就是指在入雨安居的地方。“七个月”等要和“一个月”等依次对应:如果在那里再住一个月,就用七个月完成游行;如果住两个月,就用六个月;如果住三个月,就用五个月;如果在那里住四个月,就用四个月完成游行。那么,为什么要游行归来呢?为了消除这个疑问,所以说“如此”等。那些过度衰老、极度羸弱的人,他们什么时候能见到?他们是见不到的。正是为了悲悯世间——巴利
Aññenapi kāraṇenāti bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanātaruṇabhāvato aññenapi majjhimamaṇḍale veneyyānaṃ ñāṇaparipākādikāraṇena. Catumāsanti āsaḷhīpuṇṇamiyā pāṭipadato yāva pacchimakattikapuṇṇamī, tāva catumāsaṃ. ‘‘Samantā yojanasata’’ntiādinā vuttanayeneva. Vasanaṃ vassaṃ, vasanakiriyā, vutthaṃ vasitaṃ vassamassāti vutthavasso, tassa. Tathāgatena vinetabbattā ‘‘bhagavato veneyyasattā’’ti sāminiddeso vutto, kattuniddeso vā esa. Veneyyasattāti ca caritānurūpaṃ vinetabbasattā. Indriyaparipākaṃ āgamayamānoti saddhādiindriyānaṃ vimuttiparipācanabhāvena paripakkaṃ paṭimānento. Phussamāghaphagguṇacittamāsānaṃ aññataramāsassa paṭhamadivase nikkhamanato māsaniyamo ettha na katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekamāsaṃ vā dviticatumāsaṃ vā tattheva vasitvā’’ti. Tatthevāti vassūpagamanaṭṭhāne eva. ‘‘Sattahi vā’’tiādi ‘‘ekamāsaṃ vā’’tiādinā yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ – yadi aparampi ekamāsaṃ tattheva vasati, sattahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpeti. Yadi dvimāsaṃ chahi, yadi timāsaṃ pañcahi, yadi catumāsaṃ tattheva vasati, catūhi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpetīti. Kasmā pana cārikāgamananti āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘‘itī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atirekaṃ jarādubbalo bāḷhajiṇṇo. Te kadā passissanti, na passissanti eva. Lokānukampakāyāti lokānukampakāya eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na cīvarādihetū’’ti.
依步行而住,是指以双脚行走的方式,或者以双脚行走之后在各地各住几天的情形。因为“住”这个词通于一切威仪。为了身体安乐,是指由于固定住在一个地方而使体内界增盛的身体,通过行走而得到安适。为了期待事缘,是指为了期待像《火聚喻经》《摩伽提婆本生》等说法那样所需的事缘,或者是指期待事缘的到来,也就是在事缘发生时说法。为了制立学处,是指为了制立学处,如制定饮酒学处等。为了觉悟,是指为了让应被觉悟的众生觉悟四谛,如央掘魔罗等。以广大,是指以广大的悲悯。专为某一人或少数人而行的游方是固定游方;与此不同,为众多人,沿着村落、城镇、城市的次序而行的游方是不固定游方。因此说“于该处”等。“Yaṃ carati”是对行履的指称。巴利
Jaṅghavihāravasenāti jaṅghāhi vicaraṇavasena, jaṅghāhi vicaritvā tattha tattha katipāhaṃ nivasanavasena vā. Sabbiriyāpathasādhāraṇañhi vihāravacanaṃ. Sarīraphāsukatthāyāti ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne nibaddhavāsavasena ussannadhātukassa sarīrassa vicaraṇena phāsubhāvatthāya. Aṭṭhuppattikālābhikaṅkhanatthāyāti aggikkhandhopamasutta (a. ni. 7.72) maghadevajātakādi (jā. 1.1.9) desanānaṃ viya dhammadesanāya abhikaṅkhitabbaaṭṭhuppattikālatthāya, aṭṭhuppattikālassa vā abhikaṅkhanatthāya, aṭṭhuppattikāle dhammadesanatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāyāti surāpānasikkhāpadādi (pāci. 327, 328, 329) paññāpane viya sikkhāpadānaṃ paññāpanatthāya. Bodhanatthāyāti aṅgulimālādayo (ma. ni. 2.347) viya bodhaneyyasatte catusaccabodhanatthāya. Mahatāti mahatiyā. Kañci, katipaye vā puggale uddissa cārikā nibaddhacārikā. Tadaññā sambahule uddissa gāmanigamanagarapaṭipāṭiyā cārikā anibaddhacārikā. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Yaṃ caratīti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ.
“这正是这里所指的意思”,为了把已经说过的这句话详细展开,才说了“那时据说”等话。“一万世界界”,是就作为出生之处的十千轮围世界来说的。为什么这么说呢?因为适合受度的众生就在那里出现。世尊为了在那里见到那些适合受度、根机已经成熟的众生,便令佛智现前而安住,展开智网,所以这样说。这是就天众和梵天众而说的。至于人类,则是在这个轮围世界中,在这个连同眷属的赡部洲里,才是应当被引导觉悟的人。“应当被引导觉悟者的亲属”,指的是那些被称为应当被引导觉悟的众生,他们是世尊的亲属。因为就像由种姓等关系而成为亲属一样,由现观四谛的关系,应受化导的众生也被称为世尊的亲属。由于进入他们的行境,所以说“已进入一切知智之网”。据说世尊进入大悲定,从定中起来后,心中决意:“那些适合受度、智慧已经成熟的众生,愿他们出现在我的智前。”然后作意观察。由于这番作意,当时就有一位、两位或许多应受化导、堪能调伏的众生进入智的视野。这就是佛在这里的威神之力。对于这样进入视野的众生,佛再观察他们的宿世依止、过去所行、过去因,以及现在正在进行的修行。因为作意是为了摄受应受化导的众生。作意完成时,他们首先以应受化导的身份出现;接着,为了探究“将会有什么结果”,便从皈依等方面审察某种成就,观察他们的宿世依止等。因此说“于是世尊”等。“他”,就是阿摩昼。在互相辩论之后,也就是用“阿摩昼,你是这样吗”等话,对我所说的话,又以“乔达摩先生,那些剃头的沙门”等话作出回应之后,将说出粗恶语,即非善人的话,以三种方式反复骂人为“哑巴”等,种种不适合善人身份的话。所谓“不侍奉”,就是没有刺伤;意思是由于我慢和骄矜,已经没有那种躁动。巴利
‘‘Esā idha adhippetā’’ti vuttameva vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tadā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dasasahassilokadhātuyāti jātikkhettabhūtaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Tattheva bhabbasattānaṃ sambhavato. Tattha hi satte bhabbe paripakkindriye passituṃ buddhañāṇaṃ abhinīharitvā ṭhito bhagavā ñāṇajālaṃ pattharatīti vuccati, idañca devabrahmānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Manussā pana imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva ca saparivāre jambudīpe bodhaneyyā honti. Bodhaneyyabandhaveti bodhaneyyasattasaṅkhāte bhagavato bandhave. Gottādisambandhā viya hi saccapaṭivedhasambandhā veneyyā bhagavato bandhavā nāmāti. Gocarabhāvūpagamanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavā kira mahākaruṇāsamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ye sattā bhabbā paripakkañāṇā, te mayhaṃ ñāṇassa upaṭṭhahantū’’ti cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāya samannāharati, tassa sahasamannāhārā eko vā dve vā sambahulā vā tadā vinayūpagā veneyyā ñāṇassa āpāthamāgacchanti, ayamettha buddhānubhāvo. Evamāpāthagatānaṃ pana nesaṃ upanissayaṃ pubbacariyaṃ, pubbahetuṃ, sampati vattamānañca paṭipattiṃ oloketi. Veneyyasattapariggaṇhanatthañhi samannāhāre kate paṭhamaṃ nesaṃ veneyyabhāvena upaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, atha ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhavissatī’’ti saraṇagamanādivasena kañci nipphattiṃ vīmaṃsamāno pubbūpanissayādīni oloketi. Tenāha ‘‘atha bhagavā’’tiādi. Soti ambaṭṭho. Vādapaṭivādaṃ katvāti ‘‘evaṃ nu te ambaṭṭhā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.262) mayā vuttavacanassa ‘‘ye ca kho te bho gotama muṇḍakā samaṇakā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.263) paṭivacanaṃ datvā, asabbhivākyanti asappurisavācaṃ, tikkhattuṃ ibbhavādanipātanavasena nānappakāraṃ sādhusabhāvāya vācāya vattumayuttaṃ vākyaṃ vakkhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nibbisevananti vigatatudanaṃ, mānadappavasena apagataparinipphandananti attho.
应当进入,就是应当前往。那个村子只是一个名字而已,在这里探寻它的含义有什么意义呢?所以说道“也有读作ijjhānaṅgala的”。用“从那个方向”这句话,是为了显示:它符合对工具格的说明,在工具格的意义上使用宾格词,因此说“从那个方向进入了”。而“在那个地方”则是符合对地格的说明,所以说“进入了那个地方”。这两种说法都通过“从那个方向”等语句阐明了含义。去了,就是已经前往,意思是已经走了。再说去了,就是已经到达,意思是已经抵达。“在icchānaṅgala”这一说法,是显示当时世尊的行乞村落,这里的地格是表示附近的意思。而“在icchānaṅgala树林”这一说法,则是显示居住的地方,这里的地格是毫无例外地表示依止处。对这两个词以显示特殊含义的方式加以阐明,所以说了“依止icchānaṅgala”等话。按照“戒蕴品”等所说的方式,纯粹是出于顾念应受教化众生的利益,才显示世尊的住处。其中,法王世尊的修行完全就是制伏非法,而这种修行是依戒、定、慧而进行的,所以只取了戒等三者。戒蕴关,是说像转轮王的木栅栏等所造的关隘那样,把称为戒的关隘扎起来而住。因为用木堆等从四周在这里防护、围住,所以把a音拉长成为khandhāvāra(关隘),那是诸王不久住的地方。然而对于世尊来说,仅仅因为与不久住的作用相关联,在防止怖畏的意义上有相似性,所以戒也被这样称呼。定顶,就是称为正定的吉祥剑。一切知智处,就是称为一切知智的胜利处。随转,就是反复念诵。也有读作“一切知智箭”的,意思是一切知智金刚箭不断地反复随转。随自己所喜欢的住处,是显示一切住处共通的说法,意思是在天住等当中,随自己所喜欢的任何一种住处而住。巴利
Avasaritabbanti upagantabbaṃ. Tassa gāmassa idaṃ nāmamattaṃ, kimettha atthapariyesanāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ijjhānaṅgalantipi pāṭho’’ti. ‘‘Yena disābhāgenā’’ti karaṇaniddesānurūpaṃ karaṇatthe upayogavacananti dasseti ‘‘tena avasarī’’ti iminā. ‘‘Yasmiṃ padese’’ti pana bhummaniddesānurūpaṃ ‘‘taṃ vā avasarī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadubhayamevatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘tena disābhāgenā’’tiādinā. Gatoti upagato, agamāsīti attho. Puna gatoti sampatto, sampāpuṇīti attho. ‘‘Icchānaṅgale’’ti idaṃ tadā bhagavato gocaragāmanidassanaṃ, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ . ‘‘Icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍe’’ti idaṃ pana nivāsaṭṭhānadassanaṃ, nippariyāyato adhikaraṇe cetaṃ bhummanti tadubhayampi padaṃ visesatthadassanena vivaranto ‘‘icchānaṅgalaṃ upanissāyā’’tiādimāha . ‘‘Sīlakhandhāvāra’’ntiādi vuttanayena veneyyahitasamapekkhanavaseneva bhagavato vihāradassanaṃ. Tattha dhammarājassa bhagavato sabbaso adhammaniggaṇhanaparā eva paṭipatti, sā ca sīlasamādhipaññāvasenāti sīlādittayasseva gahaṇaṃ. Sīlakhandhāvāranti cakkavattirañño dāruiṭṭhakādikataṃ khandhāvārasadisaṃ sīlasaṅkhātaṃ khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā viharatīti sambandho. Dārukkhandhādīhi āsamantato varanti parikkhipanti etthāti hi khandhāvāro a-kārassa dīghaṃ katvā, rājūnaṃ aciranivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha pana bhagavato aciranivasanakiriyāsambandhamattena bhayanivāraṇaṭṭhena taṃsadisatāya sīlampi tathā vuccati. Samādhikontanti sammāsamādhisaṅkhātaṃ maṅgalasattiṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadanti sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ jayamantapadaṃ. Parivattayamānoti parijappamāno. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇasara’’ntipi pāṭho, sabbaññutaññāṇavajiraggasaraṃ aparāparaṃ samparivattamānoti attho. Yathābhirucitena vihārenāti sabbavihārasādhāraṇadassanaṃ, dibbavihārādīsu yena yena attanā abhirucitena vihārena viharatīti attho.
沸伽罗娑罗事缘的注释巴利
Pokkharasātivatthuvaṇṇanā
255 “Manteti(他诵习)”是指关于iruveda等明论之学。因为iruveda等由于应当守护而诵持的意义,所以被称为“manta(明论)”。“aṇa”这个音是指发出声音,所以说“sajjhāyati(他诵习)”。可是世间人说:“婆罗门是梵天的后代,没有词缀,有ṇatta,长音等。”为什么只这样说这个词义呢?所以说“idameva(正是此)”等。然后以“ariyā pana(然而圣者们)”等语句,排除了“那另一个词义是谁的”这一质疑。或者,为了驳斥世间人所说的“婆罗门由梵天所生”等词源说法,才这样说。因为用“idameva”这一限定,就驳斥了那种说法。而“jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ(对生来的婆罗门)”这一句,是在由不同词语所显示的、按生来婆罗门和清净婆罗门分为两类婆罗门当中,为了显示清净婆罗门的词源,才说“ariyā pana”等。因为圣者们依照词源学,把“bahanti pāpe bahi karontī(他们去除诸恶,把它们赶到外面)”的人称为婆罗门。“据说他的身体像白莲花一样”,这只是显示他得名的原因,其余则是随此附带地显示实际存在的殊胜之处而已。因此说“iti naṃ pokkharasadisattā pokkharasātīti sañjānantī(于是,因为他像莲花,人们就称他为‘莲花似’)”。因为依照词源学,身体与莲花相似的人就是pokkharasāti。或者,sāta这个词有“相似”的意思,身体与莲花相似,某人具有这样的身体,就是pokkharasāti。“Setapokkharasadiso”是说白莲花的颜色。“Devanagare”是指在ālakamanda等天城。“Ussāpitarajatatoraṇaṃ”是指深深埋入地下、高高耸立的银制因陀罗柱。“Kāḷamegharājī”是指有时能看见的黑色云片。“Rajatapanāḷikā”是指银制的圆筒。“Suvaṭṭitā”是说在应当圆的地方圆得很好。由于没有黑檀斑纹等,所以非常纯净。通过“Arājake(无王时)”等语句,也正显示了达到庄严美好的状态。巴利
255.Manteti iruvedādimantasatthe. Iruvedādayo hi guttabhāsitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. Aṇa-saddo saddeti āha ‘‘sajjhāyatī’’ti. Lokiyā pana vadanti ‘‘brahmuno apaccaṃ brāhmaṇo, nāgamo, ṇattaṃ, dīghādī’’ti. Kasmā ayameva vacanattho vuttoti āha ‘‘idamevā’’tiādi. Atha kesaṃ itaro vacanatthoti codanamapaneti ‘‘ariyā panā’’tiādinā. Atha vā yaṃ lokiyā vadanti ‘‘brahmunā jāto brāhmaṇo’’tiādiniruttiṃ, taṃ paṭikkhipituṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idamevā’’ti hi avadhāraṇena taṃ paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Jātibrāhmaṇāna’’nti pana iminā saddantarena dassitesu jātibrāhmaṇavisuddhibrāhmaṇavasena duvidhesu brāhmaṇesu visuddhibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttiṃ dassento ‘‘ariyā panā’’tiādimāha. Bahanti pāpe bahi karontīti hi ariyā brāhmaṇā niruttinayena. ‘‘Tassa kira kāyo setapokkharasadiso’’ti idamevassa nāmalābhahetudassanaṃ, sesaṃ pana tappasaṅgena yathāvijjamānavisesadassanameva. Tenāha ‘‘iti naṃ pokkharasadisattā pokkharasātīti sañjānantī’’ti. Pokkharena sadiso kāyo yassāti hi pokkharasātī niruttinayena . Sātasaddo vā sadisattho, pokkharena sāto sadiso kāyo tathā, so yassāti pokkharasātī. Setapokkharasadisoti setapadumavaṇṇo. Devanagareti ālakamandādidevapure. Ussāpitarajatatoraṇanti gambhīranemanikhātaṃ accuggataṃ rajatamayaṃ indakhīlaṃ . Kāḷamegharājīti kadāci dissamānā kāḷaabbhalekhā. Rajatapanāḷikāti rajatamayatumbaṃ. Suvaṭṭitāti vaṭṭabhāvassa yuttaṭṭhāne suṭṭhu vaṭṭulā. Kāḷavaṅgatilakādīnamabhāvena suparisuddhā.‘‘Arājake’’tiādināpi sobhaggappattabhāvameva nidasseti.
现在,为了进一步说明他获得这个名字的另一个原因,说了“然而这个人”等话。其中,“在雪山地区的大湖中,于莲花苞里出生”,这只是说明他得名的原因。其余部分则是顺着这个关联,显示事情如此发生的情形。因此说“人们因为见他卧在莲花上,就称他为‘卧莲者’”。因为“卧在莲花中”,所以是“卧莲者”;或者,“sāta”是指匀称的形状,生于莲花中而形状匀称,如此,具有这个特征,也就是“卧莲者”。然而,导师所说的“这位婆罗门过去有什么样的业行,使世尊为了摄受他而来到那个地方呢?”(《长部注》1.255),这话只是针对“然而这个人”等话的一部分而说的。从“他从那里来到人界”等话来看,应当理解:这里只是说他在天界等处辗转出生。针对由这样的业而受生,才说了“厌离母胎而住”等话。“于莲花苞中出生”这句,显示他是湿生而出现的。na pupphatīti,就是不开敷。tenāti,指那位苦行者。nāḷatoti,指花茎。suvaṇṇacuṇṇehi piñjaraṃ hemavaṇṇo yassāti suvaṇṇacuṇṇapiñjaro,意思是:因为被金粉散布而呈金黄色,所以是金粉所成的金黄色。《萨罗陀义显注》(sārattha. ṭī. 1.22)中说,“piñjara”这个词是金黄色的同义词。在“padumareṇupiñjara”这里,也是同样的道理。rajatabimbakanti,就是银制的像。paṭijaggāmīti,就是养育。pāranti,指终点,或者指完成;就像河流、大海等的终点是彼岸一样。paṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātena sabhāvañāṇena paṇḍito,以称为“结生智”的自然智而成为智者。iti kattabbesu, vedesu vā visāradapaññāsaṅkhātena veyyattiyena byatto,以称为“于应作之事或吠陀中通达之智”的聪慧而成为善巧者。aggabrāhmaṇoti,指各方之首的婆罗门。sippanti,指吠陀之学,因为他已通达那部论典。brahmadeyyaṃ adāsīti,按照后面将要说的方式,作为梵施而给予。巴利
Idāni aparampi tassa nāmalābhahetuṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ca ‘‘himavantapadese mahāsare padumagabbhe nibbattī’’ti idamevassa nāmalābhahetudassanaṃ. Sesaṃ pana tappasaṅgena tathāpavattākāradassanameva. Tenāha ‘‘iti naṃ pokkhare sayitattā pokkharasātīti sañjānantī’’ti. Pokkhare kamale sayatīti hi pokkharasātī, sātaṃ vā vuccati samasaṇṭhānaṃ, pokkhare jātaṃ samasaṇṭhānaṃ tathā, tamassatthītipi pokkharasātī. Yaṃ pana ācariyena vuttaṃ ‘‘imassa brāhmaṇassa kīdiso pubbayogo, yena naṃ bhagavā anuggaṇhituṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatoti āhā’’ti, (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255) tadetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādivacanaṃ ekadesameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘So tato manussaloka’’ntiādivacanato devaloke nibbattīti ettha aparāparaṃ nibbatti eva vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathārūpena kammena nibbattimeva sandhāya ‘‘mātukucchivāsaṃ jigucchitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Padumagabbhe nibbattī’’ti iminā saṃsedajoyeva hutvā nibbattīti dasseti. Na pupphatīti na vikasati. Tenāti tāpasena. Nāḷatoti pupphadaṇḍato. Suvaṇṇacuṇṇehi piñjaraṃ hemavaṇṇo yassāti suvaṇṇacuṇṇapiñjaro, taṃ, suvaṇṇacuṇṇehi vikiṇṇabhāvena hemavaṇṇanti attho. Piñjarasaddo hi hemavaṇṇapariyāyoti sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.22) vuttaṃ. Esa nayo padumareṇupiñjaranti etthāpi. Rajatabimbakanti rūpiyamayarūpakaṃ. Paṭijaggāmīti posemi. Pāranti pariyosānaṃ, nipphatti vā vuccati nadīsamuddādīnaṃ pariyosānabhūtaṃ pāraṃ viyāti katvā. Paṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātena sabhāvañāṇena paṇḍito. Iti kattabbesu, vedesu vā visāradapaññāsaṅkhātena veyyattiyena byatto. Aggabrāhmaṇoti disāpāmokkhabrāhmaṇo. Sippanti vedasippaṃ tasseva pakaraṇādhigatattā. Brahmadeyyaṃ adāsīti vakkhamānanayena brahmadeyyaṃ katvā adāsi.
在“ajjhāvasati(居住)”这个词里,adhi 和 ā 都只是前缀而已,所以“ukkaṭṭha”是在“ajjhā-”与“vas”结合、表示处格意义时所用的业格。或者,adhi 有“统治”的意思,ā 有“界限”的意思,因此为了说明“ukkaṭṭha”是在与不变介词结合、表示处格意义时所用的业格,就用“在名为 ukkaṭṭha 的”等说法来显示。为了阐明这个意思,又说了“tassā(对她的)”等话。因为“成为那座城的主人”是对“abhibhavitvā(征服之后)”的解释,以此表明“主人身份就是征服”。而“以某种界限”等话是对 ā 这个前缀含义的解释,以此表明“ā 有界限的意思,所谓界限,就是在那里应当居住的、不隶属于他人的状态”。因为“以某种界限”的意思是:以那种被称为不隶属于他人、不与他人共通的状态。“依前缀之力”等话则是对“在名为 ukkaṭṭha 的”这个说法的解释,以此表明“即使有使用处格的可能,由于与两种前缀——随顺词根意义而起限定作用的、特殊的——相结合,这里只施设了业格”。“据说他的”等话则是显示随义而立的名称。所谓“基址”,指适合建造城市的地段,就像“园基址、寺基址”等说法中的那样。巴利
‘‘Ajjhāvasatī’’ti ettha adhi-saddo, ā-saddo ca upasaggamattaṃ, tato ‘‘ukkaṭṭha’’nti idaṃ ajjhāpubbavasayoge bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Adhi-saddo vā issariyattho, ā-saddo mariyādattho tato ‘‘ukkaṭṭha’’nti idaṃ kammappavacanīyayoge bhummatthe upayogavacananti dasseti ‘‘ukkaṭṭhanāmake’’tiādinā. Tadevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tassa nagarassa sāmiko hutvā’’ti hi ‘‘abhibhavitvā’’ti etassatthavivaraṇaṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘sāmibhāvo abhibhavana’’nti. ‘‘Yāya mariyādāyā’’tiādi pana ā-saddassatthavivaraṇaṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘āsaddo mariyādattho, mariyādā ca nāma yāya tattha vasitabbaṃ, sāyeva aparādhīnatā’’ti. Yāya mariyādāyāti hi yāya aparādhīnatāsaṅkhātāya anaññasādhāraṇāya avatthāyāti attho. ‘‘Upasaggavasenā’’tiādi pana ‘‘ukkaṭṭhanāmake’’ti etassatthavivaraṇaṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘satipi bhummavacanappasaṅge dhātvatthānuvattakavisesakabhūtehi duvidhehipi upasaggehi yuttattā upayogavacanamevettha vihita’’nti. ‘‘Tassa kirā’’tiādi pana atthānugatasamaññāparidīpanaṃ. Vatthu nāma nagaramāpanārahabhūmippadeso ‘‘ārāmavatthu, vihāravatthū’’tiādīsu viya.
“Ukkā”是指杆灯。他们想:“今天是吉祥日,正是吉星高照的好时辰,别错过这个良辰。”为了在夜里守护光明,就点起杆灯,在杆灯燃烧的时候,执取了建城的地基。由此说明这个意思:他们站在杆灯那里,所以叫“Ukkaṭṭhā”。按照词根分解等构词方式,或者按照词源学的方法,在杆灯照耀中站立的人,就叫“Ukkaṭṭhā”;同样,在杆灯被安放时站立的人,也叫“Ukkaṭṭhā”。《中部义注》里则这样说:“那座城市,因为人们想着‘今天是吉祥日、良辰、吉星高照,别错过’,即使到了夜里,也在杆灯安放时建造,所以也叫‘Ukkaṭṭhā’;意思就是,在点燃并高举杆灯的时候建造。”这和本处所说相符,也一致,因为执取城市地基也属于建造城市的一部分,应当这样理解。另有些人说:“因为地段具足、资具具足、人众具足,那座城市具足殊胜的功德,所以得名‘Ukkaṭṭhā’。”世间人则说:“在它建造的时候,有火炬被高举,所以叫‘Ukkaṭṭhā’,这只是语音的变化。”而且这个名称是阴性词,因此这里可以看到这样的用法:“正如乔达摩尊者在乌卡塔城接近其他优婆塞家”,在《根本分别经》等中也有“一时,世尊住在乌卡塔城的善伽林沙罗王树下”等。这里就让它这样吧:依前缀而说业格;那么在其他词中这又如何成立呢?为了回答这个疑问,他说“因为那在其他词中不被使用”。其中,“那”是指依前缀而与业格相连的“乌卡塔”一词。“不被使用”是指不作为修饰语而被使用。“其他词中”是指在“多畜”等七个词中。巴利
Ukkāti daṇḍadīpikā. Aggahesunti ‘‘ajja maṅgaladivaso, tasmā sunakkhattaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ sukhaṇo mā atikkamī’’ti rattivibhāyanaṃ anurakkhantā, rattiyaṃ ālokakaraṇatthāya ukkā ṭhapetvā ukkāsu jalamānāsu nagarassa vatthuṃ aggahesuṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti – ukkāsu ṭhitāti ukkaṭṭhā. Mūlavibhujādi ākatigaṇapakkhepena, niruttinayena vā ukkāsu vijjotayantīsu ṭhitāti ukkaṭṭhā, tathā ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitā āsītipi ukkaṭṭhāti. Majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tañca nagaraṃ ‘maṅgaladivaso sukhaṇo, sunakkhattaṃ mā atikkamī’ti rattimpi ukkāsu ṭhitāsu māpitattā ukkaṭṭhātipi vuccati, daṇḍadīpikāsu jāletvā dhāriyamānāsu māpitattāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā) tadapiminā saṃsandati ceva sameti ca nagaravatthupariggahassapi nagaramāpanapariyāpannattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘bhūmibhāgasampattiyā, upakaraṇasampattiyā, manussasampattiyā ca taṃ nagaraṃ ukkaṭṭhaguṇayogato ukkaṭṭhāti nāmaṃ labhatī’’ti. Lokiyā pana vadanti ‘‘ukkā dhārīyati etassa māpitakāleti ukkaṭṭhā, vaṇṇavikāroya’’nti, itthiliṅgavasena cāyaṃ samaññā, tenevidha payogo dissati ‘‘yathā ca bhavaṃ gotamo ukkaṭṭhāya aññāni upāsakakulāni upasaṅkamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.299) mūlapariyāyasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) ca ‘‘ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’tiādi. Evamettha hotu upasaggavasena upayogavacanaṃ, kathaṃ panetaṃ sesapadesu siyāti anuyogenāha ‘‘tassa anupayogattā sesapadesū’’ti. Tattha tassāti upasaggavasena upayogasaññuttassa ‘‘ukkaṭṭha’’nti padassa. Anupayogattāti visesanabhāvena anupayuttattā. Sesapadesūti ‘‘sattussada’’ntiādīsu sattasu padesu.
“难道这里的词语用法不符合语法规则吗?”为了排除这个责难,说了“于此……应当探究”这句话。其中“于此”,是指依前缀而用宾格,或者依不适用而用宾格,这两种情况。“规则”是指作为把握方法的道理而成的语法规则,或者指经论。“应当探究”是说:因为它存在于诸音声论中,所以应当以智慧去寻求、应当去了知。因为以此表明:这个词语用法确实是符合语法规则的。而语法家们也认可:“在upa、anu、adhi、ā等前缀的支配关系中,于处格的意义上获得宾格;而对于应被修饰的词语,作为同位的修饰语,则不适用宾格。”其中,当adhi和ā只是前缀时,就依“第三、第七……”的规则,在adhi等前缀的支配关系中使用宾格。正如他们所说:“在处格的意义上,于时间、方位中,在upa、anu、adhi、ā等的支配关系中;在adhi等前缀表示止住、坐卧等的用法中;在饮、行等行为中,用第二格(宾格)。于时间:早晨时分,着衣之后;一时,世尊;某时,以前生缘为缘;此夜,四大天王。于方位:东方,持国天王。在upa等前缀的支配关系中:近村而住、随村而住、依村而住、住于家中;在adhi等前缀表示止住、坐卧的用法中:将躺卧于地上、站立于村中、住于村中。在饮、行等行为中:饮河水、行于村中等等。”巴利
Kiṃ nu khvāyaṃ saddapayogo saddalakkhaṇānugatoti codanamapaneti ‘‘tattha…pe… pariyesitabba’’nti iminā. Tatthāti upasaggavasena, anupayogavasena ca upayogavacananti vutte dubbidhepi vidhāne. Lakkhaṇanti gahaṇūpāyañāyabhūtaṃ saddalakkhaṇaṃ, suttaṃ vā. Pariyesitabbanti saddasatthesu vijjamānattā ñāṇena gavesitabbaṃ, gahetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena hi saddalakkhaṇānugatovāyaṃ saddapayogoti dasseti, saddavidū ca icchanti ‘‘upaanuadhiāiccādipubbavasayoge sattamiyatthe upayogavacanaṃ pāpuṇāti, visesitabbapade ca yathāvidhimanupayogo visesanapadānaṃ samānādhikaraṇabhūtāna’’nti. Tatra yadā adhi-saddo, ā-saddo ca upasaggamattaṃ, tadā ‘‘tatiyāsattamīnañcā’’ti lakkhaṇena ajjhāpubbavasayoge upayogavacanaṃ. Tathā hi vadanti ‘‘sattamiyatthe kāladisāsu upānvajjhāvasayoge, adhipubbasiṭhāvasānaṃ payoge, tappānacāresu ca dutiyā. Kāle pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā, ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā, kañci kālaṃ purejātapaccayena paccayo, imaṃ rattiṃ cattāro mahārājāno. Disāyaṃ purimaṃ disaṃ dhataraṭṭho. Upādipubbavasayoge gāmaṃ upavasati, gāmaṃ anuvasati, gāmaṃ āvasati, agāraṃ ajjhāvasati, adhipubbasiṭhāvasānaṃ payoge pathaviṃ adhisessati, gāmaṃ adhitiṭṭhati, gāmaṃ ajjhāvasati. Tappānacāresu nadiṃ pivati, gāmaṃ carati iccādīti.
当adhi这个词表示“统治”的意思,而ā这个词表示“界限”的意思时,就按照“与不变化词相连”的规则,在与不变化词关联的情况下使用业格。正如他们所说:“anu、ā等前缀,以及dhī等不变词,被称为‘不变化词’——也就是那些能表明被称为‘行为’的业的不变化词。”那么,其余的词在按照规则不适用业格的情况下,又是根据哪条规则来使用业格的呢?就是根据前面所说的那条规则。如果这样的话,由于它们也是依止的关系,岂不是会有多种不同的依止吗?不会,因为众多词以城市为所依而具有同一事义,它们只是在各自的意义上有差别而已。然而,其他语法学家这样认为:“同位的词,通过与行为逐一关联,而与应被修饰的词具有相同的格,比如‘他做席子,广大的,美丽的’——在这里,‘他做席子,做广大的,做美丽的’,通过与行为逐一关联,在业的意义上都是第二格(业格)。”但这一点应当加以考察,因为作为同位的修饰语,并不存在与行为的关联。因为当存在与行为的关联时,它就不再是修饰语了。巴利
Yadā pana adhi-saddo issariyattho, ā-saddo ca mariyādattho, tadā ‘‘kammappavacanīyayutte’’ti lakkhaṇena kammappavacanīyayoge upayogavacanaṃ. Tathā hi vadanti ‘‘anuādayo upasaggā, dhīādayo nipātā ca kammappavacanīyasaññā honti kiriyāsaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ pavacanīyaṃ yesaṃ te kammappavacanīyā’’ti. Sesapadānaṃ pana yathāvidhimanupayoge katarena lakkhaṇena upayogavacananti? Yathāvuttalakkhaṇeneva. Yajjevaṃ tesampi ādhārabhāvato nānādhāratā siyāti? Na, bahūnampi padānaṃ nagaravasena ekatthabhāvato. Sakatthamattañhi tesaṃ nānākaraṇanti. Aññe pana saddavidū evamicchanti ‘‘samānādhikaraṇapadānaṃ paccekaṃ kiriyāsambandhanena visesitabbapadena samānavacanatā yathā ‘kaṭaṃ karoti, vipulaṃ, dassanīya’nti ettha ‘kaṭaṃ karoti, vipulaṃ karoti, dassanīyaṃ karotī’ti paccekaṃ kiriyāsambandhanena kammattheyeva dutiyā’’ti, tadetaṃ vicāretabbaṃ visesanapadānaṃ samānādhikaraṇānaṃ kiriyāsambajjhanābhāvato. Yadā hi kiriyāsambajjhanaṃ, tadā visesanameva na hotīti.
这里所说的“ussadatā”(繁盛)就是指数量众多,所以称为“bahujana”(众人)。而用“ākiṇṇamanussa”(人群拥挤)等说法来显示那种众多。在森林等处捉来后应当饲养的,就是“posāvaniyā”(应饲养者),以此显示它们是有情众生。“āvijjhitvā”的意思是围绕。挖掘而成的就叫莲池,筑堤围成的就叫水库。只有在常有水充满的地方,水生花才得以生长,所以说“udakassa niccabharitānevā”(常有水充满)。至于“udakassa”一词,在与“充满”这一动作结合时,是属格用作具格,就像“mahante mahante sāṇipasibbake kārāpetvā hiraññasuvaṇṇassa pūrāpetvā”(让人做大麻袋,再让人装满金银)等句中的用法一样。“saha dhaññenāti sadhaññaṃ”——这个词是参照“城市”一词,用中性形式说出的;或者按照文句,用业格说出。一切处都依此类推。在“pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇādibhedaṃ bahudhaññasannicayaṃ”(种种前谷后谷等类的大量粮食储藏)这里,“ādi”一词涵盖了除前谷后谷之外的葫芦、南瓜等可作食物之物。由此可以理解这个意思:这里的“dhañña”一词并不是指稻谷等某一种粮食,而是因为适合饲养,就指一切前谷后谷及可作食物之物;或者是作为“virūpekasesa”(以偏概全的省略语)来使用的。所谓“ettāvatā”,就是以上所说的三个词。所谓“rājalīlāyā”,就是国王们的享乐方式。所谓“samiddhiyā”,就是以受用和享用都圆满具足为“sampatti samiddhisampatti”(成就与圆满成就)。巴利
Ussadatā nāmettha bahulatāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bahujana’’nti. Taṃ pana bahulataṃ dasseti ‘‘ākiṇṇamanussa’’ntiādinā. Araññādīsu gahetvā posetabbā posāvaniyā, etena tesaṃ dhammabhāvaṃ dasseti. Āvijjhitvāti parikkhipitvā. Khaṇitvā katā pokkharaṇī, ābandhitvā kataṃ taḷākaṃ. Acchinnūdakaṭṭhāneyeva jalajakusumāni jātānīti vuttaṃ ‘‘udakassa niccabharitānevā’’ti. Udakassāti ca pūraṇakiriyāyoge karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ ‘‘mahante mahante sāṇipasibbake kārāpetvā hiraññasuvaṇṇassa pūrāpetvā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 34) viya. Saha dhaññenātisadhaññanti nagarasaddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaliṅgena vuttaṃ, yathāvākyaṃ vā upayogavacanena. Evaṃ sabbattha. Pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇādibhedaṃ bahudhaññasannicayanti ettha ādisaddena tadubhayavinimuttaṃ alābukumbhaṇḍādisūpeyyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tenāyamattho viññāyati – nayidha dhaññasaddo sāliādidhaññavisesavācako, posane sādhuttamattena pana niravasesapubbaṇṇāparaṇṇasūpeyyavācako, virūpekasesavasena vā payuttoti. Ettāvatāti yathāvuttapadattayena. Rājalīlāyāti rājūnaṃ vilāsena. Samiddhiyā upabhogaparibhogasampuṇṇabhāvena sampatti samiddhisampatti.
有人说到“王家之地”时,必然会被问“是谁给的”,所以用“由谁”等话来说明这个说法的来由。另一种出自注释书的解释是:像国王那样可以享用的,就叫“王家之地”。由于这份产业是从国王那里得到、属于家族所有,并一代代传给儿子、孙子、曾孙,所以说“成为国王的遗产”。就像“诸比丘,你们应当成为我的法嗣”等句中,“dāya”这个词就是“遗产”的同义词,因此说“意思是遗产”。为了回应“既然是给出去的,为什么叫梵天所施”这一责难,便用“举起伞盖”等话作答。因为依国王的意愿而享用,所以除了上述受用所得之外,并没有所谓“梵天所施”之说;而这里所说的正是那样给出去的,因此说名为“梵天所施”。所谓“可断可裂”,是指身体刑、杖刑、财产刑等类别的刑罚。“河津、山等”,是指河津、山麓、村门、林口等。“白伞盖”一语,也把其余王者的庄严资具一并包括在内,应当知道这是因为白伞盖为其首要。若只说“应由国王享用”,那么这里所指的意思就不明显,所以才加上“应”字。因为那个人即使不是从王族出身,只要成为国王,就能享用,这就是这里所指的意思。应施与的,就是遗产;仅凭“王赐”这一词,就已成立是国王所给,那么再说“由憍萨罗国的波斯匿王所给”又有什么意义呢?于是说“为了显示施与者国王”等。因为并未显示是由某某国王所给,所以才这样说,这是其意趣。在这里,第一说中,因为在“王家之地”一词上有疑问的可能,所以这样说;第二说中,则在“王赐”一词上,也应看出这一差别。其中,由于饭食等极为丰盛,没有地方摆在前面,所以连波斯匿也把饭、羹、菜等分给他,因此称为“波斯匿”,这是不省略的复合词。那位国王确实连一斗米煮成的饭,也配上自己所喜爱的羹菜来吃。因此,当他吃过早斋后,来到世尊面前,辗转反侧,被睡眠所压倒,不能端坐时,世尊便——巴利
‘‘Rājabhogga’’nti vutte ‘‘kena dinna’’nti avassaṃ pucchitabbato evaṃ vuttanti dasseti ‘‘kenā’’tiādinā. Raññā viya bhuñjitabbanti vā rājabhogganti aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo. Yāva puttanattapanattaparamparā kulasantakabhāvena rājato laddhattā ‘‘rañño dāyabhūta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me bhikkhave bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) viya ca dāyasaddo dāyajjapariyāyoti āha ‘‘dāyajjanti attho’’ti. Kathaṃ dinnattā brahmadeyyaṃ nāmāti codanaṃ pariharati ‘‘chattaṃ ussāpetvā’’tiādinā. Rājanīhārena paribhuñjitabbato hi uddhaṃ paribhogalābhassa brahmadeyyatā nāma natthi, idañca tathā dinnameva, tasmā brahmadeyyaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Chejjabhejjanti sarīradaṇḍadhanadaṇḍādibhedaṃ daṇḍamāha. Nadītitthapabbatādīsūti nadītitthapabbatapādagāmadvāraaṭavimukhādīsu. Setacchattaggahaṇena sesarājakakudhabhaṇḍampi gahitaṃ tappamukhattāti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Raññā bhuñjitabba’’ntveva vutte idhādhippetattho na pākaṭoti hutvā-saddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Tañhi so rājakulato asamudāgatopi rājā hutvā bhuñjituṃ labhatīti ayamidhādhippeto attho. Dātabbanti dāyaṃ, ‘‘rājadāya’’nti imināva raññā dinnabhāve siddhe ‘‘raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinna’’nti puna ca vacanaṃ kimatthiyanti āha ‘‘dāyakarājadīpanattha’’ntiādi. Asukena raññā dinnanti dāyakarājassa adīpitattā evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo. Ettha ca paṭhamanaye ‘‘rājabhogga’’nti pade pucchāsambhavato idaṃ vuttaṃ, dutiyanaye pana ‘‘rājadāya’’nti padeti ayampi viseso daṭṭhabbo. Tattha atibahulatāya purato ṭhapanokāsābhāvato passenapi odanasūpabyañjanādi dīyati etassāti pasenadi, aluttasamāsavasena. So hi rājā taṇḍuladoṇassa odanampi tadupiyena sūpabyañjanena bhuñjati. Tathā hi naṃ bhuttapātarāsakāle satthu santikamāgantvā ito cito ca samparivattantaṃ niddāya abhibhuyyamānaṃ ujukaṃ nisīditumasakkontaṃ bhagavā –
当一个人昏沉贪睡,又吃得特别多,
昏睡不醒,翻来覆去地躺着;
就像一头大野猪被喂食养肥了,
愚人一次又一次地进入母胎。巴利
‘‘Middhī yadā hoti mahagghaso ca, Niddāyitā samparivattasāyī; Mahāvarāhova nivāpavuṭṭho, Punappunaṃ gabbhamupeti mando’’ti. (dha. pa. 325; netti. 26, 90);
他用这首偈颂来教导。他有个外甥,是个名叫善见的年轻人——巴利
Imāya gāthāya ovadi. Bhāgineyyañca so sudassanaṃ nāma māṇavaṃ –
对于始终具念的人来说,
对饮食知量的人来说
他的受变得轻微,
寿命在慢慢消磨。巴利
‘‘Manujassa sadā satīmato, Mattaṃ jānato laddhabhojane; Tanukassa bhavanti vedanā, Saṇikaṃ jīrati āyupālaya’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.24) –
他让人在世尊面前学下这首偈颂,每当自己吃饭时,到了最后一口饭的时候,每天都让人念诵。后来他审察这首偈颂的含义,一次又一次地省下最后一口饭,最后稳定在只有一筒饭的量,身体变得瘦削,却有力气,得到了安乐。《优陀那注释》里则这样说:“因为战胜了敌军,所以叫波斯匿。”精通语音的人也用这个例子来说明ja音变成da音。因为他战胜了自己的外甥阿阇世王,以及五百盗贼等被围困的人。因为他是憍萨罗国的统治者,所以叫憍萨罗。因此应该知道,这是由身为憍萨罗统治者的、名叫波斯匿的国王所施与的,这就是这句话的意思。由于是以“舍弃、施与”的方式,也就是不再取回而施与,所以这里叫“梵天所赐”,而不是像前一种解释那样,以国王简略受用的方式施与,因此说“yathā”等语。所谓“成为舍弃”,或者以舍弃的方式而施与,就是“舍弃施与”,以放舍之施而舍弃,这就是它的意思。巴利
Imaṃ gāthaṃ bhagavato santike uggahāpetvā attano bhuñjantassa osānapiṇḍakāle devasikaṃ bhaṇāpeti, so aparena samayena tassā gāthāya atthaṃ sallakkhetvā punappunaṃ osānapiṇḍapariharaṇena nāḷikodanamattāya saṇṭhahitvā tanusarīro balavā sukhappatto ahosīti. Udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 12) pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paccāmittaṃ parasenaṃ jinātīti pasenadī’’ti. Saddavidūpi hi ja-kārassa da-kāre idamudāharanti. So hi attano bhāgineyyaṃ ajātasatturājānaṃ, pañcacorasatādīni ca avaruddhakāni jinātīti. Kosalaraṭṭhassādhipatibhāvato kosalo, tasmā kosalādhipatinā pasenadi nāmakena raññā dinnanti attho veditabbo. Nissaṭṭhapariccattatāsaṅkhātena puna aggahetabbabhāveneva dinnattā idha brahmadeyyaṃ nāma, na tu purimanaye viya rājasaṅkhepena paribhuñjitabbabhāvena dinnattāti āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Nissaṭṭhaṃ hutvā, nissaṭṭhabhāvena vā pariccattaṃ nissaṭṭhapariccattaṃ, muttacāgavasena cajitanti attho.
为了说明“听闻”是可得的,就用“upalabhī(得闻者)”这个词来表示;而这个“可得”正是以听闻的方式被了知,所以说“他依循到达耳门的言语音声而了知”。因为这里所说的“听闻”,正是依循耳门、随顺识路的了知,由于这样才证得了“沙门乔达摩确实……”等所说的义理;而不是仅仅依耳门之路去听,因为仅凭那样并不能证得那个义理。由于“eva”一词的作用是决定,所以整个句子都含有决定的意思。因此,即使没有直接表达该义的词,也能通过排除其他含义而理解“他确实听到了,他的听闻没有任何障碍”这个意思,所以说“‘kho’只是填词的小品词”。而且,在整句都含有决定义的情况下,由于以“eva”的力量,这个义理已被格外明显地了知,所以从已得义的角度,为了决定义而取用“kho”一词,这是第一种解释。那么,从已得义的角度作决定,究竟成就了什么义理呢?已经决定了,所以说“tatthā”等语。接着,为了排除“如果‘kho’只是填词,那有什么作用”的质疑,就说“以填词……”等,意思是:它仅仅是为了使字母组成的词和词组成的句子流畅连贯。因为当取用“kho”时,“assosi”这个词就像被它充实、装饰、庄严了一样,变得圆满;由此,前后词语也因易于发音而变得流畅;如果不取用,就不会这样。因此这里的“matta”(仅)一词是排除修饰语的意思,由此表明它并不表示其他含义;而“eva”一词则表明词语和文句的流畅性是确定的。巴利
Savanaṃ upalabbhoti dasseti ‘‘upalabhī’’ti iminā, so cāyamupalabbho savanavaseneva jānananti vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena aññāsī’’ti. Sotadvārānusāraviññāṇavīthivasena jānanameva hi idha savanaṃ teneva ‘‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo’’tiādinā vuttassatthassa adhigatattā, na pana sotadvāravīthivasena sutamattaṃ tena tadatthassa anadhigatattā. Avadhāraṇaphalattā saddapayogassa sabbampi vākyaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇaṃ. Tasmā tadatthajotakasaddena vināpi aññatthāpohanavasena assosi eva, nāssa koci savanantarāyo ahosīti ayamattho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘padapūraṇamatte nipāto’’ti, antogadhāvadhāraṇepi ca sabbasmiṃ vākye nītatthato avadhāraṇatthaṃ kho-saddaggahaṇaṃ ‘‘evā’’ti sāmatthiyā sātisayaṃ etadatthassa viññāyamānattāti paṭhamavikappo vutto, nītatthato avadhāraṇena ko attho ekantiko kato, avadhārito cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Atha padapūraṇamattena kho-saddena kiṃ payojananti codanamapaneti ‘‘padapūraṇenā’’tiādinā, akkharasamūhapadassa, padasamūhavākyassa ca siliṭṭhatāpayojanamattamevāti attho. ‘‘Assosī’’ti hidaṃ padaṃ kho-sadde gahite tena phullitaṃ maṇḍitaṃ vibhūsitaṃ viya hontaṃ pūritaṃ nāma hoti, tena ca purimapacchimapadāni sukhuccāraṇavasena siliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahite, tasmā padapūraṇamattampi padabyañjanasiliṭṭhatāpayojananti vuttaṃ hoti. Mattasaddo cettha visesanivattiattho, tenassa anatthantaradīpanatā dassitā, eva-saddena pana padabyañjanasiliṭṭhatāya ekantikatā.
“沙门确实……”这类话,是为了显示前面所听到的内容而举出的例子,所以接着用“现在……”等来说明。这里“已平息诸恶”应当理解为:彻底地、毫无剩余地、连习气一起都平息了诸恶。这样一来,世尊平息诸恶,就与外道已离欲者、有学、无学平息诸恶有了相应的区别。因此说“世尊以无上的圣道平息了诸恶”。为了用义释的文字来证明这个意思,就说“此亦曾于……中说”。“assa”指的是这位比丘,或者指世尊。“samitā”的意思是已令平息、已令完成,或者已令达到平息的状态;或者对于作为受益者的他来说,这些恶已成为寂静。又说“世尊……”等,是表示这个名称是随顺其义而用在世尊身上的。“tena”指因为如此平息了诸恶。“yathābhūtaṃ pavatto”就是“yathābhuccaṃ”,这就是功德;依彼而证得者为“tathā”。“khalū”中的“kho”是不变词,就像“khalupacchābhattika”这个词中的用法一样,并不是名词;又因为不变词有多种含义,这里只取“传闻”义,所以说“传闻义的不变词”,这里的“传闻”指辗转听闻。“brāhmaṇajātisamudāgataṃ”意为由婆罗门种姓而来,也就是说由出生而得。“只是称呼”即只是亲爱的称呼之语,并不是进一步揭示意义。因为这些是亲爱的称呼,如“喂!”“贤友!”“诸天所爱者!”为了用《法句经》的婆罗门故事和《经集》的婆私吒经句,证明“由婆罗门种姓而来”的称呼义,所以说“此亦曾于……中说”。巴利
‘‘Samaṇo khalū’’tiādi yathāsutatthanidassananti dasseti ‘‘idānī’’tiādinā. Samitapāpattāti ettha accantaṃ anavasesato savāsanaṃ samitapāpattāti attho gahetabbo. Evañhi bāhirakavītarāgasekkhāsekkhapāpasamanato bhagavato pāpasamanaṃ yathārahaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavā ca anuttarena ariyamaggena samitapāpo’’ti. Tadevatthaṃ niddesapāṭhena sādhetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Assāti anena bhikkhunā, bhagavatā vā. Samitāti samāpitā, samabhāvaṃ vā āpādayitā, assa vā sampadānabhūtassa santā hontīti attho. Atthānugatā cāyaṃ bhagavati samaññāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavā cā’’tiādi. Tenāti tathā samitapāpattā. Yathābhūtaṃ pavatto yathābhuccaṃ, tadeva guṇo, tena adhigataṃ tathā. ‘‘Khalū’’ti idaṃ nepātikaṃ khalupacchābhattikapade (mi. pa. 4.1.8) viya, na nāmaṃ, anekatthattā ca nipātānaṃ anussavanatthova idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘anussavanatthe nipāto’’ti, paramparasavanañcettha anussavanaṃ. Brāhmaṇajātisamudāgatanti brāhmaṇajātiyā āgataṃ, jātisiddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ālapanamattanti piyālapanavacanamattaṃ, na taduttari atthaparidīpanaṃ. Piyasamudāhārā hete ‘‘bho’’ti vā ‘‘āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti vā. Dhammapade brāhmaṇavatthupāṭhena, (dha. pa. 315 ādayo) suttanipāte ca vāseṭṭhasuttapadena brāhmaṇajātisamudāgatālapanabhāvaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādimāha.
这里的意思是:如果一个人还被贪等“系缚物”所系缚,那么他在称呼别人等场合,说着“喂,喂”而到处走动,他就只能叫“说喂的人”,不是婆罗门。接下来的偈颂是:“无系缚物、无执取,我说他是婆罗门。”其中,贪等法会压迫、障碍众生,所以叫“系缚物”。据说人们让牛踩谷场时,会说“kiñcehi kapila,kiñcehi kāḷakā”,所以要知道“kiñcana”这个词有压迫的意思。就像义释里说的:“‘无系缚物’就是:贪系缚物、嗔系缚物、痴系缚物、慢系缚物、见系缚物、烦恼系缚物、恶行系缚物——这些系缚物已经被断除、根绝、平息、寂止、不再可能生起、被智火焚烧,这样的人就叫无系缚物。”“Gotama”是按族姓来称呼,世间也叫他“Ādiccagotta”;而“Sakyaputta”则是按出生来称呼,和“Sākiya”是同义词。这在《出家经》中也说过:巴利
Tatrāyamattho – sace rāgādikiñcanehi sakiñcano assa, so āmantanādīsu ‘‘bho bho’’ti vadanto hutvā vicaraṇato bhovādīyeva nāma hoti, na brāhmaṇo. ‘‘Akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ, tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇa’’nti (dha. pa. 396, su. ni. 625) sesagāthāpadaṃ. Tattha rāgādayo satte kiñcanti maddanti palibuddhantīti kiñcanāni. Manussā kira goṇehi khalaṃ maddāpentā ‘‘kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakā’’ti vadanti, tasmā kiñcanasaddo maddanattho veditabbo. Yathāha niddese ‘‘akiñcananti rāgakiñcanaṃ, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi, kilesakiñcanaṃ, duccaritakiñcanaṃ, yassete kiñcanā pahīnā samucchinnā vūpasantā paṭippassaddhā abhabbuppattikā ñāṇagginā daḍḍhā, so vuccati akiñcano’’ti (cūḷani. 28, 32, 60, 63). Gotamoti gottavasena parikittanaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘ādiccagotta’’ntipi loke vadanti, sakyaputtoti pana jātivasena sākiyoti ca tasseva vevacanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ pabbajjāsutte –
按种姓来说,叫太阳族;按出身来说,叫释迦族。
我从那个家族出家,并不是为了贪求各种欲乐。巴利
‘‘Ādiccā nāma gottena, sākiyā nāma jātiyā; Tamhā kulā pabbajitomhi, na kāme abhipatthaya’’nti. (su. ni. 425);
同样地,他说“乔达摩是以种姓来称扬世尊”等等。其中,gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ,意思是“保护ga的,就是种姓”;“乔达摩”是正在使用的名称,意思是它保护智慧,使智慧具有决定性。就像智慧不能没有作为所缘的义而生起,名称也不能没有所称的义而生起;因此,那个被称为种姓的义保护了它们,所以这样说。这里“go”这个词,用于名称和智慧。正如他们所说:巴利
Tathā cāha ‘‘gotamoti bhagavantaṃ gottavasena parikittetī’’tiādi. Tattha gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ, ‘‘gotamo’’ti pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ, buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya rakkhatīti attho. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so gottasaṅkhāto attho tāni rakkhatīti vuccati, go-saddo cettha abhidhāne, buddhiyañca vattati. Tathā hi vadanti –
“go”这个词,用在牛、感官、大地、言语和智慧上;
太阳和光线以及水里,也都有(这个用法)。
在这些含义当中,指牛时是阴性和阳性,其余的都是阳性。巴利
‘‘Go goṇe cendriye bhumyaṃ, vacane ceva buddhiyaṃ; Ādicce rasmiyañceva, pānīyepi ca vattate; Tesu atthesu goṇe thī, pumā ca itare pumā’’ti.
在这里,“牛被挤奶时,以牧牛人为第五”这类说法里,go 这个词指的是公牛。在“行处”这类说法里,指的是感官。在“护牛”这类说法里,指的是土地。正如《经集注》对《婆悉咤经》的注释中所说:“护牛就是守护田地,也就是耕作。”因为大地被称为 go,大地的分类就是“田地”。《波逸提》第15条中说“所谓族姓,有两种族姓:低贱族姓和高贵族姓”,在这类说法里,go 也指言语和智慧。古代诗人写道“礼敬乔达摩,牛族之”,这里 go 指太阳,意思是礼敬太阳的亲属、乔达摩正等正觉者;在“热牛”这类说法里,指光线,因为“热牛”即其光线为热牛者,也就是太阳。在“牛凉檀香”这类说法里,指饮料,即如名为牛的饮料一样清凉,那檀香也是如此。因为在其中,从灶中取出的煮沸的油里投入那檀香时,那油当下就变凉。然而在这些义项中,go 这个词指公牛时,随其所宜,既是阴性也是阳性;在其余义项中,则只是阳性。巴利
Tattha ‘‘gosu duyhamānāsu gato, gopañcamo’’tiādīsu gosaddo goṇe vattati. ‘‘Gocaro’’tiādīsu indriye. ‘‘Gorakkha’’ntiādīsu bhūmiyaṃ. Tathā hi suttanipātaṭṭhakathāya vāseṭṭhasuttasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘gorakkhanti khettarakkhaṃ, kasikammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pathavī hi ‘go’ti vuccati, tappabhedo ca ‘‘khetta’’nti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.619-626). ‘‘Gottaṃ nāma dve gottāni hīnañca gottaṃ, ukkaṭṭhañca gotta’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 15) vacane, buddhiyañca vattati. ‘‘Gogottaṃ gotamaṃ name’’ti porāṇakaviracanāya ādicce, ādiccabandhuṃ gotamaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ namāmīti hi attho, ‘‘uṇhagū’’tiādīsu rasmiyaṃ, uṇhā gāvo rasmiyo etassāti hi uṇhagu, sūriyo. ‘‘Gosītacandana’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. ṭī. 1.49) pānīye , gosaṅkhātaṃ pānīyaṃ viya sītaṃ, tadeva candanaṃ tathā. Tasmiñhi uddhanato uddharitapakkuthitatelasmiṃ pakkhitte taṅkhaṇaññeva taṃ telaṃ sītalaṃ hotīti. Etesu pana atthesu goṇe vattamāno go-saddo yathārahaṃ itthiliṅgo ceva pulliṅgo ca, sesesu pana pulliṅgoyeva.
那么,这个“族姓”又是什么呢?应当知道,它是不同于其他家族传承的、由这个家族的始祖传下来的、属于该家族成员共有的通称。这个通称确实是该家族成员所共有的,因为共有,所以叫通称。比如,生在这个家族里的净饭大王等人,也被称为“乔达摩”。正因为如此,世尊对自己的父亲净饭大王说:“乔达摩,如来已经超越了那些殊胜者。”(《大品》第105段)毗沙门大王也赞叹世尊:“我们礼敬具足明行的佛陀乔达摩。”(《长部》第3.288段)具寿鹏耆舍也对具寿阿难说:“善哉,乔达摩,请以慈悯之心宣说寂灭之道。”(《相应部》第1.212段)而在这里,指的就是世尊。所以说“以族姓来称扬世尊”。因此,“tasmā”一词是在回顾前面所说的三种含义。在这里,“沙门”这个词,是通过称扬世尊已经止息了他们那一类人的种种恶法,来显示世尊受到同修者的高度尊敬;“乔达摩”这个词,则是通过称扬他出生于他们那一类人中殊胜的族姓,来显示世尊受到世间人的高度尊敬。巴利
Kiṃ panetaṃ gottaṃ nāmāti? Aññakulaparamparāya asādhāraṇaṃ tassa kulassa ādipurisasamudāgataṃ taṃkulapariyāpannasādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññarūpanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sādhāraṇameva hi idaṃ taṃkulapariyāpannānaṃ sādhāraṇato ca sāmaññarūpaṃ. Tathā hi taṃkule jātā suddhodanamahārājādayopi ‘‘gotamo’’ tveva vuccanti, teneva bhagavā attano pitaraṃ suddhodanamahārājānaṃ ‘‘atikkantavarā kho gotama tathāgatā’’ti (mahāva. 105) avoca, vessavaṇopi mahārājā bhagavantaṃ ‘‘vijjācaraṇasampannaṃ, buddhaṃ vandāma gotama’’nti, (dī. ni. 3.288) āyasmāpi vaṅgīso āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ‘‘sādhu nibbāpanaṃ brūhi, anukampāya gotamā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.212). Idha pana bhagavantameva. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavantaṃ gottavasena parikittetī’’ti. Tasmāti yathāvuttamatthattayaṃ paccāmasati. Ettha ca ‘‘samaṇo’’ti iminā sarikkhakajanehi bhagavato bahumatabhāvo dassito tabbisayasamitapāpatāparikittanato, ‘‘gotamo’’ti iminā lokiyajanehi tabbisayauḷāragottasambhūtatāparikittanato.
释迦族净饭大王的儿子,所以叫释迦子。这里是通过赞叹他出身于崇高、显赫、广大的刹帝利家族,来显示他种姓的高贵。因为从一切刹帝利的始祖大选出王开始,释迦王族一脉相承、从未间断,是最为殊胜的。正如经中所说:巴利
Sakyassa suddhodanamahārājassa putto sakyaputto, iminā pana uccākulaparidīpanaṃ uditoditavipulakhattiyakulasambhūtatāparikittanato. Sabbakhattiyānañhi ādibhūtamahāsammatamahārājato paṭṭhāya asambhinnaṃ uḷāratamaṃ sakyarājakulaṃ. Yathāha –
大牟尼确实是伟大选出王的族裔。
在劫初的时候,有一位国王名叫大选出。巴利
‘‘Mahāsammatarājassa, vaṃsajo hi mahāmuni; Kappādismiñhi rājāsi, mahāsammatanāmako’’ti. (mahāvaṃse dutiyaparicchede paṭhamagāthā);
怎样说明“因为信心而出家”这个意思呢?所以接着用“以某种……”等话来回答。parijiyana、parihāyana 就是衰败、损失;或者 parijirati 就是“在衰败”,parijiṇṇa 就是“已经衰败”,它的状态就是 pārijuñña,也就是衰败,用这个来说明。意思是说:没有被亲属衰败、财富衰败之类的某种衰败所压倒、所覆盖,而是出了家。为了换一种说法把这一点讲清楚,所以又说“舍弃了那个还没有衰败的家族”。所谓“还没有衰败”,就是还没有因为亲属衰败、财富衰败之类的某种衰败而衰败。因为信心而出家,就是仅仅凭着信心而出家。这样一来,用“以某种……”等话所排除的那种说法就非常合理了。难道“从释迦族出家”这句话,只是在说明从高贵家族出家吗?因为那个意思可以被知道,而“因为信心而出家”这个意思就不能被知道吗?但不能这样看。因为舍弃了庞大的亲族圈和巨大的财富,而凭信心出家,这个意思实际上已经成立了。就像世尊的家族,在他出生的时候,并没有任何衰败,反而是增长,因此它极其兴旺的状态在世间是众所周知、清楚明白的。所以,仅仅说“从释迦族出家”时,舍弃了那样极其兴旺的家族、凭信心出家这个意思就已经成立了。应当知道,这个回答是用“以某种衰败……”等话来说明的。从那以后,就是“在憍萨罗国游行”等话。巴利
Kathaṃ saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpananti āha ‘‘kenacī’’tiādi. Parijiyanaṃ parihāyanaṃ pārijuññaṃ, parijiratīti vā parijiṇṇo, tassa bhāvo pārijuññaṃ, tena. Ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena parihāniyā anabhibhūto anajjhotthaṭo hutvā pabbajitoti attho. Tadeva pariyāyantarena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aparikkhīṇaṃyeva taṃ kulaṃ pahāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aparikkhīṇanti hi ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena aparikkhayaṃ. Saddhāya pabbajitoti saddhāya eva pabbajito. Evañhi ‘‘kenacī’’tiādinā nivattitavacanaṃ sūpapannaṃ hoti. Nanu ca ‘‘sakyakulā pabbajito’’ti idaṃ uccākulā pabbajitabhāvaparidīpanameva siyā tadatthasseva viññāyamānattā, na saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ tadatthassa aviññāyamānattāti? Na kho panevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ mahantaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ, mahantañca bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya saddhāpabbajitabhāvassa atthato siddhattā. Tathā hi lokanāthassa abhijātiyaṃ tassa kulassa na kiñci pārijuññaṃ, atha kho vuḍḍhiyeva, tato tassa samiddhatamabhāvo loke pākaṭo paññāto hoti, tasmā ‘‘sakyakulā pabbajito’’ti ettakeyeva vutte tathā samiddhatamaṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāpabbajitabhāvo siddhoyevāti, imaṃ parihāraṃ ‘‘kenaci pārijuññenā’’tiādinā vibhāvetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tato paranti ‘‘kosalesu cārikaṃ caramāno’’tiādivacanaṃ.
这位以法为乐的国王真好,这位有智慧的人真好。
善哉,不欺诳朋友;不造恶就是乐。在这些语句中——巴利
‘‘Sādhu dhammaruci rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamadubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. ādīsu –
就像“sādhu”这个词在这里表示“美好”的意思,所以注释里说“sundaraṃ kho pana”。“kho”是表示强调的虚词,“pana”是表示转折的虚词。注释书里引用这些词,就是为了说明它们各自的作用。“sundaraṃ”就是“善妙”的意思,而说它善妙,是因为它能为见到的人带来利益和安乐,所以说“带来利益、带来安乐”。这里说的“利益”,按现世、来世、究竟三种来说就是三种利益;“安乐”也同样分为三种安乐。巴利
Viya sādhusaddo idha sundaratthoti āha ‘‘sundaraṃ kho panā’’ti. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto, panāti pakkhantaratthe. Evaṃ sātthakatāviññāpanatthañhi saṃvaṇṇanāyametesaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Sundaranti ca bhaddakaṃ, bhaddakatā ca passantānaṃ hitasukhāvahabhāvenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘atthāvahaṃ sukhāvaha’’nti. Attho cettha diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthavasena tividhaṃ hitaṃ sukhampi tatheva tividhaṃ sukhaṃ.
“Tathārūpānaṃ”这个词,从字面上说,就是“像那样的”意思。不过,为了显示它真正的含义,又说了“evarūpānaṃ”(这样的)。世尊具足那样一些功德,因为那些功德具有如实如此的体性,所以能让以四种标准来衡量事物的世间一切众生,在任何时候都对世尊生起极度的信仰和净信。为了指出“tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ”(像那样的阿拉汉)是就这些功德而说的,就说了“yathārūpo”等话。“Laddhasaddhānaṃ”就是已获得信心的人,意思是获得了他人信心的人;或者“Laddhasaddānaṃ”是指已获得名声的人,也就是已获得称誉名声的人。通过这个,说明了“arahataṃ”这个词的意思是“阿拉汉们”,也显示了“阿拉汉”这个名称的显著状态。此外,用“yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo”(那位乔达摩尊者是如此这般的)这句话,从不确定的方面显示了“tathārūpānaṃ”这个词的含义之后,为了再从确定自性的方面显示它的含义,又说了“yathābhuccaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddhānaṃ”(由于证得如实功德,世间称他为阿拉汉,已获得这种称誉的人)。这同样也是在显示“tathārūpānaṃ”这个词的含义。这个做法正是注释师们在《注疏》(dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255)中所主张的,在《精义显扬》里也是这样说的。没有说“yathārūpā te bhavanto arahanto”(那些尊者是如此这般的阿拉汉),而是说“yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo”(那位乔达摩尊者是如此这般的),这是出于对世尊的尊重,为了表明“tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ”这个复数表达所指的其实就是世尊本人。因为通达语言的人,在指自己和尊敬的对象时,愿意用复数形式。通过“yathābhucca……arahata”这段话,从字面直接显示了:对于以法为标准、以粗朴为标准的有情来说,世尊能给他们带来净信,因为阿拉汉的状态正是他们各自应得的境界。而通过显示这一点,也就显示了:对于其他以形色为标准、以声音为标准的有情来说,世尊同样能带来净信,因为净信与那些标准是不相离的。应当这样理解。巴利
Tathārūpānanti tādisānaṃ, ayaṃ saddato attho. Atthamattaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘evarūpāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yādisehi ca guṇehi bhagavā samannāgato catuppamāṇikassa lokassa sabbakālampi-accantāya-saddhāya-pasādanīyo tesaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvattā, tādisehi guṇehi samannāgatabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tathārūpānaṃ arahata’’nti vuttanti dassento ‘‘yathārūpo’’tiādimāha. Laddhasaddhānanti laddhasaddahānaṃ, parajanassa saddhaṃ paṭilabhantānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Laddhasaddānanti vā paṭiladdhakittisaddānaṃ, etena ‘‘arahata’’nti padassa arahantānanti attho, arahantasamaññāya ca pākaṭabhāvo dassito, apica ‘‘yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti iminā ‘‘tathārūpāna’’nti padassa aniyamavasena atthaṃ dassetvā sarūpaniyamavasenapi dassetuṃ ‘‘yathābhuccaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, idampi hi ‘‘tathārūpāna’’nti padasseva atthadassanaṃ, ayameva ca nayo ācariyehi adhippeto idha ṭīkāyaṃ, (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255) sāratthadīpaniyañca tatheva vuttattā. ‘‘Yathārūpā te bhavanto arahanto’’ti avatvā ‘‘yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti vacanaṃ bhagavatiyeva garugāravavasena ‘‘tathārūpānaṃ arahata’’nti puthuvacananiddiṭṭhabhāvaviññāpanatthaṃ . Attani, garūsu ca hi bahuvacanaṃ icchanti saddavidū. ‘‘Yathābhucca…pe… arahata’’nti iminā ca dhammappamāṇānaṃ, lūkhappamāṇānañca sattānaṃ bhagavato pasādāvahataṃ yathārutato dasseti arahantabhāvassa tesaññeva yathārahaṃ visayattā, taṃdassanena pana itaresampi rūpappamāṇaghosappamāṇānaṃ pasādāvahatā dassitāyeva tadavinābhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“明净柔和”是指清净、清凉,或者因为明净而清凉,这里是用它来表现心的明净状态。虽然说“见”,但因为还有比见更进一步的应做之事,所以这个说法就带上了赞叹、推许的含义,因此说“仅仅见到也是好的”。否则的话,就会变成一种并非本意的理解:“只有见才是好的,不需要再进一步做什么。”在这里,“pi”这个词,或者省略了形式的“api”这个词,表示的就是赞叹、推许的意思。“开示梵行”这句话里的“iti”,是和“传出”相关联的。所以,这里“是好的”中的“iti”,应当和“婆罗门沸伽罗娑罗召唤学生阿摩昼”这句话连起来理解。因为意思已经明白,所以有“经文省略”的情况。凡是意思已经明了,词句就不再说出来,这就叫“省略”。为了说明这个意思,所以说“仅仅见到也是好的,是怀着这样的意趣”。另外,这里还应当讲一讲《中部·小狮子吼经》注释中提到的鹧鸪鸟的故事。巴利
Pasādasommānīti pasannāni, sītalāni ca, pasādavasena vā sītalāni, anena pasannamanataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Dassana’’nti vuttepi taduttari kattabbatāsambhavato ayaṃ sambhāvanattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotī’’ti. Itarathā hi ‘‘dassanaññeva sādhu, na taduttari karaṇa’’nti anadhippetattho āpajjati, sambhāvanattho cettha pi-saddo, api-saddo vā luttaniddiṭṭho. ‘‘Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti ettha iti-saddo ‘‘abbhuggato’’ti iminā sambandhamupagato, tasmā ayaṃ ‘‘sādhu hotī’’ti idha iti-saddo ‘‘brāhmaṇo pokkharasātī ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ āmantesī’’ti iminā sambajjhitabbo, ‘‘ajjhāsayaṃ katvā’’ti ca pāṭhaseso tadatthassa viññāyamānattā. Yassa hi attho viññāyati, saddo na payujjati, so ‘‘pāṭhaseso’’ti vuccati, imamatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā’’ti. Mūlapaṇṇāsake cūḷasīhanādasuttaṭṭhakathāya (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.144) āgataṃ kosiyasakuṇavatthu cettha kathetabbaṃ.
阿摩昼学童谈话的注释巴利
Ambaṭṭhamāṇavakathāvaṇṇanā
256 “Ajjhāyako”这个词,在第一种常规用法里纯粹是责备的话,在第二种常规用法里则成了称赞的话,人们这样使用它,就像为了说明“puriso naro”(男子、人)而引用了《起世因本经》的句子。在那里,“ime”指的是那些被称为“jhāyaka”(禅修者)的人。“Na jhāyanti”是说他们不在树叶搭的茅屋里修禅那、不成就禅那,意思是他们只是退到村落城镇附近,靠编写吠陀典籍过日子。不过,对他们来说,基于那些被称为婆罗门禅修者的第一和第二个名称,第三个名称才生起,所以说“ajjhāyakātveva tatiyaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbattaṃ”(“ajjhāyaka”这第三个音节就是由此产生的)。这里的“akkhara”指的是名称、惯用语。因为这个词只在这个意义上通用,不在别处使用,所以叫“akkhara”。“Mante parivattetī”就是讽诵吠陀,意思是学习掌握。这里是由“adhi”和“i”这个字根构成的连音,在其他地方则是由“jhe”这个字根构成。“Mante dhāretī”就是让已经学过的咒语不遗忘。巴利
256. ‘‘Ajjhāyako’’ti idaṃ paṭhamapakatiyā garahāvacanameva, dutiyapakatiyā pasaṃsāvacanaṃ katvā voharanti yathā taṃ ‘‘puriso naro’’ti dassetuṃ aggaññasuttapada (dī. ni. 3.132) mudāhaṭaṃ. Tattha imeti jhāyakanāmena samaññitā janā. Na jhāyantīti paṇṇakuṭīsu jhānaṃ na appenti na nipphādenti, gāmanigamasāmantaṃ osaritvā vedaganthe karontāva acchantīti attho. Taṃ panetesaṃ brāhmaṇajhāyakasaṅkhātaṃ paṭhamadutiyanāmaṃ upādāya tatiyameva jātanti āha ‘‘ajjhāyakātveva tatiyaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbatta’’nti, akkharanti ca nirutti samaññā. Sā hi tasmiṃyeva niruḷhabhāvena aññattha asañcaraṇato ‘‘akkhara’’nti vuccati. Mante parivattetīti vede sajjhāyati, pariyāpuṇātīti attho. Idha hi adhiāpubbai-saddavasena padasandhi, itarattha pana jhe-saddavasena. Mante dhāretīti yathāadhīte mante asammūḷhe katvā hadaye ṭhapeti.
阿闼婆吠陀因为会伤害别人,所以善人不使用它,因此只说“梨俱吠陀、耶柔吠陀、沙摩吠陀”。其中,“梨俱”(iru):天人用它来称颂、赞叹,所以叫iru——按照ica这个动词根,把c变成r,这个词是阴性。“耶柔”(yaju):天人用它来祭祀、供养,所以叫yaju——按中性和阳性两种性别来使用。“沙摩”(sāma):用它来止息恶法,或者让恶法变少,所以叫sāma——按照so这个动词根,把o变成ā。“吠陀”(veda):他们用这些来了知法或业,所以叫veda。这些就是咒语,因为“他们用这些通达善趣,也用这些被听闻”,所以这样称呼。Paharaṇaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ pahataṃ, oṭṭhānaṃ pahataṃ tathā, tassa karaṇavasena, oṭṭhāni cāletvā paguṇabhāvakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gato, na atthavibhāvanavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. 这就是所说的“pārag”。而“pāragū”(到彼岸者)是因为一直需要关联,所以构成kitanta复合词。巴利
Āthabbaṇavedo parūpaghātakarattā sādhūnamaparibhogoti katvā ‘‘iruvedayajuvedasāmavedāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha iccante thomīyante devā etāyāti iru ica-dhātuvasena ca-kārassa ra-kāraṃ katvā, itthiliṅgoyaṃ . Yajjante pujjante devā anenāti yaju punnapuṃsakaliṅgavasena. Soyanti antaṃ karonti, sāyanti vā tanuṃ karonti pāpamanenāti sāmaṃ so-dhātupakkhe o-kārassa ā-kāraṃ katvā. Vidanti dhammaṃ, kammaṃ vā etehīti vedā, te eva mantā ‘‘sugatiyopi munanti, suyyanti ca etehī’’ti katvā. Paharaṇaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ pahataṃ, oṭṭhānaṃ pahataṃ tathā, tassa karaṇavasena, oṭṭhāni cāletvā paguṇabhāvakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gato, na atthavibhāvanavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāragūti ca niccasāpekkhatāya kitantasamāso.
“与尼犍度一起”等语句,是依照文句和词尾变化来展示构词解释。“尼犍度树等”中,尼犍度是一种特别的树,意思是以它为首的各类事物。通过这个说明,以尼犍度树这一类为开头,借此把其余各类也在这里展示出来,所以那部论书就叫尼犍度,正如“波罗夷犍度”“善三法”等名称所显示的那样,这个意思是从字面上就能领会的。不过诸位老师这样说:“以可说和能说的关系来揭示意义和词,刺入、破开、分别地显示出来,所以叫nikhaṇḍu,它把kha音变成gha音,就称为‘nighaṇḍu’”(《长部注疏·疏》1.256),这应当理解为不同于义注方法的另一种说法。否则它就会与义注相违,这一点应当考察。然而文字研究者们这样主张:“各处出现的名称,究竟地组合起来,聚成一堆,在这里,所以叫nighaṇṭu,因为加了niggaḥīta音。”显示同义词的,是说明同义语词,意思是显示每一个意义有多种同义说法的分别。这只是举例而已,因为那部论书也以显示许多意义可由一个词说出的方式而展开。那么它是什么呢?如今是《名义明灯》《宝鬘》《语词灯》等。以语说等为特征的行动由此而被安排,所以叫kiriyākappo;同样,种种由此而被安排,所以叫vikappo;行动安排和那分别,就是kiriyākappavikappo。因为它从音、词、关联、词义等的分别来说有多种分别,所以说为“kiriyākappavikappo”,而它正是某种论书,所以说“带给诗人利益之论”,意思是带给四种诗人利益之论,因为以诗人资质成就、努力成就等用途而言,它带来利益。那么它是什么呢?是制定诗作方式的《诗庄严》《歌善巧庄严》等。这是就根本的行动安排论书而说的。它广大,有一十万偈之多,也有人称之为《正行论》。从词义来说,kiṭayati,即引导、传达、使人知道行动等的分别,所以是keṭubhaṃ,从kiṭa词根依abha后缀而来,a音变成u音。或者,因为完全摄尽行动等的分别,kiṭento,即引导、遍满、充满,所以是keṭubhaṃ,依kiṭa词与upapada和ubha词根而来。再者,kiṭanti,即诗人们以其中的善巧在作品中行进,所以是keṭubhaṃ,这里词的形成仍依前说。从处所、作具等的分别,从构词解释的分别,音由此而被区分,所以是akkharappabhedo,它包含在六支论中,只是两部论书,所以说“学和无说”。其中,学,即由此学习音,所以是sikkhā,是说明从a等音素的处所、作具、努力之论。以决定、究竟而说,utti即nirutti,是以音增、音变等为特征的。并且说——巴利
‘‘Saha nighaṇṭunā’’tiādinā yathāvākyaṃ vibhatyantavasena nibbacanadassanaṃ. Nighaṇṭurukkhādīnanti nighaṇṭu nāma rukkhaviseso, tadādikānamatthānanti attho, etena nighaṇṭurukkhapariyāyaṃ ādiṃ katvā tappamukhena sesapariyāyānaṃ tattha dassitattā so gantho nighaṇṭu nāma yathā taṃ ‘‘pārājikakaṇḍo, kusalattiko’’ti ayamattho dassito iminā yathārutameva tadatthassa adhigatattā. Ācariyā pana evaṃ vadanti ‘‘vacanīyavācakabhāvena atthaṃ, saddañca nikhaḍati bhindati vibhajja dassetīti nikhaṇḍu, so eva kha-kārassa gha-kāraṃ katvā ‘nighaṇḍū’ti vutto’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.256), tadetaṃ aṭṭhakathānayato aññanayadassananti gahetabbaṃ. Itarathā hi so aṭṭhakathāya virodho siyā, vicāretabbametaṃ. Akkharacintakā pana evamicchanti ‘‘tattha tatthāgatāni nāmāni nissesato ghaṭenti rāsiṃ karonti etthāti nighaṇṭu niggahitāgamenā’’ti. Vevacanappakāsakanti pariyāyasaddadīpakaṃ, ekekassa atthassa anekapariyāyavacanavibhāvakanti attho. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ anekesampi atthānaṃ ekasaddavacanīyatāvibhāvanavasenapi tassa ganthassa pavattattā. Ko panesoti? Etarahi nāmaliṅgānusāsanaratanamālābhidhānappadīpikādi. Vacībhedādilakkhaṇā kiriyā kappīyati etenāti kiriyākappo, tatheva vividhaṃ kappīyati etenāti vikappo, kiriyākappo ca so vikappo cāti kiriyākappavikappo. So hi vaṇṇapadasambandhapadatthādivibhāgato bahuvikappoti katvā ‘‘kiriyākappavikappo’’ti vuccati, so ca ganthavisesoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kavīnaṃ upakārāvahaṃ sattha’’nti, catunnampi kavīnaṃ kavibhāvasampadābhogasampadādipayojanavasena upakārāvaho ganthoti attho . Ko panesoti? Kabyabandhanavidhividhāyako kabyālaṅkāragītāsubodhālaṅkārādi. Idaṃ pana mūlakiriyākappaganthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. So hi mahāvisayo satasahassagāthāparimāṇo, yaṃ ‘‘nayacariyādipakaraṇa’’ntipi vadanti. Vacanatthato pana kiṭayati gameti ñāpeti kiriyādivibhāganti keṭubhaṃ kiṭa-dhātuto abhapaccayavasena, a-kārassa ca ukāro. Atha vā kiriyādivibhāgaṃ anavasesapariyādānato kiṭento gamanto obheti pūretīti keṭubhaṃ kiṭa-saddūpapadaubhadhātuvasena. Apica kiṭanti gacchanti kavayo bandhesu kosallametenāti keṭubhaṃ, purimanayenevettha padasiddhi. Ṭhānakaraṇādivibhāgato, nibbacanavibhāgato ca akkharā pabhedīyanti etenāti akkharappabhedo, taṃ pana chasu vedaṅgesu pariyāpannaṃ pakaraṇadvayamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhā ca nirutti cā’’ti. Tattha sikkhanti akkharasamayametāyāti sikkhā, akārādivaṇṇānaṃ ṭhānakaraṇapayatanapaṭipādakasatthaṃ. Nicchayena, nissesato vā utti nirutti, vaṇṇāgamavaṇṇavipariyāyādilakkhaṇaṃ. Vuttañca –
音的增加和音的变转
另外两种是音变和音灭。
通过殊胜之义与界相结合,
这被称为五种辞。巴利
‘‘Vaṇṇāgamo vaṇṇavipariyāyo, Dve cāpare vaṇṇavikāranāsā; Dhātussa atthātisayena yogo, Taduccate pañcavidhā niruttī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; visuddhi. 1.144; mahāni. aṭṭha. 1.50);
在这里,如果以那个作为方法,从多方面阐明词源解释的论典,因为省略了后面的词而被称为“辞”。这是因为诸位阿阇梨已经说过,词源分别也属于字母分别,而且词源分别也被语法这一支所包含。语法和辞,确实各自算一个吠陀支,正如他们所说:巴利
Idha pana tabbasena anekadhā nibbacanaparidīpakaṃ satthaṃ uttarapadalopena ‘‘niruttī’’ti adhippetaṃ nibbacanavibhāgatopi akkharapabhedabhāvassa ācariyehi (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.256) vuttattā, tamantarena nibbacanavibhāgassa ca byākaraṇaṅgena saṅgahitattā. Byākaraṇaṃ, nirutti ca hi paccekameva vedaṅgaṃ yathāhu –
劫波、语法、星象论,修学与辞
他们说,这些就是音律论等六吠陀支。巴利
‘‘Kappo byākaraṇaṃ joti-satthaṃ sikkhā nirutti ca; Chandoviciti cetāni, vedaṅgāni vadanti chā’’ti.
因此,按照词源分析的方式,这里所要表达的“构词分析”纯粹是不混杂的,不像在六个辅音词位那里那样,是两者共通的构词分析,因为它属于吠陀支的范围。这里应当知道,这就是《大义释注》(大义释注50)中传来的词源分析方式的判定。因为在其中,“如星宿王之于群星”(本生1.1.11, 25)这里,像ra音的增加那样,本来不存在的字母的增加,叫做“音增”。因为有害之义本应说“hiṃso”,却说成“sīho”,像这样已有字母的上下颠倒,叫做“音倒”。如“给九张皮”(本生1.6.88)这里,像a音变成e音那样,一个字母变成另一个字母,叫做“音变”。本应说“jīvanassa mūto jīvanamūto”,却说成“jīmūto”,像va音和na音的消失那样,已有字母的消失,叫做“音灭”。如“以粗恶之语而行,汝触恼我,童子”(本生1.10.85)这里,像“pakubbamāno”一词表达“abhibhavamāno”(胜伏)之义那样,在各处随顺场合显示特殊含义,就是通过词根含义的殊胜来结合。巴利
Tasmā byākaraṇaṅgena asaṅkarabhūtameva niruttinayena nibbacanamidhādhippetaṃ, na chasu byañjanapadesu viya tadubhayasādhāraṇanibbacanaṃ vedaṅgavisayattāti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha mahāniddesaṭṭhakathāya (mahāni. aṭṭha. 50) āgataniruttinayavinicchayo . Tattha hi ‘‘nakkhattarājāriva tārakāna’’nti (jā. 1.1.11, 25) ettha ra-kārāgamo viya avijjamānassa akkharassa āgamo vaṇṇāgamo nāma. Hiṃsanattā ‘‘hiṃso’’ti vattabbe ‘‘sīho’’ti parivattanaṃ viya vijjamānānamakkharānaṃ heṭṭhupariyavasena parivattanaṃ vaṇṇavipariyāyo nāma. ‘‘Navachannakedāni diyyatī’’ti (jā. 1.6.88) ettha a-kārassa e-kārāpajjanaṃ viya aññakkharassa aññakkharāpajjanaṃ vaṇṇavikāro nāma. ‘‘Jīvanassa mūto jīvanamūto’’ti vattabbe ‘‘jīmūto’’ti va-kāra na-kārānaṃ vināso viya vijjamānakkharānaṃ vināso vaṇṇavināso nāma. ‘‘Pharusāhi vācāhi pakubbamāno, āsajja maṃ tvaṃ vadase kumārā’’ti (jā. 1.10.85) ettha ‘‘pakubbamāno’’ti padassa abhibhavamānoti atthapaṭipādanaṃ viya tattha tattha yathāyogaṃ visesatthapaṭipādanaṃ dhātūnamatthātisayena yogo nāmāti.
对于前面所说的三种吠陀,这第四种可能只是那样,那么和什么合在一起成为第五种呢?所以说“以阿闼婆吠陀为第四”。所谓阿闼婆吠陀,就是由阿闼婆吠陀师们所编的、用来伤害别人的咒语。不过,它只是为了表明“以古传为第五”这一点,才仅仅以计数的方式被算进去,并不是按它本身的形态被算进去。这样说明之后,“etesaṃ”这个词的意思就应当只理解为那三种吠陀,因为它是对“三种吠陀”的修饰语。“Itiha asā”的意思(“在世间曾如此存在过”,有些地方读作“āsā”,其意义相同)。在这里,“iti”是“如此”的意思,或者指此业,或者指此事,或者指“āsa”即欲求。这里为了显示该典籍具有广大对象,有vicchāvacana(分别说);以“itihāsā”这一说法,显示与“itihāso”相关联的“itihāso”是依派生方式而成的,这是其意义。也有人说,“Itiha āsa, itiha āsā”这样与说法相关联的“itihāso”,是依词源方式显示其意义的。然而,文字研究者们则这样认为:“itiha一词在传承教说中只是一个不变词;不存在的存在者称为asa;‘itiha aso etasmin’即‘itihāso’,是依复合词方式而成的。”依他们的意见,在“itiha asā”中,意思是“如此传承教说中,asa是存在的”。以“Purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto”(名为古传)这一说法,说明它是该典籍的特殊种类。名为婆罗多的两兄弟王的战争故事、罗摩王掳走悉多的故事、人狮王生起的故事等,如此等名为古传的婆罗多古传、罗摩古传、人狮古传等典籍,就叫做“itihāso”,这是所说的意思。以“Tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedānaṃ”这一说法,显示如前所说的“tiṇṇaṃ vedāna”中的修饰关系。巴利
Yathāvuttappabhedānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ ayaṃ catutthoyeva siyā, atha kena saddhiṃ pañcamoti āha ‘‘āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā’’ti. Āthabbaṇavedo nāma āthabbaṇavedikehi vihito parūpaghātakaro manto, so pana itihāsapañcamabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ gaṇitatāmattena gahito, na sarūpavasena, evañca katvā ‘‘etesa’’nti padassa tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vedānantveva attho gahetabbo. Tañhi ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vedāna’’nti etassa visesananti. Itiha asāti evaṃ idha loke ahosi ‘‘āsā’’tipi katthaci pāṭho, soyevattho. Iha ṭhāne iti evaṃ, idaṃ vā kammaṃ, vatthuṃ vā āsa icchāhītipi attho. Tassa ganthassa mahāvisayatādīpanatthañcettha vicchāvacanaṃ, iminā ‘‘itihāsā’’ti vacanena paṭisaṃyutto itihāso taddhitavasenāti atthaṃ dasseti. Itiha āsa, itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto itihāso niruttinayenāti atthadassanantipi vadanti. Akkharacintakā pana evamicchanti ‘‘itiha-saddo pārampariyopadese ekova nipāto, asati vijjatīti aso, itiha aso etasminti itihāso samāsavasenā’’ti, tesaṃ mate ‘‘itiha asā’’ti ettha evaṃ pārampariyopadeso asa vijjamāno ahosīti attho. ‘‘Purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto’’ti iminā tassa ganthavisesabhāvamāha, bhāratanāmakānaṃ dvebhātikarājūnaṃ yuddhakathā, rāmarañño sītāharaṇakathā, narasīharājuppattikathāti evamādipurāṇakathāsaṅkhāto bhāratapurāṇarāmapurāṇanarasīhapurāṇādigantho itihāso nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedāna’’nti iminā yathāvākyaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vedāna’’nti ettha visesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.
意义通过它而被知道,所以叫“句”(pada),也就是名词、动词、前缀、不变词等种种分类的、带有语尾变化的词。这一点在语法学里也已经说过了,所以说“其剩余部分”,意思就是句之外剩下的部分,也就是作为词根、词缀等词的特征的东西。对一一的词和它的意义进行分析、详细解说,由此叫“语法”(byākaraṇa);或者,词根、词缀等在其中被特别地造出、产生,或者通过它而被造出,所以叫语法,也就是阐明正确词语的《波你尼语法》《月光语法》等,以及《吟诵语法》《婆罗门语法》等,如今仍然存在的论典。它被学习,所以叫“学习”(ajjhāyati)。它使人了知,或者使人诵读,所以叫“教”(vedeti)。ca这个词是为了集合两种意义,或者是为了抉择,因为抉择了别的意义。因为派生词的使用是多样的。“句通晓者”(padako)是就语法中通晓句的熟练而言说的,“语法通晓者”(veyyākaraṇo)是为了使人知道这个意思,即对剩余的词根、词缀等词的造作法的熟练,所以两词合在一起表达一个意义。这就是阿阇梨们的惯例,即以某种方式使人知道别的意义。这是义注之外的另一种说法:他们就在吠陀中按句而诵说,所以叫“句通晓者”(padako)。其中,“句”(padaso)是指偈颂体、散文体、句颂体的句。“诵说”(kāyati)是指如同“本生”那样说,以此显示作吠陀者的能力。这样,通过“学习者”等语,此者的区别就变得明显了。巴利
Pajjati attho etenāti padaṃ, nāmākhyātopasagganipātādivasena anekavibhāgaṃ vibhattiyantapadaṃ. Tadapi byākaraṇe āgatamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tadavasesa’’nti, padato avasesaṃ pakatipaccayādisaddalakkhaṇabhūtanti attho. Taṃ taṃ saddaṃ, tadatthañca byākaroti byācikkhati etenāti byākaraṇaṃ, visesena vā ākarīyante pakatipaccayādayo abhinipphādīyante ettha, anenāti vā byākaraṇaṃ, sādhusaddānamanvākhyāyakaṃ muddhabodhabyākaraṇa sārassatabyākaraṇa pāṇinībyākaraṇacandrabyākaraṇādi adhunāpi vijjamānasatthaṃ. Adhīyatīti ajjhāyati. Vedetīti paresaṃ vāceti. Ca-saddo atthadvayasamuccinanattho, vikappanattho vā atthantarassa vikappitattā. Vicitrā hi taddhitavutti. Padakoti byākaraṇesu āgatapadakosallaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, veyyākaraṇoti tadavasiṭṭhapakatipaccayādisaddavidhikosallanti imassatthassa viññāpanatthaṃ padadvayassa ekato atthavacanaṃ. Esā hi ācariyānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ yena kenaci pakārena atthantaraviññāpanaṃ. Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – te eva vede padaso kāyatīti padakoti. Tattha padasoti gajjabandhapajjabandhapadena. Kāyatīti katheti yathā ‘‘jātaka’’nti, iminā vedakārakasamatthataṃ dasseti. Evañhi ‘‘ajjhāyako’’tiādīhi imassa viseso pākaṭo hotīti.
未来利益——也就是被称为愚者世间的世人——不靠它去努力、不靠它去精进,所以叫“顺世论”。因为众生依靠那部论书,连行善的心都生不起来;再者,世间就是愚者,他们因为沉迷论辩的滋味而在其中努力精进,所以叫“顺世论”。彼此互相违背、或者与天界和解脱相违背的言论在这里展开,所以叫vitaṇḍa,这是依ḍa词缀、并把na变成ṇa来构成的;或者,论师们在这里用互相违背的论辩之杖互相打击,所以叫vitaṇḍa,这是依taḍi词根、并插入随韵来构成的。即使不是它本来的地方,但依靠它而展开了论师们的论辩,也借由处所的比喻,用那个地方来称呼它,就像说“眼在世间是可爱、可悦的,渴爱在这里被断除时就被断除,在这里熄灭时就熄灭”。又或者,它能特别地动摇、搅动智者的心,所以叫vitaṇḍa;他们讲说这个论,或者他们的论辩就是这东西,所以叫vitaṇḍavādā,他们的论书也是这样。通过省略后分、或者依派生词缀,把“相之照明论书”称为“相”,所以用“相之照明”等语来显示。佛性等因为它而被了知,所以叫“相”,就像榕树之影等。因此说“以那些为根据”等语。所谓“一万二千论书之量”,这里如同“诵分之量”等一样,是指三十二字母之论。所说的是——巴利
Āyatiṃ hitaṃ bālajanasaṅkhāto loko na yatati na īhati anenāti lokāyataṃ. Tañhi ganthaṃ nissāya sattā puññakiriyāya cittampi na uppādenti, lokā vā bālajanā āyatanti ussahanti vādassādena etthāti lokāyataṃ. Aññamaññaviruddhaṃ, saggamokkhaviruddhaṃ vā tanonti etthāti vitaṇḍo ḍa-paccayavasena, na-kārassa ca ṇa-kāraṃ katvā, viruddhena vādadaṇḍena tāḷenti vādino etthāti vitaṇḍo taḍi-dhātuvasena, niggahītāgamañca katvā. Adesampi yaṃ nissāya vādīnaṃ vādo pavatto, taṃ tesaṃ desatopi upacāravasena vuccati yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti, (dī. ni. 2.401; ma. ni. 1.133; vibha. 204) visesena vā paṇḍitānaṃ manaṃ taḍenti cālenti etenāti vitaṇḍo, taṃ vadanti, so vādo vā etesanti vitaṇḍavādā, tesaṃ satthaṃ tathā. Lakkhaṇadīpakasatthaṃ uttarapadalopena, taddhitavasena vā lakkhaṇanti dasseti ‘‘lakkhaṇadīpaka’’ntiādinā. Lakkhīyati buddhabhāvādi anenāti lakkhaṇaṃ, nigrodhabimbatādi. Tenāha ‘‘yesaṃ vasenā’’tiādi. Dvādasasahassaganthapamāṇanti ettha bhāṇavārappamāṇādīsu viya bāttiṃsakkharaganthova adhippeto. Vuttañhi –
八个字母组成一句,一首偈颂由四句组成;
一首偈颂就是一个作品,这个作品由三十二个字母组成。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhakkharā ekapadaṃ, ekā gāthā catuppadaṃ; Gāthā cekā mato gantho, gantho bāttiṃsatakkharo’’ti.
意思是:以十二乘以一千,也就是一万二千,再加上三十二个字母所组成的论典之量。yattha 的意思是“在那部相论中”,这是处格用法,就像说“树上有枝条”一样。一万六千,就是十六个一千,意思是超过一千零十六首偈颂的量。这样一来,处所和依处之物的表达就非常妥当了。因为是以重点方式阐明诸佛之相,所以称为“佛之论典”。因为独觉佛等的相也在其中得到了阐明,所以才有“依靠哪些”等话。巴利
Dvādasahi guṇitasahassabāttiṃsakkharaganthappamāṇanti attho. Yatthāti yasmiṃ lakkhaṇasatthe, ādhāre cetaṃ bhummaṃ yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Soḷasa ca sahassañca soḷasasahassaṃ, soḷasādhikasahassagāthāparimāṇāti attho. Evañhi ādhārādheyyavacanaṃ sūpapannaṃ hotīti. Padhānavasena buddhānaṃ lakkhaṇadīpanato buddhamantā nāma. Paccekabuddhādīnampi hi lakkhaṇaṃ tattha dīpitameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yesaṃ vasenā’’tiādi.
“造作无缺圆满者”这一说法,只是就意义而作的指示;为了从文句上说明所获得的意义,才说“并非缺失者”。那么,这个“缺失者”又是什么?为了排除这个疑问,便以“所谓缺失者……”等语来解说。这里的意趣是:能够持守那些经典的人,就称为“具力者”;而不能持守的人,则名为“缺失者”。而“并非缺失者”,依照“双重否定回归本义”的道理,就是“具力者”。所谓“具力者”,就是能贯通的意思:在初、中、后各个阶段,无论在哪里都不疲厌、不停滞,能在那些经典的相续中运用、流通,这就是其含义。不过,这是律藏注释的传统解释(《波罗夷》第84页)——“无缺失者”即“随顺无缺失者”,因连音而省略了u音;“随顺无缺失者”即无不足、具备圆满技能,这就是其含义。所谓“缺失”,就像“增长与减损”等语中的减损一样;在这些如前所述的经典中,若没有减损、没有不足,就是“无缺失者”;随顺无缺失者,就是“无缺失者”。巴利
‘‘Anūnoparipūrakārī’’ti atthamattadassanaṃ, saddato pana adhigatamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘avayo na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ko panesa avayoti anuyogamapaneti ‘‘avayo nāmā’’tiādinā. Ayamettādhippāyo – yo tāni sandhāretuṃ sakkoti, so ‘‘vayo’’ti vuccati. Yo pana na sakkoti, so avayo nāma. Yo ca avayo na hoti, so ‘‘dve paṭisedhā pakatiyatthagamakā’’ti ñāyena vayo evāti. Vayatīti hi vayo, ādimajjhapariyosānesu katthacipi aparikilamanto avitthāyanto te ganthe santāne paṇeti byavaharatīti attho. Ayaṃ pana vinayaṭṭhakathānayo (pārā. 84) – anavayoti anu avayo, sandhivasena u-kāralopo, anu anu avayo anūno, paripuṇṇasippoti attho. Vayoti hi hāni ‘‘āyavayo’’tiādīsu viya, natthi etassa yathāvuttaganthesu vayo ūnatāti avayo, anu anu avayo anavayoti.
“被许可”这个词,是按受动者来立义的;“被承认”这个词,则是按主动者来立义的。为了说明这一点,注释者说了“由老师……”等话。“其”指的是阿跋达的。经文里“我所知道的,你也知道”这一句,是在显示许可的方式;而“你所知道的,我也知道”这一句,则是在显示承认的方式。为了说明这一点,就用“凡我……”等话来解释。因为“是的,老师”这句话,按它的含义来说,本身就是随顺而来的承认之语。“那”指的是三明圣典。“其”指的是老师。给出回答本身就是承认,因此他就是自己承认了,这就是这里的意思。“自己的”等话,是在显示许可与承认的范围。所谓“就像给没有教处的人施设一个教处”,这只是假名施设而已,所以说“哪一个……”等话。自己的,就是属于自己所有的东西。老师的传承,就是从老师代代相传而来的,或者是由历代相传的老师所传授的。三种明,它们的总集就叫三明典,也就是三吠陀。首要的话语,或者说最殊胜的话语,就是阿达咖等最胜的言说,称为圣典。巴利
‘‘Anuññāto’’ti padassa kammasādhanavasena, ‘‘paṭiññāto’’ti padassa ca kattusādhanavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘ācariyenā’’tiādimāha. Assāti ambaṭṭhassa. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yamahaṃ jānāmi, taṃ tvaṃ jānāsī’’ti idaṃ anujānanākāradassanaṃ, ‘‘yaṃ tvaṃ jānāsi, tamahaṃ jānāmī’’ti idaṃ pana paṭijānanākāradassananti dasseti ‘‘yaṃ aha’’ntiādinā. ‘‘Āma ācariyā’’ti hi yathāgataṃ paṭijānanavacanameva atthavasena vuttaṃ. Yanti tevijjakaṃ pāvacanaṃ. Tassāti ācariyassa. Paṭivacanadānameva paṭiññā tathā, tāya sayameva paṭiññātoti attho. ‘‘Sake’’tiādi anujānanapaṭijānanādhikāradassanaṃ. Adesassapi desamiva kappanāmattenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘katarasmi’’ntiādi. Sassa attano santakaṃ sakaṃ. Ācariyānaṃ paramparato, paramparabhūtehi vā ācariyehi āgataṃ ācariyakaṃ. Tisso vijjā, tāsaṃ samūho tevijjakaṃ, vedattayaṃ. Padhānaṃ vacanaṃ, pakaṭṭhānaṃ vā aṭṭhakādīnaṃ vacanaṃ pāvacanaṃ.
257 257. 现在,为了阐明婆罗门沸伽罗娑提招呼阿跋达童子时说“这是父亲……”等话的用意,注释者便说了“据说此……”等语。其中,“出身高贵者”指往昔就已出名、有声望的古人。“众多人”是针对富兰那迦叶等人说的。“某一类”指具有刹帝利等种姓的人,或者被世间公认的人。“重”是沉重的意思:光是让自己从中脱身离开就已经很难做到,更不用说在此基础上再做更多了——这就是这里要表达的意思。“无义”则是指像这样离开等行为所带来的讥嫌、辱骂和呵责等。巴利
257. Idāni yenādhippāyena brāhmaṇo pokkharasātī ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ āmantetvā ‘‘ayaṃ tātā’’tiādivacanamabrvi, tadadhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘esa kirā’’tiādimāha. Tattha uggatassāti pubbe pākaṭassa kittimato porāṇajanassa. Bahū janāti pūraṇakassapādayo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ekaccanti khattiyādijātimantaṃ, lokasammataṃ vā janaṃ. Garūti bhāriyaṃ, attānaṃ tato mocetvā apagamanamattampi dukkaraṃ hoti, pageva taduttari karaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Anattho nāma tathāpagamanādinā nindābyārosaupārambhādi.
在“已升起”这个词里,因为和前缀abhi结合,所以“乔达摩”这个词只是用来表达实际状态,用的是受格。在“那位具寿,正是这样存在的”这些语句里,因为它不是用作受格,所以也是就那个意思来说的——注释者用“那位具寿的”等话来说明这一点。因此才说“在这里也……”等等。“正是这样存在的”:意思是,以阿拉汉等那样的方式,名声已经升起;以那样的方式,对于这样真实存在的、那位具寿乔达摩,名声如果已经升起,这就是它的意思。再者,“那位具寿乔达摩正是这样存在的”——同一个意思用两次关联的方式来说,是为了通过一般与特殊的设定,让人了解特定的含义。因此,“那位具寿乔达摩”应按一般关联的方式分开来理解,“正是这样存在的”则应按特殊关联的方式连接起来。这里yadi这个词是疑问的意思,因为两种含义都还需要确认;vā这个词是选择的意思,因为要在两者中选一个。不过精通语法的人这样说:像“这话是真的还是假的”这类说法里,yadi和vā两个词都是选择的意思。其实yadi在“无论去哪种集会,不管是刹帝利集会,还是婆罗门集会”这类句子里(《增支部》5.34),也能看到vā这个词的意思。又像“寿命短少,如今还存在”这类句子一样,这里是同义词的用法。在圣典中,“yadi vā no tathā”这一句,也应当和“名声确实已经升起”连起来,按前面说的方式连接。有人问:“乔达摩”这个词本身就应该是受格吧,这里不是吗?为了回答这个质疑,才说了“在这里也……”等等。因为它不是用作受格,或者应当分开来、按特殊关联的方式连接,所以说在这里也是以表达实际状态的方式用作受格。所谓“这样”,意思就是表达实际状态;或者“这样”本身就是表达实际状态的意思,那个意思就是如此。因为从声音结合的那一刻起,意义的结合也就从那一刻开始了。巴利
‘‘Abbhuggato’’ti ettha abhisaddayogena itthambhūtākhyānatthavaseneva ‘‘gotama’’nti upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ bhavantaṃ, tathā santaṃyevā’’ti padesupi tassa anupayogattā tadatthavasenevāti dasseti ‘‘tassa bhoto’’tiādinā. Tenāha ‘‘idhāpī’’tiādi. Tathā satoyevāti yenākārena arahatādinā saddo abbhuggato, tenākārena santassa bhūtassa eva tassa bhavato gotamassa saddo yadi vā abbhuggatoti attho. Apica taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ tathā santaṃyevāti ekassapi atthassa dvikkhattuṃ sambandhabhāvena vacanaṃ sāmaññavisiṭṭhatāparikappanena atthavisesaviññāpanatthaṃ, tasmā ‘‘tassa bhoto gotamassā’’ti sāmaññasambandhabhāvena vicchinditvā ‘‘tathā satoyevā’’ti visesasambandhabhāvena yojetabbaṃ. Yadi-saddo cettha saṃsayattho dvinnampi atthānaṃ saṃsayitabbattā. Vā-saddo ca vikappanattho tesu ekassa vikappetabbattā. Saddavidū pana evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘imassa vacanaṃ saccaṃ vā yadi vā musā’’tiādīsu viya yadi-saddo vā-saddo ca ubhopi vikappatthāyeva. Yadi-saddopi hi ‘‘yaṃ yadeva parisaṃ upasaṅkamati yadi khattiyaparisaṃ yadi brāhmaṇaparisa’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.34) vā-saddattho dissati. ‘‘Appaṃ vassasataṃ āyu, idānetarahi vijjatī’’tiādīsu viya ca idha samānatthasaddapayogoti. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yadi vā no tathā’’ti idampi ‘‘santaṃyeva saddo abbhuggato’’ti iminā sambajjhitvā yathāvuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Nanu ‘‘gotama’’nti padeyeva upayogavacanaṃ siyā, na etthāti codanāya ‘‘idhāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tassa anupayogattā, vicchinditvā sambandhavisesabhāvena yojetabbattā vā idhāpi itthambhūtākhyānatthavaseneva upayogavacanaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Itthambhūtākhyānaṃ attho yassa tathā, abhisaddo, itthambhūtākhyānameva vā attho tathā, soyevattho. Yadaggena hi saddayogo hoti, tadaggena atthayogopīti.
258 “尊者”是称呼自己的老师。为了让“如”这个词有意义,并且能和后面的文句连起来,所以说了“如所能……”等话。“他”指世尊。在前一种解释方式里,因为和表示“相状”意义的“如”这个词相应,所以只是单纯地问“如何”;但在这里,因为和它不相应,所以说是“问相状”。在外道传统中,对老师要行依止师的礼敬,所以说“于是,依止师……”,意思就是被称为依止师的老师婆罗门。巴利
258.Bhoti attano ācariyaṃ ālapati. Yathā-saddaṃ sātthakaṃ katvā saha pāṭhasesena yojetuṃ ‘‘yathā sakkā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Soti bhagavā. Purimanaye ākāratthajotanayathā-saddayogyato kathanti pucchāmattaṃ, idha pana tadayogyato ‘‘ākārapucchā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bāhirakasamaye ācariyamhi upajjhāyasamudācāroti āha ‘‘atha naṃ upajjhāyo’’ti, upajjhāyasaññito ācariyabrāhmaṇoti attho.
诚然,咒语、梵书和仪轨构成三种吠陀。不过,阿他婆等仙人所说的根本部分——也就是核心——是咒语;对它的义理加以阐明的是梵书;按照其中所说的方法制定祭祀行为的是仪轨。因为咒语是核心,其余两者又都是依靠它才产生的,所以只要提到咒语,梵书和仪轨也就自然被包括在内了——这句话用“在三吠陀中”来表明这一点。因为“咒语”只是阿他婆等仙人所说的根本吠陀的名称,而“吠陀”则涵盖全部,所以应当知道:说“在吠陀中”时,一切都被包括了。“诸相”是指阐明诸相的咒语文句。以偈颂、韵律、组合、插入等方式编入其中。所谓“以婆罗门的外相”,就是指以诵持吠陀的婆罗门标志。“Vede”是指关于大人相的咒语。“有大威德的众生”是指具有大福德的有智众生。“他们将会知晓”——这样作意之后而教授,这是句子的关联。“由此”是指由于那样教授。“以前”是指从应当说“如来将出现”之时起,直到如来住世期间。它们以应当学习、应当教授的状态流传,变得显著。以一首偈、两首偈等方式,逐渐隐没。不仅诸相咒语如此,其他吠陀也因婆罗门们的无知而逐渐隐没——这是阿阇梨(长部注1.258)所说的。巴利
Kāmañca manto, brahmaṃ, kappoti tibbidho vedo, tathāpi aṭṭhakādi vuttaṃ padhānabhūtaṃ mūlaṃ manto, tadatthavivaraṇamatthaṃ brahmaṃ, tattha vuttanayena yaññakiriyāvidhānaṃ kappoti mantasseva padhānabhāvato, itaresañca tannissayeneva jātattā mantaggahaṇena brahmakappānampi gahaṇaṃ siddhamevāti dasseti ‘‘tīsu vedesū’’ti iminā. Mantoti hi aṭṭhakādīhi isīhi vuttamūlavedasseva nāmaṃ, vedoti sabbassa, tasmā ‘‘vedesū’’ti vutte sabbesampi gahaṇaṃ sijjhatīti veditabbaṃ. Lakkhaṇānīti lakkhaṇadīpakāni mantapadāni. Pajjagajjabandhapavesanavasena pakkhipitvā. Brāhmaṇavesenevāti vedavācakabrāhmaṇaliṅgeneva. Vedeti mahāpurisalakkhaṇamante. Mahesakkhā sattāti mahāpuññavanto paṇḍitasattā. Jānissanti iti manasi katvā vācentīti sambandho. Tenāti tathā vācanato. Pubbeti ‘‘tathāgato uppajjissatī’’ti vattabbakālato pabhuti tathāgatassa dharamānakāle. Ajjhāyitabbavācetabbabhāvena āgacchanti pākaṭā bhavanti. Ekagāthādvigāthādivasena anukkamena antaradhāyanti. Na kevalaṃ lakkhaṇamantāyeva, atha kho aññepi vedā brāhmaṇānaṃ aññāṇabhāvena anukkamena antaradhāyanti evāti ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) vuttaṃ.
对成佛的希求就是愿,对波罗蜜的积集就是受持,对业属于自己的智慧等就是智。论师说:“应当把‘大’这个词分别与每一项搭配,如‘大愿、大受持’等。”(长部疏1.258)这样一来,悲等是那些信、戒等的开端,所以它们就是悲等;这些功德就是悲等功德。愿、受持、智以及悲等功德,由于这些而成为大,因此应当作这样的词义解释:大愿、大受持、大智、大悲等功德。因为这样一来,由于“大”这个词是在并列复合词之后,所以它被分别搭配到每一项上。再者,愿、受持、智和悲,以这些为开端的那些就是如此,这些正是功德,由于这些而成为大——用这样的词义解释,义理也很妥当。而它的大愿性等,应当依据《佛种姓》(佛种姓9等)和《行藏》(行藏1等)来理解。不过在《大本经》的义注中说:“大人,就是由出身、种姓、家族、地域等方面而成为大的人。”(长部义注2.33)其中,“刹帝利、婆罗门”等是出身。“憍陈如、乔达摩”等是种姓。“波尼迦、奇卡利迦、释迦、拘利”等是家族地域。应当知道,这一切在这里都被“等”这个词所涵盖。这样一来,“只有两种趣向”这个对两者共通的说法就得到了合理的成立。巴利
Buddhabhāvapatthanā paṇidhi, pāramīsambharaṇaṃ samādānaṃ, kammassakatādipaññā ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Paṇidhimahato samādānamahatotiādinā paccekaṃ mahantasaddo yojetabbo’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Evañca sati karuṇā ādi yesaṃ saddhāsīlādīnaṃ te karuṇādayo, te eva guṇā karuṇādiguṇā, paṇidhi ca samādānañca ñāṇañca karuṇādiguṇā ca, tehi mahanto paṇidhisamādānañāṇakaruṇādiguṇamahantoti nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evañhi dvandatoparattā mahantasaddo paccekaṃ yojīyatīti. Apica paṇidhi ca samādānañca ñāṇañca karuṇā ca, tamādi yesaṃ te tathā, teyeva guṇā, tehi mahantoti nibbacanenapi attho sūpapanno hoti, paṇidhimahantatādi cassa buddhavaṃsa (bu. vaṃ. 9 ādayo) cariyāpiṭakādi (cariyā. 1 ādayo) vasena veditabbo. Mahāpadānasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘mahāpurisassāti jātigottakulapadesādivasena mahantassa purisassā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33) vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘khattiyo, brāhmaṇo’’ti evamādi jāti. ‘‘Koṇḍañño, gotamo’’ti evamādi gottaṃ. ‘‘Poṇikā, cikkhallikā, sākiyā, koliyā’’ti evamādi kulapadeso, tadetaṃ sabbampi idha ādisaddena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi sati ‘‘dveyeva gatiyo bhavantī’’ti ubhinnaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hotīti.
“完成”就是成就、达成。难道“趣”这个词不是有多种含义吗?为什么这里只说是“完成”呢?为了回答这个问题,就说了“诚然,此词……”等话。在“有的差别”中,指的是地狱等各种不同的存在状态。因为众生依据善行和恶行,以投生到那里而去,所以叫“趣”。“在那里去、在那里运转”,所以叫“趣”,也就是居住之处。“如实了知”,所以叫“趣”,这就是慧。“行走、遍及”叫“趣”,即散布的状态,那正是遍及此处彼处而安住的状态。“行走、完成”叫“趣”,即完成。作为“意趣、归依处”的含义,也通过举例的方式被采纳了。比如“诸比丘,我不知道这些具戒、具善法的比丘们的来处或去处”,这里“趣”用在“意趣”上。“涅槃是阿罗汉的趣”,这里用在“归依处”上,意思是无所执着的庇护所。“随其所欲而去、运转”叫“趣”,即意趣。“去、进入”,或者依入处而在那里运转,所以叫“趣”,即归依处。因为对于超越一切有为法、远离一切想的阿罗汉来说,只有涅槃才是归依处。但在这里,应当知道“趣”是用在“完成”这个含义上,因为其他含义在这里不适用。巴利
Niṭṭhāti nipphattiyo siddhiyo. Nanvāyaṃ gati-saddo anekattho, kasmā niṭṭhāyameva vuttoti āha‘‘kāmañcāya’’ntiādi. Bhavabhedeti nirayādibhavavisese. So hi sucaritaduccaritakammena sattehi upapajjanavasena gantabbāti gati. Gacchati pavattati etthāti gati, nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Gamati yathāsabhāvaṃ jānātīti gati. Paññā, gamanaṃ byāpanaṃ gati, vissaṭabhāvo, so pana ito ca etto ca byāpetvā ṭhitatāva. Gamanaṃ nipphattanaṃ gati, niṭṭhā , ajjhāsayapaṭisaraṇatthāpi nidassananayena gahitā. Tathā hesa ‘‘imesaṃ kho ahaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sīlavantānaṃ kalyāṇadhammānaṃ neva jānāmi āgatiṃ vā gatiṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.508) ettha ajjhāsaye vattati, ‘‘nibbānaṃ arahato gatī’’ti (pari. 339) ettha paṭisaraṇe, parāyaṇe apassayeti attho. Gacchati yathāruci pavattatīti gati, ajjhāsayo. Gacchati avacarati, avacaraṇavasena vā pavattati etthāti gati, paṭisaraṇaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaññuttassa hi arahato nibbānameva paṭisaraṇaṃ, idha pana niṭṭhāyaṃ vattatīti veditabbo tadaññesamavisayattā.
有人问:两种成就所依的相,也就是作为它们特征的诸相,难道不是各不相同的吗?那为什么又说“具足这些相的人……”等等,说它们有相同之处呢?先指出这个质疑的苗头,再为了澄清它,说了“其中,虽然……”等话。为了说明即使在尼拘律树身、频婆果色等相上有共同点,它们之间仍然存在某种差别,所以说了“并非仅凭那些相就成为佛陀”。至于“诸佛的相极为清净、极为分明、极为圆满,而转轮王并非如此”——这个差别是阿阇梨法护长老阐明的。“生”是指:即使所表达的意义各不相同,能表达的名称仍可无差别地用在它们上面,所以叫“种类”,也就是仅仅作为相的共同状态。正如所说——巴利
Nanu dvinnaṃ nipphattīnaṃ nimittabhūtāni lakkhaṇāni visadisāneva, atha kasmā ‘‘yehi samannāgatassā’’tiādinā tesaṃ sadisabhāvo vuttoti codanālesaṃ dassetvā sodhento ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādimāha. Samānepi nigrodhabimbatādilakkhaṇabhāve attheva koci nesaṃ visesoti dassetuṃ ‘‘na teheva buddho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathā hi buddhānaṃ lakkhaṇāni suvisadāni, suparibyattāni, paripuṇṇāni ca honti, na evaṃ cakkavattīna’’nti ayaṃ pana viseso ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) pakāsito. Jāyanti bhinnesupi atthesu abhinnadhīsaddā etāyāti jāti, lakkhaṇabhāvamattaṃ. Vuttañhi –
当各种花斑等事物各不相同,而认知却无差别地运作于它们之上时。
那些声音就是“种类”,就像花鬘用线串起来一样。巴利
‘‘Sabalādīsu bhinnesu, yāya vattantubhinnadhī; Saddā sā jātiresā ca, mālāsuttamivanvitā’’ti.
所以,这句话的意思是说:仅仅从“相”这个特征来说,它们虽然各自不同,但因为同样都是转轮王成就的标志,所以就把这些相看成是一样的,然后把它们称为佛陀成就的标志。在“adhi”这个前缀与动词结合使用时,本该用处格表达的意思却用了业格,所以说“住在家里”。以四种稀有的法——容貌端严、长寿、少病、为婆罗门和居士所喜爱——也就是以这四种具有稀有本质的神变。正如所说的:巴利
Tasmā lakkhaṇatāmattena samānabhāvato visadisānipi tāniyeva cakkavattinipphattinimittabhūtāni lakkhaṇāni sadisāni viya katvā tāni buddhanipphattinimittabhūtāni lakkhaṇāni nāmāti idaṃ vacanaṃ vuccatīti attho. Adhiāpubbavasayoge bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāre vasatī’’ti catūhi acchariyadhammehīti abhirūpatā, dīghāyukatā, appābādhatā, brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ piyamanāpatāti imehi catūhi acchariyasabhāvabhūtāhi iddhīhi. Yathāha –
阿难,大善见王具备四种神通。是哪四种呢?阿难,大善见王容貌端严、好看、令人一见就生敬信……等等。巴利
‘‘Rājā ānanda, mahāsudassano catūhi iddhīhi samannāgato ahosi. Katamāhi catūhi iddhīhi? Idhānanda, rājā mahāsudassano abhirūpo ahosi dassanīyo pāsādiko’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.252).
按照《支提本生经》(本生义注 3.8.44)里说的方式,他们也这样说:“身体散发出栴檀香,这是第一种神变;口中散发出优钵罗花香,这是第二种神变;四位天子在四方恒时手持宝剑守护,这是第三种神变;在空中行走,这是第四种神变。”不过在《未来种姓释》里则说:“容貌端严是第一种神变,具备平等消化的消化力是第二种神变,尽形寿让一切世间看了都不满足是第三种神变,能在空中行走是第四种神变。”其中,“具备平等消化的消化力”就是指具备了能平等消化食物的业生火界。有的人刚吃下去就消化了,有的人却像装进袋子里一样原样停着,这两种都不算具备平等消化的消化力。而有的人到了吃饭的时候,食欲照样生起,这才叫具备平等消化的消化力,意思就是有这种状态。所谓摄事,就是布施、爱语、利行、同事这些摄受他人的方法。正如经中所说:巴利
Cetiyajātake (jā. aṭṭha. 3.8.44) āgatanayaṃ gahetvāpi evaṃ vadanti ‘‘sarīrato candanagandho vāyati, ayaṃ ekā iddhi. Mukhato uppalagandho vāyati, ayaṃ dutiyā. Cattāro devaputtā catūsu disāsu sabbakālaṃ khaggahatthā ārakkhaṃ gaṇhanti, ayaṃ tatiyā. Ākāsena vicarati, ayaṃ catutthī’’ti. Anāgatavaṃsasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ pana ‘‘abhirūpabhāvo ekā iddhi, samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgatabhāvo dutiyā, yāvatāyukampi sakalalokassa dassanātittikabhāvo tatiyā, ākāsacāribhāvo catutthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgatabhāvoti samavipācaniyā kammajatejodhātuyā sampannatā. Yassa hi bhuttamattova āhāro jīrati, yassa vā pana puṭabhattaṃ viya tatheva tiṭṭhati, ubhopete na samavepākiniyā samannāgatā. Yassa pana puna bhattakāle bhattacchando uppajjateva, ayaṃ samavepākiniyā samannāgato nāma, tathārūpatāti attho. Saṅgahavatthūhīti dānaṃ, piyavacanaṃ, atthacariyā, samānattatāti imehi saṅgahopāyehi. Yathāha –
布施,还有爱语,以及在这世间所做的利行;
于诸法中行同事,处处随宜而行;
这些确实是世间的摄事,就像车行走时的车轴销一样。
如果没有这些摄事,母亲不会因为孩子;
父亲也不会因为子女而得到恭敬或供养。
智者会平等地看待这些摄受之事。
因此他们达到崇高,也成为受人称赞的人。巴利
‘‘Dānañca peyyavajjañca, atthacariyā ca yā idha; Samānattatā ca dhammesu, tattha tattha yathārahaṃ; Ete kho saṅgahā loke, rathassāṇīva yāyato. Ete ca saṅgahā nāssu, na mātā puttakāraṇā; Labhetha mānaṃ pūjaṃ vā, pitā vā puttakāraṇā. Yasmā ca saṅgahā ete, samapekkhanti paṇḍitā; Tasmā mahattaṃ papponti, pāsaṃsā ca bhavanti te’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.273);
所谓“令欢喜”,是指以喜与悦而令欢喜,不是以贪爱而令欢喜;这里说的是生起喜与悦。再者,以四种摄事而令欢喜这一意义称为“王”,这是一切国王的通称;即使他们并没有那样做,也像把竹篾扇等称为“多罗叶扇”一样,是依习惯用法而流传下来的。因此应当看出,这里是以“以希有之法”作为不共通的词义解释。巴利
Rañjanatoti pītisomanassavasena rañjanato, na rāgavasena, pītisomanassānaṃ jananatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi rañjanaṭṭhena rājāti pana sabbesaṃ rājūnaṃ samaññā tathā akarontānampi vilīvabījanādīsu tālavaṇṭavohāro viya ruḷhivasena pavattito, tasmā ‘‘acchariyadhammehī’’ti asādhāraṇanibbacanaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
为了说明“转轮王”这个词根据词义有多种含义,先显示它最主要的词义,所以说了“轮宝”等。这确实是主要的,因为如果没有轮宝的转动,就不能成为转轮王。正如义注中所说:“怎样才算转轮王?轮宝升上空中转动,哪怕只有一二指宽那么高。”(长部义注2.243;中部义注3.256)然而,转轮王把上衣披到一边肩上,用左手举起像象鼻一样的金水壶,用右手把水洒向轮宝,说:“尊贵的轮宝,请转动!尊贵的轮宝,请征服!”(长部2.244)因为用这句话让轮宝升上空中转动,所以针对这种令其转动的情形,说“令轮宝转动”。正如经中所说:“那时,阿难,大善见王从座位上起身……洒水于轮宝:‘尊贵的轮宝,请转动!’”等(长部2.244)。而且,“轮”这个词不只用于轮宝,也用于成就轮等,因此根据各个词各自表达特定含义的词义功能,来显示它的词义,说了“以成就轮”等。其中,“以成就轮”:——巴利
Saddasāmatthiyato anekadhā cakkavattīsaddassa vacanatthaṃ dassento padhānabhūtaṃ vacanatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkaratana’’ntiādimāha. Idameva hi padhānaṃ cakkaratanassa pavattanamantarena cakkavattibhāvānāpattito. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā cakkavattī hotīti? Ekaṅguladvaṅgulamattampi cakkaratane ākāsaṃ abbhuggantvā pavatte’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.243; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.256). Yasmā pana rājā cakkavattī ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā vāmahatthena hatthisoṇḍasadisapanāḷiṃ suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ ukkhipitvā dakkhiṇahatthena cakkaratanaṃ udakena abbhukkiritvā ‘‘pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratanaṃ, abhivijinātu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’’nti (dī. ni. 2.244) vacanena cakkaratanaṃ vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā pavattesi, tasmā tādisaṃ pavattāpanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘cakkaratanaṃ vattetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘atha kho ānanda rājā mahāsudassano uṭṭhāyāsanā…pe… cakkaratanaṃ abbhukkiri ‘pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’nti’’ādi (dī. ni. 2.244). Na kevalañca cakkasaddo cakkarataneyeva vattati atha kho sampatticakkādīsupi, tasmā taṃtadatthavācakasaddasāmatthiyatopi vacanatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘sampatticakkehī’’tiādinā. Tattha sampatticakkehīti –
应当住在合适的地方,亲近善友。
具足正愿、前世已造福的人。
谷物、财富、名声、称誉和安乐,都会跟随这个人。巴利
‘‘Patirūpe vase dese, ariyamittakaro siyā; Sammāpaṇidhisampanno, pubbe puññakato naro; Dhaññaṃ dhanaṃ yaso kitti, sukhañcetaṃdhivattatī’’ti. (a. ni. 4.31) –
依靠前面所说的“住在合适的地方”等成就之轮。所谓“转起”,就是运转、成就,或者进一步修习善法。所谓“以那些”,就是以那些成就之轮。所谓“他”,指有情众;就像“自”这个词只是表示纯粹的作者,同样,“他”这个词也是表示作为原因的作者。所谓“令转起”,就是使运转、使成就,或者使进一步修习善法。正如所说的——巴利
Vuttehi patirūpadesavāsādisampatticakkehi. Vattatīti pavattati sampajjati, uparūpari kusaladhammaṃ vā paṭipajjati. Tehīti sampatticakkehi. Paranti sattanikāyaṃ, yathā sayaṃsaddo suddhakattutthassa jotako, tathā paraṃsaddopi hetukattutthassāti veditabbaṃ. Vattetīti pavatteti sampādeti, uparūpari kusaladhammaṃ vā paṭipajjāpeti. Yathāha –
大王善见王这样说:不许杀生,不许拿别人没给的东西,不许在欲望上做错事,不许说假话,不许喝酒,还要按量吃饭。阿难,东方各地的那些小王,都成了善见王的随从。巴利
‘‘Rājā mahāsudassano evamāha ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṃ na ādātabbaṃ, kāmesu micchā na caritabbā, musā na bhaṇitabbā, majjaṃ na pātabbaṃ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesu’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.244).
“威仪轮”指的是作为威仪的轮。因为威仪也被称为“轮”,比如“四轮、九门”等说法(相应部 1.29, 109)。正如所说的那样——巴利
Iriyāpathacakkānanti iriyāpathabhūtānaṃ cakkānaṃ. Iriyāpathopi hi ‘‘cakka’’nti vuccati ‘‘catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.29, 109). Yathāha –
在车辋、相、法、轮、威仪路中,
在成就、轮宝、圆轮和力中,轮。
在陶匠的器具、命令、武器和布施的堆积中。巴利
‘‘Rathaṅge lakkhaṇe dhammo-racakkesviriyāpathe; Cakkaṃ sampattiyaṃ cakka-ratane maṇḍale bale; Kulālabhaṇḍe āṇāya-māyudhe dānarāsisū’’ti.
“Vatta”的意思是转动、生起。就用这个词来说,它转动四威仪之轮,为了利益他人而使它生起——这也显示出它的词源解释,因为意义上是一样的。正如所说的——巴利
Vattoti pavattanaṃ uppajjanaṃ, imināva iriyāpathacakkaṃ vatteti parahitāya uppādetīti nibbacanampi dasseti atthato samānattā. Tathā cāha –
那时,阿难,轮宝向东转动,摩诃须达善王便率领四支军队紧随其后。阿难,轮宝停驻在哪里,摩诃须达善王就和四支军队一起在那里安住。等等。巴利
‘‘Atha kho taṃ ānanda cakkaratanaṃ puratthimaṃ disaṃ pavatti, anvadeva rājā mahāsudassano saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṃ kho panānanda, padese cakkaratanaṃ patiṭṭhāsi, tattha rājā mahāsudassano vāsaṃ upagacchi saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.244).
这是注释书之外的另一种解释:他能转动那被称为“无可阻挡的号令”之轮,所以叫转轮王。确实有这样的说法——巴利
Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – appaṭihataṃ āṇāsaṅkhātaṃ cakkaṃ vattetīti cakkavattī. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
比丘们,具备五种特质的转轮王,纯粹依法转动轮宝,这个轮宝不会被任何人类敌人用手逆转。是哪五种呢?比丘们,在这里,转轮王知义、知法、知量、知时、知众。具备这五种……用手……等等。巴利
‘‘Pañcahi bhikkhave dhammehi samannāgato rājā cakkavattī dhammeneva cakkaṃ vatteti, taṃ hoti cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ kenaci manussabhūtena paccatthikena pāṇinā. Katamehi pañcahi? Idha bhikkhave rājā cakkavattī atthaññū ca hoti, dhammaññū ca mattaññū, ca kālaññū ca parisaññū ca. Imehi kho…pe… pāṇinā’’tiādi (a. ni. 5.131).
他让名为刹帝利众等的“轮”,也就是自己的部众,服从自己的掌控、随自己而转,所以叫转轮王。正如经中说:“阿难,凡是东方各国的敌王,都成了摩诃须达善王的随从。”等等。又因为轮相在他身上显现,所以叫转轮王。因此说:“尊者,这位王子脚下生有轮相,有千辐、有辋、有毂,一切形相圆满。”等等。又因为大身力的轮相在他身上运转,所以叫转轮王。经中确实这样说:“尊者,这位王子有七处隆满……尊者,这位王子上半身如狮子。”等等。由此相状可知他具有大力量。又因为他行持十种或十二种转轮之法,所以叫转轮王。因此说:“孩子,那天的轮宝不是你父王的遗产。来吧,孩子,你应当行持圣者的转轮王之行。”等等。又因为他转动、推行大布施之轮,所以叫转轮王。并且说——巴利
Khattiyamaṇḍalādisaññitaṃ cakkaṃ samūhaṃ attano vase vatteti anuvattetītipi cakkavattī. Vuttañhi ‘‘ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesu’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.244). Cakkalakkhaṇaṃ vattati etassātipi cakkavattī. Tenāha ‘‘imassa deva kumārassa heṭṭhā pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrānī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.35). Cakkaṃ mahantaṃ kāyabalaṃ vattati etassātipi cakkavattī. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ayañhi deva kumāro sattussado…pe… ayañhi deva kumāro sīhapubbaddhakāyo’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.35). Tena hissa lakkhaṇena mahabbalabhāvo viññāyati. Cakkaṃ dasavidhaṃ, dvādasavidhaṃ vā vattadhammaṃ vattati paṭipajjatīti cakkavattī. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na hi te tāta dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pettikaṃ dāyajjaṃ , iṅgha tvaṃ tāta ariye cakkavattivatte vattāhī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 3.83). Cakkaṃ mahantaṃ dānaṃ vatteti pavattetītipi cakkavattī. Vuttañca –
阿难,摩诃须达善王在那些莲花池岸边设立了这样的布施:对想要食物的人施食,对想要饮料的人施饮,对想要衣服的人施衣,对想要车乘的人施车乘,对想要床卧的人施床卧,对想要女人的人施女人,对想要金子的人施金子,对想要黄金的人施黄金。等等。巴利
‘‘Paṭṭhapesi kho ānanda rājā mahāsudassano tāsaṃ pokkharaṇīnaṃ tīre evarūpaṃ dānaṃ annaṃ annatthikassa, pānaṃ pānatthikassa, vatthaṃ vatthatthikassa, yānaṃ yānatthikassa, sayanaṃ sayanatthikassa, itthiṃ itthitthikassa, hiraññaṃ hiraññatthikassa, suvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇatthikassā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.254).
“王”是通称,因为和其他王共通。“转轮王”是别称,因为不和其他人共通。“法”这个词指如理,而如理就叫作平等,所以说“以如理、平等”。“依法”:如理,或以善法。“转动”就是生起,或者行持的意思。即使没有明说“行这个”,因为通称的指示建立在别称上,而且别称应当与别义搭配使用,所以结合成“自利与利他”。如果不取部分,那么所取的东西就会被理解为没有部分,就像“受戒者不布施”这种说法一样。因为转轮王只依法获得王位,不是靠非法、伤害他人等。因此说“依法获得王位”等,而“依法”是指如理,或善法。王的状态即王权,即统治权。巴利
Rājāti sāmaññaṃ tadaññasādhāraṇato. Cakkavattīti visesaṃ anaññasādhāraṇato. Dhammasaddo ñāye, samo eva ca ñāyo nāmāti āha ‘‘ñāyena samenā’’ti. Vattati uppajjati, paṭipajjatīti vā attho. ‘‘Idaṃ nāma caratī’’ti avuttepi sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa payujjitabbattā ‘‘sadatthaparatthe’’ti yojīyati. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatā viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Yasmā cakkavattirājā dhammeneva rajjamadhigacchati, na adhammena parūpaghātādinā. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā’’tiādi, dhammenāti ca ñāyena, kusaladhammena vā. Rañño bhāvo rajjaṃ, issariyaṃ.
有人做对他人有利益、有帮助的事,或者实践这样的法,所以叫“如法的”。做对自己有利益、有帮助的法,或者实践这样的法,所以是“法王”——这里用“以做利他之法”等说法,显示这个有特殊含义的解释。而《大本经》注释书的做法是:致力于十种善法,或者致力于没有过失的王法,所以叫“如法的”;正因为用这个法让世人欢喜,所以叫“法王”。其实这两个词只是同义的另一种说法。不过阿阇梨这样说:“行持称为转轮王行的法,或者称为转轮王行的法属于他、存在于他之中,所以叫‘如法的’;因为不离开法,所以是‘法’,又因为能令欢喜,所以是‘王’,合起来就是‘法王’。”由于经文说“是转轮王”,所以“四边”这个词说明对四洲的自在,因此说“四边……”等。四大海是它的边界和尽头,所以叫“四边”,也就是大地。因为大地在四方都以东海等四大海为尽头,所以这样说。因此说“以四大海为边界”,而它是以四种洲为组成部分所庄严的、属于一个世界的大地——用“以四种洲所庄严的大地”这句话来显示。正如所说——巴利
Paresaṃ hitopāyabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ karoti, caratīti vā dhammiko. Attano hitopāyabhūtassa dhammassa kārako, carako vā rājāti dhammarājāti imaṃ savisesaṃ atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘parahitadhammakaraṇena vā’’tiādinā. Ayaṃ pana mahāpadānaṭṭhakathānayo – dasavidhe kusaladhamme, agatirahite vā rājadhamme niyuttoti dhammiko; teneva dhammena lokaṃ rañjetīti dhammarājā. Pariyāyavacanameva hi idaṃ padadvayanti. Ācariyena pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkavattivattasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ carati, cakkavattivattasaṅkhāto vā dhammo etassa, etasmiṃ vā atthīti dhammiko, dhammato anapetattā dhammo ca so rañjanaṭṭhena rājā cāti dhammarājā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258). ‘‘Rājā hoti cakkavattī’’ti vacanato ‘‘cāturanto’’ti idaṃ catudīpissarataṃ vibhāvetīti āha ‘‘cāturantāyā’’tiādi. Cattāro samuddā antā pariyosānā etissāti cāturantā, pathavī. Sā hi catūsu disāsu puratthimasamuddādicatusamuddapariyosānattā evaṃ vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catusamudda antāyā’’ti, sā pana avayavabhūtehi catubbidhehi dīpehi vibhūsitā ekalokadhātupariyāpannā pathavīyevāti dasseti ‘‘catubbidhadīpavibhūsitāya pathaviyā’’ti iminā. Yathāha –
日月所行之处,光辉照耀诸方,
所有众生,凡是依大地而住的,全都是曼达度王的奴仆。巴利
‘‘Yāvatā candimasūriyā, pariharanti disā bhanti virocanā; Sabbeva dāsā mandhātu, ye ca pāṇā pathavissitā’’ti.
这里不说“以四洲庄严”,而说“以四种洲庄严”,采用“种”这个字,是为了把各个五百小岛也一并归入大洲之中。因为词语上的多余,正说明意义上的多余;或者说,用表示部分的“种”字,已经把同类的事物都涵盖进来了,应当这样理解。“以忿怒等为怨敌”这里,“等”字涵盖了贪欲、愚痴、骄慢、自大等。“战胜”是依据当时情境而用的现在时说法,意思是已经战胜了。因为精通音韵的人,对过去时也主张用“tāvī”这个字。说“战胜一切王”时,虽然转轮王实际上根本没有什么战斗,但为了说明必须通过战斗才能达成的胜利已经成就,所以才说“已战胜战斗”。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘catudīpavibhūsitāyā’’ti avatvā catubbidhadīpavibhūsitāyāti vidhasaddaggahaṇaṃ paccekaṃ pañcasataparittadīpānampi mahādīpeyeva saṅgahaṇatthaṃ saddātirittena atthātirittassa viññāyamānattā, koṭṭhāsavācakena vā vidhasaddena samānabhāgānaṃ gahitattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kopādipaccatthiketi ettha ādisaddena kāmamohamānamadādike saṅgaṇhāti. Vijetīti taṃkālāpekkhāya vattamānavacanaṃ, vijitavāti attho. Saddavidū hi atīte tāvīsaddamicchanti. ‘‘Sabbarājāno vijetī’’ti vadanto kāmaṃ cakkavattino kenaci yuddhaṃ nāma natthi, yuddhena pana sādhetabbassa vijayassa siddhiyā ‘‘vijitasaṅgāmo’’ tveva vuttoti dasseti.
“稳固、恒常的状态”就是稳固性,比如说到“在国土中达到了稳固性”。为了说明这一点,就说了“不可能被任何……所……”等话。这里通过“不能被任何东西动摇”这个意思,说明“在国土中达到了稳固性”,这是依主释复合词;而另一种说法,则是从“国土由于对这位国王有坚固的忠诚而达到了稳固性”这个角度,构成多财释复合词。“在此中”就是指在这位国王身上。为了说明国土是怎样在他身上获得稳固性的,又说了“随侍”等话。其中,“随侍”是指常时随从,“专精己业”是指恒常致力于转轮王之事。“不动、不震颤”这是同义语:或者因盗贼只是掠夺而已故不动,因叛乱故不震颤;或者因盗贼故不动,因敌王故不震颤;或者因不过刚故不动,因不过柔故不震颤。正如过刚的国王以罚金刑杖等压迫民众时,人们舍弃中土,依止山地、海边等地,在边地安住;而过柔的国王,其民众被盗贼、暴恶者掠夺压迫,便舍弃边地,在国土中部安住。如此,在这样的国王身上,国土不能获得稳固的状态。然而在这位远离那两种过失、如同黄金秤一般达到平衡的国王治理国政时,国土犹如置于石板上、被铁板围住一般,不动、不震颤,达到了稳固性。巴利
Thāvarassa dhuvassa bhāvo thāvariyaṃ, yathā janapade thāvariyaṃ patto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na sakkā kenacī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, iminā kenaci akampiyaṭṭhena janapade thāvariyappattoti tappurisasamāsaṃ dasseti, itarena ca daḷhabhattibhāvato janapado thāvariyappatto etasminti aññapadatthasamāsaṃ. Tamhīti asmiṃ rājini. Yathā janapado tasmiṃ thāvariyaṃ patto, tadāvikaronto ‘‘anuyutto’’tiādimāha. Tattha anuyuttoti niccapayutto. Sakammaniratoti cakkavattino rajjakamme sadā pavatto . Acalo asampavedhīti pariyāyavacanametaṃ, corānaṃ vā vilopanamattena acalo, dāmarikattena asampavedhī. Corehi vā acalo, paṭirājūhi asampavedhī. Anatimudubhāvena vā acalo, anaticaṇḍabhāvena asampavedhī. Tathā hi aticaṇḍassa rañño balikhaṇḍādīhi lokaṃ pīḷayato manussā majjhimajanapadaṃ chaḍḍetvā pabbatasamuddatīrādīni nissāya paccante vāsaṃ kappenti, atimudukassa ca rañño corasāhasikajanavilopapīḷitā manussā paccantaṃ pahāya janapadamajjhe vāsaṃ kappenti, iti evarūpe rājini janapado thāvarabhāvaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Etasmiṃ pana tadubhayavirahite suvaṇṇatulā viya samabhāvappatte rājini rajjaṃ kārayamāne janapado pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapetvā ayopaṭṭena parikkhitto viya acalo asampavedhī thāvariyappattoti.
“Seyyathidaṃ”只是一个不变词,它按场合随着性、格、数的不同,以“那是什么、那是什么、那是什么”等方式来使用。这里它是和“那些是什么”搭配,所以说“他的这些”等等。“轮”,是因为转轮王的轮能随他的意愿在空中等处旋转游行,所以叫“轮”。因为轮宝是依靠内部生起的风界之力,在转轮王话音刚落时就立刻运转,不像日月天宫等那样依靠外部生起的风界之力。这在《天宫注》里已经说过。“能生喜乐之义”,就是能产生喜悦和满足之义。因为见到它、听到它的人,由于它稀有难得,会生起极大的喜悦和满足。而从词源上说,“令喜乐、作喜乐”,所以叫“宝”;或者说“喜乐”是rata,引导它的就是ratana;或者说产生喜乐的就是ratana,这是通过省略ja这个音节形成的,词源学家这样解释。“于一切处”,是指在象宝等之中。巴利
Seyyathidanti ekova nipāto, ‘‘so katamo, taṃ katamaṃ, sā katamā’’tiādinā yathārahaṃ liṅgavibhattivacanavasena payojiyamānova hoti, idha tāni katamānīti payuttoti āha ‘‘tassa cetānī’’tiādi. Cacati cakkavattino yathāruci ākāsādigamanāya paribbhamatīti cakkaṃ. Cakkaratanañhi antosamuṭṭhitavāyodhātuvasena rañño cakkavattissa vacanasamanantarameva pavattati, na candasūriyavimānādi viya bahisamuṭṭhitavāyodhātuvasenāti vimānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Ratijananaṭṭhenāti pītisomanassuppādanaṭṭhena. Tañhi passantassa, suṇantassa ca anappakaṃ pītisomanassaṃ uppajjati acchariyadhammattā. Vacanatthato pana rameti ratiṃ karotīti ratanaṃ, ramanaṃ vā rataṃ, taṃ netīti ratanaṃ, rataṃ vā janetīti ratanaṃ ja-kāralopavasenātipi neruttikā. Sabbatthāti hatthiratanādīsu.
轮的“宝”这个含义,也可以通过“被尊重”等说法来理解。不过,它已经被“能生喜乐”这个含义整体涵盖了,所以没有单独列出来。为什么说被整体涵盖了呢?因为“被尊重”等状态本身也是喜乐的因。或者也可以这样理解:作者为了不让论著太冗长,所以没有把“被尊重”等含义单独列出来。而在其他注释书里,是这样说的——巴利
Cittīkatabhāvādināpi cakkassa ratanaṭṭho veditabbo, so pana ratijananaṭṭheneva ekasaṅgahatāya visuṃ na gahito. Kasmā ekasaṅgahoti ce? Cittīkatādibhāvassapi ratinimittattā. Atha vā ganthabyāsaṃ pariharitukāmena cittīkatādibhāvo na gahitoti veditabbaṃ. Aññāsu pana aṭṭhakathāsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.223; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3.yānīdhātigāthāvaṇṇanā; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 156) evaṃ vuttaṃ –
从能让人产生喜乐这个含义来说,就叫作宝。再者——巴利
‘‘Ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Apica –
受到恭敬供养,又极为珍贵,无可比拟,难得一见;
因为只有最殊胜的有情才能受用它,所以称为宝。巴利
Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ; Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccati.
从轮宝出现的那一刻起,就不再存在其他天神所在的地方了,所有天神都用香、花等供养它,对它礼拜致敬等等,所以从“被恭敬尊重”这个意义上说,它是宝。轮宝的价值大到无法估量,所以从“价值巨大”这个意义上说,它也是宝。轮宝和世间存在的其他宝物都不相同,所以从“无可比拟”这个意义上说,它也是宝。而且,佛陀出现在哪个劫,转轮王就只出现在那个劫,而佛陀只是偶尔才出现,所以从“难得一见”这个意义上说,它也是宝。这个轮宝只出现在出身、容貌、家族、权势等都无与伦比的最胜伟大有情那里,不会出现在别人那里,所以从“为无上有情所受用”这个意义上说,它也是宝。就像轮宝一样,其余诸宝也是如此。巴利
‘‘Cakkaratanassa ca nibbattakālato paṭṭhāya aññaṃ devaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na hoti, sabbepi gandhapupphādīhi tasseva pūjañca abhivādanādīni ca karontīti cittīkataṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Cakkaratanassa ca ettakaṃ nāma dhanaṃ agghatīti aggho natthi, iti mahagghaṭṭhenapi ratanaṃ. Cakkaratanañca aññehi loke vijjamānaratanehi asadisanti atulaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Yasmā pana yasmiṃ kappe buddhā uppajjanti, tasmiṃyeva cakkavattino uppajjanti, buddhā ca kadāci karahaci uppajjanti, tasmā dullabhadassanaṭṭhenapi ratanaṃ. Tadetaṃ jātirūpakulaissariyādīhi anomassa uḷārasattasseva uppajjati, na aññassāti anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhenapi ratanaṃ. Yathā ca cakkaratanaṃ, evaṃ sesānipī’’ti.
这里,按照这部复注以及其他地方所说的方法,来说明它的含义:“受尊重”这类说法,并不是从词源解释的角度说的,那又是依据什么说的呢?是依据世间公认为“宝”的事物本身具有应受尊重的性质而说的。从具体形态来看,这指的是世间大众公认为黄金、白银等的东西,转轮王所出现的轮宝等,知恩感恩的人等,以及从最上区分来说的佛、法等三皈依处。“受尊重”是指因为“啊,真令人心动”而应放在心中,这种尊重是因为它值得供养,所以说它的意思是“值得供养”。不过有些人说“受尊重”是“被弄得花哨好看”的意思,这不应采纳,因为这里的citta一词是“心”的意思,就像“请用心听我说”这句经典原文中那样。他们也这样说:“就像在bhū等字中可以有适当的音变。”但在“请看这用宝石和耳环弄得花哨好看的色身”等句子中,则应理解为“以前不花哨,现在被弄得花哨”,所以是“被弄得花哨”,因为那里的citta一词是“花哨”的意思。“价值巨大”是指价值广大、无量、不可计量。“无可比拟”是指没有与之相等、比喻或相似的东西,所以是“无可比拟”。因为只是偶尔才出现,而且很难得到、很难见到,所以是“难得见”。因为只有具足无上殊胜功德的有情才能享用,所以是“无上士受用”。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ taṭṭīkāya, aññattha ca vuttanayena atthavibhāvanā – idañhi ‘‘cittīkata’’ntiādivacanaṃ nibbacanatthavasena vuttaṃ na hoti, atha kinti ce? Loke ‘‘ratana’’nti sammatassa vatthuno garukātabbabhāvena vuttaṃ. Sarūpato panetaṃ lokiyamahājanena sammataṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇādikaṃ, cakkavattirañño uppannaṃ cakkaratanādikaṃ, kataññukatavedipuggalādikaṃ, sabbukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena buddhādisaraṇattayañca daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Aho manohara’’nti citte kattabbatāya cittīkataṃ, svāyaṃ cittīkāro tassa pūjanīyatāyāti katvā pūjanīyanti atthaṃ vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘vicitrakataṭṭhena cittīkata’’nti bhaṇanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ idha cittasaddassa hadayavācakattā ‘‘cittīkatvā suṇātha me’’ti (bu. vaṃ. 1.80) āhaccabhāsitapāḷiyaṃ viya. Tathā cāhu ‘‘yathārahamivaṇṇāgamo bhūkaresū’’ti. ‘‘Passa cittīkataṃ rūpaṃ, maṇinā kuṇḍalena cā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.302) pana pubbe avicitraṃ idāni vicitraṃ katanti cittīkatanti attho gahetabbo tattha cittasaddassa vicitravācakattā. Mahantaṃ vipulaṃ aparimitaṃ agghatīti mahagghaṃ. Natthi etassa tulā upamā, tulaṃ vā sadisanti atulaṃ. Kadācideva uppajjanato dukkhena laddhabbadassanattā dullabhadassanaṃ. Anomehi uḷāraguṇeheva sattehi paribhuñjitabbato anomasattaparibhogaṃ.
现在,为了说明这些(宝)具有“受尊重”等意义中的特殊之处,并显示它们在轮宝上是如何具体存在的,然后再以此类推到其余诸宝,所以接着开始说“如轮宝”等语。其中,所谓“别的天处”其实并不存在,因为国王获得的是不与他人共有的主权等成就,而其他众生获得的是随各自所欲之果。轮宝没有价格,因为它的宝性极为殊胜、光明灿烂,又具有奇妙稀有的性质。而且,从它极为贵重这一点来说,也是无与伦比的。众生因厌恶恶行而远离黑垢,因热心福德而成为精粹、适合佛陀出世的那种时期,转轮王也只在那种时期出生,所以说“由于……”等。有时,是间接的说法,或者说“有时”是指上面所说的那个时候,“极少时”则是指赡部洲所摄之地。因此说——巴利
Idāni nesaṃ cittīkatādiatthānaṃ savisesaṃ cakkaratane labbhamānataṃ dassetvā itaresupi te atidisituṃ ‘‘yathā ca cakkaratana’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha aññaṃ devaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na hoti rañño anaññasādhāraṇissariyādisampattipaṭilābhahetuto, aññesaṃ sattānaṃ yathicchitatthapaṭilābhahetuto ca. Aggho natthi ativiya uḷārasamujjalaratanattā, acchariyabbhutadhammatāya ca. Yadaggena ca mahagghaṃ, tadaggena atulaṃ. Sattānaṃ pāpajigucchanena vigatakāḷako puññapasutatāya maṇḍabhūto yādiso kālo buddhuppādāraho, tādise eva cakkavattīnampi sambhavoti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Kadāci karahacīti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘kadācī’’ti vā yathāvuttakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘karahacī’’ti jambusiridīpasaṅkhātaṃ desaṃ. Tenāha –
时节、洲、地方、族姓,以及母亲;
看清这五件事之后,大名声者(菩萨)便降生。巴利
‘‘Kālaṃ dīpañca desañca, kulaṃ mātarameva ca; Ime pañca viloketvā, uppajjati mahāyaso’’ti. (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.1.10);
这是用譬喻来说明的。譬喻和所譬喻的事物并不是完全相同的,所以,诸佛只是偶尔、极难得才出现于世,转轮王却不是这样;转轮王在佛陀出世的劫中也会出现很多次,应当这样理解。即便如此,因为圆满转轮王的职责极为难行,他的出世也同样是极难值遇的。以这种出世极难得的共同点,所以说他们难得见到。再者,依靠轮宝之力所成就的功德,虽然是转轮王和随从众人共同拥有的,但转轮王以主人的身份独自受用它,因此应当说,他正是为了这个目的才出现的。为了显示这个意思,所以说“这些”等话。上面所说的五种或六种意义,在其余诸宝中也能得到,因此说“其余诸宝也是如此”。巴利
Upamāvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Upamopameyyānañca na accantameva sadisatā, tasmā yathā buddhā kadāci karahaci uppajjanti, na tathā cakkavattino, cakkavattino pana anekadāpi buddhuppādakappe uppajjantīti attho gahetabbo. Evaṃ santepi cakkavattivattapūraṇassa dukkarabhāvato dullabhuppādoyevāti iminā dullabhuppādatāsāmaññena tesaṃ dullabhadassanatā vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Kāmaṃ cakkaratanānubhāvena samijjhamāno guṇo cakkavattiparivārajanasādhāraṇo, tathāpi cakkavattī eva naṃ sāmibhāvena visavitāya paribhuñjatīti vattabbataṃ arahati tadatthameva uppajjanatoti dassento ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādimāha. Yathāvuttānaṃ pañcannaṃ, channampi vā atthānaṃ sesaratanesupi labbhanato ‘‘evaṃ sesānipī’’ti vuttaṃ.
那么,转轮王受用这些宝到底是为了什么?难道没有其中任何一宝,就不能成为转轮王吗?为了回应这个质疑,说明他确实离不开这些宝,从而显示他受用这些宝所对应的利益,所以开始说“而于这些”等话。他征服东方等方向的刹帝利王族,是因为这来自能感得大威势的业果。象宝能随心所欲地游行;他乘上象宝和马宝,凭它们的威力,仅在半日之内就绕行遍及以大海为边界的整个大地,然后回到王都。他用将军宝守护已征服的国土,因为将军宝能安排好各处应当做的事。至于其余的珠宝、女宝、居士宝,他通过享用它们来体验受用之乐,因为依各自相应的方式确实能成就这种体验。也就是说,他靠珠宝在一由旬的范围内驱散黑暗、见到光明等,从而体验快乐;靠女宝,以看见超越人间的容貌等而体验快乐;靠居士宝,以得到想要的珠宝、黄金、财物等而体验快乐。巴利
Imehi pana ratanehi rājā cakkavattī kimatthaṃ paccanubhoti, nanu vināpi tesu kenaci raññā cakkavattinā bhavitabbanti codanāya tassa tehi hathārahamatthapaccanubhavanadassanena kenacipi avinābhāvitaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘imesu panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Ajitaṃ puratthimādidisāya khattiyamaṇḍalaṃ jināti mahesakkhatāsaṃvattaniyakammanissandabhāvato. Yathāsukhaṃ anuvicarati hatthiratanaṃ, assaratanañca abhiruhitvā tesaṃ ānubhāvena antopātarāsaṃyeva samuddapariyantaṃ pathaviṃ anupariyāyitvā rājadhāniyā eva paccāgamanato. Pariṇāyakaratanena vijitamanurakkhati tattha tattha kattabbakiccasaṃvidahanato. Avasesehi maṇiratanaitthiratanagahapatiratanehi upabhuñjanena pavattaṃ upabhogasukhaṃ anubhavati yathārahaṃ tehi tathānubhavanasiddhito. So hi maṇiratanena yojanappamāṇe padese andhakāraṃ vidhametvā ālokadassanādinā sukhamanubhavati, itthiratanena atikkantamānusakarūpadassanādivasena, gahapatiratanena icchiticchitamaṇikanakarajatādidhanapaṭilābhavasena sukhamanubhavati.
现在,为了借助“力”和“力果”把上面所说的义理讲清楚,所以说了“以第一”等话。力有三种,因为“诸王依靠它才能胜任、才能成办事情”,所以称为力。正如所说的:巴利
Idāni sattiyā, sattiphalena ca yathāvuttamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tividhā hi sattiyo ‘‘sakkonti samatthenti rājāno etāyā’’ti katvā. Yathāhu –
威势、精进和谋略,这三种确实是力量。
刑罚所生的威力是火界,而威慑力则来自库藏。
咒语和念诵,它则是四耳、二境;
三境六耳,则被称为秘密、隐秘。巴利
‘‘Pabhāvussāhamantānaṃ, vasā tisso hi sattiyo; Pabhāvo daṇḍajo tejo, patāpo tu ca kosajo. Manto ca mantanaṃ so tu, catukkaṇṇo dvigocaro; Tigocaro tu chakkaṇṇo, rahassaṃ guyhamuccate’’ti.
其中,精进力就是勇猛之力。对这个人来说,通过第一个轮宝,这种努力就圆满了。为什么呢?因为依靠勇猛之力,应当推动的无障碍轮宝之状态得以成就。慧力就是谋略之力。对这个人来说,通过最后的将军宝,这种努力就圆满了。为什么呢?因为他在一切王事中都以善巧的方式行事,就像谋略之力一样,不会偏离。通过调伏和财富而拥有的,就是财富之力。对这个人来说,通过象宝、马宝、居士宝,这种努力就圆满了。为什么呢?因为象宝和马宝具有大威势,又因居士宝而获得库藏丰足,就像财富之力一样,财富的成就得以达成。通过女宝和珠宝,三种力的修习之果就圆满了,这是连贯的意思:按照前面所说的三种力去修习,应当得到的果,全部都由这些而圆满。为什么呢?因为正是通过这些,受用之乐才能成办。巴利
Tattha vīriyabalaṃ ussāhasatti. Paṭhamena cassa cakkaratanena tadanuyogo paripuṇṇo hoti. Kasmāti ce? Tena ussāhasattiyā pavattetabbassa appaṭihatāṇācakkabhāvassa siddhito. Paññābalaṃ mantasatti. Pacchimena cassa pariṇāyakaratanena tadanuyogo. Kasmāti ce ? Tassa sabbarājakiccesu kusalabhāvena mantasattiyā viya avirajjhanapayogattā. Damanena, dhanena ca pabhuttaṃ pabhūsatti. Hatthiassagahapatiratanehi cassa tadanuyogo paripuṇṇo hoti. Kasmāti ce? Hatthiassaratanānaṃ mahānubhāvatāya, gahapatiratanato paṭiladdhakosasampattiyā ca pabhāvasattiyā viya pabhāvasamiddhisiddhito. Itthimaṇiratanehi tividhasattiyogaphalaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hotīti sambandho, yathāvuttāhi tividhāhi sattīhi payujjanato yaṃ phalaṃ laddhabbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ tehi paripuṇṇaṃ hotīti attho. Kasmāti ce? Teheva upabhogasukhassa sijjhanato.
为了也从两种乐的角度把前面说的义理讲清楚,所以说了“他以女宝、摩尼宝……”等这些话。受用乐,是指把宝物放在身边,依受用而生起的乐。其余,是指除了这些以外的轮宝等五种宝。依无怨敌性而生起的乐,就是自在乐。现在,为了也从这些宝的成就之因的角度说明它们与某种善根决定不相离,所以说了“特别是……”等话。由无嗔善根所生业的威力而成就,也就是说,由名为无嗔的善根——通过俱生等缘的力量——所生之业的威力而成就,因为它们是更柔和的宝种。业果大多数都与业相似。中间的摩尼宝、女宝、居士宝,是由无贪善根所生业的威力而成就,因为殊胜的财富以及获得殊胜财富之因,都是以具足舍离为因的。最后的向导宝,是由无痴善根所生业的威力而成就,因为转轮王的事业只有大慧才能引导,而大慧的状态正是无痴善根所生业的等流果。这在《觉支相应》中,也就是《大品》第二的《觉支相应》中(有说明)。关于《宝经》,就是在那里第五品中结集的第二《宝经》。所谓“指导”,是指为了详细分别七宝而展开的方法。巴利
Duvidhasukhavasenapi yathāvuttamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘so itthimaṇiratanehī’’tiādi kathitaṃ. Bhogasukhanti samīpe katvā paribhogavasena pavattasukhaṃ. Sesehīti tadavasesehi cakkādipañcaratanehi. Apaccatthikatāvasena pavattasukhaṃ issariyasukhaṃ. Idāni tesaṃ sampannahetuvasenapi kenaci avinābhāvitameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘visesato’’tiādimāha. Adosakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvenāti adosasaṅkhātena kusalamūlena sahajātādipaccayavasena uppāditakammassa ānubhāvena sampajjanti sommatararatanajātikattā. Kammaphalañhi yebhuyyena kammasarikkhakaṃ. Majjhimāni maṇiitthigahapatiratanāni alobhakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjanti uḷāradhanassa, uḷāradhanapaṭilābhakāraṇassa ca pariccāgasampadāhetukattā. Pacchimaṃ pariṇāyakaratanaṃ amohakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjati mahāpaññeneva cakkavattirājakiccassa parinetabbattā, mahāpaññabhāvassa ca amohakusalamūlajanitakammanissandabhāvato. Bojjhaṅgasaṃyutteti mahāvagge dutiye bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 5.223). Ratanasuttassāti tattha pañcamavagge saṅgītassa dutiyassa ratanasuttassa (saṃ. ni. 5.223). Upadeso nāma savisesaṃ sattannaṃ ratanānaṃ vicāraṇavasena pavatto nayo.
以归依为性、能消除敌对之法,所以他们是勇士、有力量,意思是能带来无畏。因此说“天生无所畏惧”。因为战胜阿修罗后而安住,所以帝释天被称为“智者”;由于他是其军队的一员,所以那位天子被称为“支”,即智者的支分;他们的身体就像他的身体一样,所以那些人是“智者之支的身体”,因此说“身体如天子一般”。有些阿阇黎名叫“萨罗沙摩沙”,他们不能接受这一点,所以说“然而在这里……”等等。“自性”即本来如此之义。“最上勇士”即最上的战士。因为“sūra”这个词在这里是战士的意思。这样,与前一种说法相比,这一说法就有其殊胜之处;也有人这样说:“‘sūra’一词是最上之义”,因为可以看到这样的文本:“最上勇士们被称为……”。“勇士们”即有精进力者们。“支”即原因,因为“以此了知、知晓果”。“由于那精进,他们被称为‘智者’,那本身就是智者之支”,因此说“所说的就是精进”。“色”即身体。因此说“如精进所成的身体”。精进本身就是精进所成,就像“布施所成”一样。因此,意思是“如以精进为身体者”。然而精进并非完全是色法,所以采用了“如”这个词。再者,为了显示由智者之支所生起的就是智者之支,所以说“如精进所成的身体”;这样也以“如”这个词显示:色法并非完全从精进生起。或者,应当这样连接:身体之色是智者之支,精进属于他们;即使如此,也以“如精进所成的身体”这句话表明:精进并不是某种有形体之物。在这里,“所成”一词也应当照其自身之义理解,因此意思是“如具有形体的精进一般”。这段话的意思是:如果精进是有形体的,那么他们的儿子们就会与它完全相似——这正是阿阇黎所认可的含义。然而在《大譬喻注》中这样说:“智者之支是他们的色法,因此是‘智者之支的色法’;他们是精进之种类、以精进为自性、由精进而成、不疲倦者;意思是说,即使战斗一整天也不疲倦。”应当看到,这是就“色”一词的自性义而说的。在这里以及其他某些地方,可以看到“dhitaṅgarūpā”这样的文本。因为“dhiti”一词也有精进之义,就像在“真实、法、精进、舍离,他超越了所见”等中的“dhiti”一词一样。但在某些地方,只看到“vīraṅga”这样的文本。应当根据合适与否来采纳。巴利
Saraṇato paṭipakkhavidhamanato sūrā sattivanto, nibbhayāvahāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘abhīrukajātikā’’ti. Asure vijinitvā ṭhitattā sakko devānamindo dhīro nāma, tassa senaṅgabhāvato devaputto ‘‘aṅga’’nti vuccati, dhīrassa aṅgaṃ, tassa rūpamiva rūpaṃ yesaṃ te dhīraṅgarūpā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘devaputtasadisakāyā’’ti. Eketi sārasamāsanāmakā ācariyā, tadakkhamanto āha ‘‘ayaṃ panetthā’’tiādi. Sabhāvoti sabhāvabhūto attho. Uttamasūrāti uttamayodhā. Sūrasaddo hi idha yodhattho. Evañhi purimanayato imassa visesatā hoti, ‘‘uttamattho sūrasaddo’’tipi vadanti, ‘‘uttamā sūrā vuccantī’’tipi hi pāṭho dissati. Vīrānanti vīriyavantānaṃ. Aṅganti kāraṇaṃ ‘‘aṅgīyati ñāyati phalametenā’’ti katvā. Yena vīriyena ‘‘dhīrā’’ti vuccanti, tadeva dhīraṅgaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘vīriyanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Rūpanti sarīraṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyamayasarīrā viyā’’ti. Vīriyameva vīriyamayaṃ yathā ‘‘dānamaya’’nti, (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 34) tasmā vīriyasaṅkhātasarīrā viyāti attho. Vīriyaṃ pana na ekantarūpanti viya-saddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Apica dhīraṅgena nibbattaṃ dhīraṅganti atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vīriyamayasarīrā viyā’’ti vuttaṃ, evampi vīriyato rūpaṃ na ekantaṃ nibbattanti viya-saddena dasseti. Atha vā rūpaṃ sarīrabhūtaṃ dhīraṅgaṃ vīriyametesanti yojetabbaṃ, tathāpi vīriyaṃ nāma kiñci saviggahaṃ na hotīti dīpeti ‘‘vīriyamayasarīrā viyā’’ti iminā, idhāpi mayasaddo sakattheyeva daṭṭhabbo, tasmā saviggahavīriyasadisāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – saviggahaṃ ce vīriyaṃ nāma siyā, te cassa puttā taṃsadisāyeva bhaveyyunti ayameva cattho ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) anumato. Mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dhīraṅgaṃ rūpametesanti dhīraṅgarūpā, vīriyajātikā vīriyasabhāvā vīriyamayā akilāsuno ahesuṃ, divasampi yujjhantā na kilamantīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.34) tadetaṃ rūpasaddassa sabhāvatthataṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idha ceva aññattha katthaci ‘‘dhitaṅgarūpā’’ti pāṭho dissati. Vīriyatthopi hi dhitisaddo hoti ‘‘saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, diṭṭhaṃ so ativattatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.57) dhitisaddo viya. Katthaci pana ‘‘vīraṅga’’nti pāṭhova diṭṭho. Yathā ruccati, tathā gahetabbaṃ.
有人问:转轮王根本没有敌军,哪来的儿子们去击破敌军呢?那为什么又说“能破敌军”呢?为了澄清这个责难,注释里说了“若……”等话。意思是:不管有没有敌军,只是通过“如果有的话”这种假设,来显示他们有这样的威力,所以才那样说。即使说了“能破敌军”,也应该理解为“有能力击破敌军”,因为从上下文也能知道这层意思。就像“诸比丘,正在学的比丘应当了知、应当遍问、应当审问”这句,在它的词义分别中取的是“想要学的人”这个意思;为了说明这个道理,所以说“有能力击破它”。因为他们并不是真的站在那里击破敌军,而只是具有击破的能力罢了。其他地方也应当这样随宜理解。也有人说:“使他们有能力击破敌军,所以叫‘能破敌军’”——这样说也是在显示这个意思。巴利
Nanu ca rañño cakkavattissa paṭisenā nāma natthi, ya’massa puttā pamaddeyyuṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘parasenappamaddanā’’ti vuttanti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘sace’’tiādimāha, parasenā hotu vā, mā vā, ‘‘sace pana bhaveyyā’’ti parikappanāmattena tesaṃ evamānubhāvataṃ dassetuṃ tathā vuttanti adhippāyo, ‘‘parasenappamaddanā’’ti vuttepi parasenaṃ pamaddituṃ samatthāti attho gahetabbo pakaraṇatopi atthantarassa viññāyamānattā, yathā ‘‘sikkhamānena bhikkhave bhikkhunā aññātabbaṃ paripucchitabbaṃ paripañhitabba’’nti (pāci. 434) etassa padabhājanīye (pāci. 436) ‘‘sikkhitukāmenā’’ti atthaggahaṇanti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ parimaddituṃ samatthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi te parasenaṃ pamaddantā tiṭṭhanti, atha kho pamaddanasamatthā eva honti . Evamaññatrapi yathārahaṃ. Parasenaṃ pamaddanāya samatthentīti parasenappamaddanāti atthaṃ dassetītipi vadanti.
为了说明:过去所造、积集的福德法,如今正在成熟,而要让它更长久地成熟,作为助缘的转轮王事业之圆满、精勤成就等法,所以对“以法”这个词,用“不杀生等五戒之法”来解释其含义。这个意思确实是依据经文来的:阿难,凡是东方各国的敌王们,来到大善见王面前,这样说:“来吧,大王,欢迎您,大王,这是您自己的,大王,请您教导,大王。”大善见王这样说:“不杀生,不与取,不邪淫,不妄语,不饮酒,并且按食量而食。”阿难,凡是东方各国的敌王们,都跟随大善见王。如此经文中所说的国王教诫之法,就是这里所说的意思。这样一来,“不用杖、不用刀”这个修饰语也就很妥当地成立了。在《经集注》等其他注释中,也是同样解释这个意思的。巴利
Pubbe katūpacitassa etarahi vipaccamānakassa puññadhammassa cirataraṃ vipaccituṃ paccayabhūtaṃ cakkavattivattasamudāgataṃ payogasampattisaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammenā’’ti padassa ‘‘pāṇona hantabbotiādinā pañcasīladhammenā’’ti atthamāha. Ayañhi attho ‘‘ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rājānaṃ mahāsudassanaṃ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṃsu ‘ehi kho mahārāja, svāgataṃ te mahārāja, sakaṃ te mahārāja, anusāsa mahārājā’ti. Rājā mahāsudassano evamāha ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṃ na ādātabbaṃ, kāmesu micchā na caritabbā, musā na bhaṇitabbā, majjaṃ na pātabbaṃ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesu’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 2.244) āgataṃ rañño ovādadhammaṃ sandhāya vutto. Evañhi ‘‘adaṇḍena asatthenā’’ti idampi visesanavacanaṃ susamatthitaṃ hoti. Aññāsupi suttanipātaṭṭhakathādīsu (su. ni. aṭṭha. 226; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.223) ayamevattho vutto.
不过,《大本经注》里说:“‘不用杖’是指:有人对犯了罪的众生,抓一百个、一千个来处罚,这叫做用财物作杖来治国;有人下令砍断、劈裂肢体,这叫做用刀杖。而这位转轮王两种杖都舍弃了,不用杖而安住。‘不用刀’是指:有人用单刃刀之类的武器伤害别人,这叫做用刀来治国。而这位转轮王不用刀,连让一只小苍蝇流出一滴血的事都不对任何人做,纯粹以法——‘来吧,大王!’——这样被敌对的国王们迎接而来,征服了上面所说的那种大地而安住,意思是征服之后成为主人而住。”这段话是针对“以法”这个词,用来说明“以过去所造、所积、如今正在成熟的任何一种福德之法”这个含义。正因为如此,才说“以法被敌对的国王们迎接而来,征服了上面所说的那种大地而安住”。论师在《长部注疏》里也说:“以法,就是以自己所造、所积的福德之法。因为被这个福德之法所推动,大地上所有的国王都出来迎接,说‘善来,大王!’等等,然后把自己的国土献给转轮王。因此说:‘他不用杖、不用刀,纯粹以法征服这被大海围绕的大地而安住。’”这也显示的就是前面所说的那个含义。所以应当知道,这里两种解释都是合理的。因为如果没有转轮王职责的圆满等实际努力的成就,仅仅靠过去所造的业,这样的安住不可能发生;同样,如果没有过去所造的业,转轮王职责的圆满等实际努力的成就也不可能实现。巴利
Mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘adaṇḍenāti ye katāparādhe satte satampi sahassampi gaṇhanti, te dhanadaṇḍena rajjaṃ kārenti nāma, ye chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti, te satthadaṇḍena. Ayaṃ pana duvidhampi daṇḍaṃ pahāya adaṇḍena ajjhāvasati. Asatthenāti ye ekatodhārādinā satthena paraṃ vihesanti, te satthena rajjaṃ kārenti nāma. Ayaṃ pana satthena khuddakamakkhikāyapi pivanamattaṃ lohitaṃ kassaci anuppādetvā dhammeneva, ‘ehi kho mahārājā’ti evaṃ paṭirājūhi sampaṭicchitāgamano vuttappakāraṃ pathaviṃ abhivijinitvā ajjhāvasati abhibhavitvā sāmī hutvā vasatīti attho’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.34) vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ ‘‘dhammenā’’ti padassa ‘‘pubbe katūpacitena etarahi vipaccamānakena yena kenaci puññadhammenā’’ti atthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Teneva hi ‘‘dhammena paṭirājūhi sampaṭicchitāgamano vuttappakāraṃ pathaviṃ abhivijinitvā ajjhāvasatī’’ti. Ācariyenapi (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) vuttaṃ dhammenāti katūpacitena attano puññadhammena. Tena hi sañcoditā pathaviyaṃ sabbarājāno paccuggantvā ‘‘svāgataṃ te mahārājā’’tiādīni vatvā attano rajjaṃ rañño cakkavattissa niyyātenti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so imaṃ pathaviṃ sāgarapariyantaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasatī’’ti, tenapi yathāvuttamevatthaṃ dasseti, tasmā ubhayathāpi ettha attho yutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cakkavattivattapūraṇādipayogasampattimantarena hi pubbe katūpacitakammeneva evamajjhāvasanaṃ na sambhavati, tathā pubbe katūpacitakammamantarena cakkavattivattapūraṇādipayogasampattiyā evāti.
讲完第一种成就之后,为了讲第二种成就,说出了“然而,如果……”这段话。在这里,为了显示其中没有明说的含义,说了“阿罗汉……已揭开覆盖者,在这里……”等。因为贪等七种恶法在世间生起,生起时覆盖、缠缚众生的心相续,阻碍善法的生起,所以这里用“覆盖”这个词来指它们,通过“贪、嗔……”等来说明。“恶行”是指除了邪见之外的其余意恶行,连同前面的一起构成三种恶行;而邪见因为特别能覆盖众生,又因为是最重的罪,所以被单独提出来。经中也说:“所有这些都被这六十二种事网住,沉在其中,只是偶尔浮出来……”等。同样,以迷惑为“痴”,以令人不知为“无明”,这是按活动方式的不同,把同一个“无知”分成两种来说。同样,它的覆盖之义也从两方面说明:“当痴征服人时,那时就是一片黑暗”,“世间被无明覆盖,因悭吝和放逸而不显现”。贪、嗔等的覆盖之义也应当这样理解。不过,在《大本经注释》中,是按贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、烦恼、渴爱来取七种恶法的。其中,以染著为“贪”,以渴求为“渴爱”,这是按活动方式的不同,把同一个“贪”分成两种来说。同样,它的覆盖之义也完全一样。正如所说:“当贪征服人时,那时就是一片黑暗”,“被欲贪蒙蔽、被网覆盖,被渴爱的覆盖所遮盖”。而通过“烦恼”一词,则把其余没有提到的疑等也包括进来了。巴利
Evaṃ ekaṃ nipphattiṃ kathetvā dutiyaṃ nipphattiṃ kathetuṃ yadetaṃ ‘‘sace kho panā’’tiādivacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha anuttānamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘arahaṃ…pe… vivaṭṭacchadoti etthā’’tiādimāha . Yasmā rāgādayo satta pāpadhammā loke uppajjanti, uppajjamānā ca te sattasantānaṃ chādetvā pariyonandhitvā kusalappavattiṃ nivārenti, tasmā te idha chadasaddena vuttāti dasseti ‘‘rāgadosā’’tiādinā. Duccaritanti micchādiṭṭhito aññena manoduccaritena saha tīṇi duccaritāni, micchādiṭṭhi pana visesena sattānaṃ chadanato, paramasāvajjattā ca visuṃ gahitā. Vuttañca ‘‘sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi antojālīkatā, ettha sitāva ummujjamānā ummujjantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.146). Tathā muyhanaṭṭhena moho, aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena avijjāti pavattiākārabhedena aññāṇameva dvidhā vuttaṃ. Tathā hissa dvidhāpi chadanattho kathito ‘‘andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ moho sahate nara’’nti, (mahāni. 5, 156, 195) ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko, vevicchā pamādā nappakāsatī’’ti (su. ni. 1039; cūḷani. pārāyanavagga.2) ca. Evaṃ rāgadosādīnampi chadanattho vattabbo. Mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33) pana rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesataṇhāvasena satta pāpadhammā gahitā. Tatra rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhāti pavattiākārabhedena lobho eva dvidhā vutto. Tathā hissa dvidhāpi chadanattho ekantikova. Yathāha ‘‘andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ rāgo sahate nara’’nti, ‘‘kāmandhā jālasañchannā, taṇhāchadanachāditā’’ti (udā. 94) ca, kilesaggahaṇena ca vuttāvasiṭṭhā vicikicchādayo vuttā.
“被七者所覆”这句话是带着原因的说明。意思是:因为被七种恶法所覆盖,所以世间就处在烦恼的黑暗之中。“那覆盖”就是指由七种恶法所构成的覆盖。“揭开”就是使它被揭开、被除去。这同一个意思又换一种说法来表达:“成为从四面八方都生起光明。”因为除去烦恼的覆盖本身就是光明,所以应当被揭开、应当被除去的就是“揭开”,覆盖、遮蔽的就是“覆盖”;因此,已经揭开覆盖的,就是“已揭开覆盖者”,或者说是“已揭开覆盖者”的意思。这个“已揭开覆盖者”一词,就像“坚定法者”“现证法者”这类词一样,作为阳性词有-ā结尾和-o结尾两种形式。正如《大本经注释》中所说:“所谓贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、烦恼、渴爱这些覆盖、障碍,已被揭开、已被破坏、已被摧毁,因此称为‘已揭覆盖者’,也有读作‘已揭开覆盖者’的,意思相同。”在它的《疏解》中也说:“‘已揭开覆盖者’是把-o音变成-ā音的表述。”而语法学家们则说:“依照‘持弓者’等规则,在与‘弓’等词构成复合词时,有时会加上‘a’后缀”,并举出“持箭弓者、现证法者、已揭开覆盖者”等用法作为例子。巴利
Sattahi paṭicchanneti hetugabbhavacanaṃ, sattahi pāpadhammehi paṭicchannattā kilesavasena andhakāre loketi attho. Taṃ chadananti sattapāpadhammasaṅkhātaṃ chadanaṃ. Vivaṭṭetvāti vivaṭṭaṃ katvā vigametvā. Tadeva pariyāyantarena vuttaṃ ‘‘samantato sañjātāloko hutvā’’ti. Kilesachadanavigamo eva hi āloko, etena vivaṭṭayitabbo vigametabboti vivaṭṭo, chādeti paṭicchādetīti chado, vivaṭṭo chado anenāti vivaṭṭacchadā,vivaṭṭacchado vāti atthaṃ dasseti. Ayañhi vivaṭṭacchadasaddo daḷhadhammapaccakkhadhammasaddādayo viya pulliṅgavasena ākāranto, okāranto ca hoti. Tathā hi mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesataṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ chadanaṃ āvaraṇaṃ vivaṭaṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ vivaṭakaṃ etenāti vivaṭacchado, ‘vivaṭṭacchadā’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33) tassā līnatthappakāsaniyampi vuttaṃ ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadāti okārassa ākāraṃ katvā niddeso’’ti. Saddavidū pana ‘‘ādhanvāditoti lakkhaṇena samāsantagatehi dhanusaddādīhi kvaci āpaccayo’’ti vatvā ‘‘kaṇḍivadhanvā, paccakkhadhammā, vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti payogamudāharanti.
为什么说了这三个词?为了用因的庄严方式回答这个追问,说了“在此……”等话,其中“在此”是指在三个词上。值得接受特殊的供养,就是“应受供养者”,这是从“值得供养”这个意思来说的。因为是正自觉者,所以值得供养,这是就他值得供养这一点说出其原因。由于成佛是以断除一切烦恼连同习气为前提,所以说了“已揭开覆盖者”,它是成佛的原因。依业等而有三种轮转,依贪等而有七种覆盖,合起来就是“轮转覆盖”;已经离开了轮转覆盖,或者他的轮转覆盖已经离去,就是“已揭开覆盖者”或“已揭开覆盖者”,而前面的“离”字应当同时用在两处,为了显示这个意思,就说“已揭开且已离覆盖”。也有人这样说:“‘已揭开且他是已离覆盖者’就是‘已揭开覆盖者’,这是显示后一个词中前一个词被省略的意思。”“阿拉汉,因为没有轮转”——这是就远离烦恼、已杀烦恼之敌和轮回之辐、作恶时没有隐秘这些意思来说的。这是由果推因的显示——就像由烟推知火,由洪水推知上游下了雨。按这个意思,阿拉汉性是因,没有轮转是果,这是阿阇梨的见解。而“因应受供养等,以及应受特殊供养”则是依因推果的显示,就像由火推知烟,由上游下雨推知洪水。“正自觉者,因为没有覆盖”——这是依因推果的显示,因为正等觉性是以没有一切烦恼习气覆盖为前提的。因为以阿拉汉道而离覆盖,以一切知智而成为正自觉者。“已揭开且已离覆盖”这是两个因。虽然按阿阇梨的见解,在由果推因的显示中,“已揭开性”只是果,但由于它是推因之知以及那种智的因,所以应当知道它也被称为因。巴利
Kasmā padattayametaṃ vuttanti anuyogaṃ hetālaṅkāranayena pariharanto ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha, tatthāti ca tīsu padesūti attho. Pūjāvisesaṃ paṭiggaṇhituṃ arahatīti arahanti atthena pūjārahatā vuttā. Yasmā sammāsambuddho, tasmā pūjārahatāti tassā pūjārahatāya hetu vutto. Savāsanasabbakilesappahānapubbakattā buddhabhāvassa buddhattahetubhūtā vivaṭṭacchadatā vuttā. Kammādivasena tividhaṃ vaṭṭañca rāgādivasena sattavidho chado ca vaṭṭacchadā, vaṭṭacchadehi vigato, vigatā vā vaṭṭacchadā yassāti vivaṭṭacchado,vivaṭṭacchadā vā, dvandapubbago pana vi-saddo ubhayattha yojetabboti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vivaṭṭo ca vicchado cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evampi vadanti ‘‘vivaṭṭo ca so vicchado cāti vivaṭṭacchado, uttarapade pubbapadalopoti atthaṃ dassetī’’ti. ‘‘Arahaṃ vaṭṭābhāvenā’’ti idaṃ kilesehi ārakattā, kilesārīnaṃ saṃsāracakkassārānañca hatattā, pāpakaraṇe ca rahābhāvāti atthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idañhi phalena hetānumānadassanaṃ – yathā taṃ dhūmena aggissa, udakoghena upari vuṭṭhiyā, etena ca atthena arahabhāvo hetu, vaṭṭābhāvo phalanti ayaṃ ācariyamati. ‘‘Paccayādīnaṃ, pūjāvisesassa ca arahattā’’ti pana hetunā phalānumānadassanampi siyā yathā taṃ agginā dhūmassa, upari vuṭṭhiyā udakoghassa. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho chadanābhāvenā’’ti idaṃ pana hetunā phalānumānadassanaṃ savāsanasabbakilesacchadanābhāvapubbakattā sammāsambuddhabhāvassa. Arahattamaggena hi vicchadatā, sabbaññutaññāṇena sammāsambuddhabhāvo. ‘‘Vivaṭṭo ca vicchado cā’’ti idaṃ hetudvayaṃ. Kāmañca ācariyamatiyā phalena hetuanumānadassane vivaṭṭatā phalameva hoti, hetuanumānadassanassa, pana tathāñāṇassa ca hetubhāvato hetuyeva nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
像这样,在解释“三个词”的说法时,先用“因由庄严”的方式说明了用意;现在再以“四无畏”的角度来说明,于是说了“以第二……”等话。其中,“以第二无畏”是指:按照世尊所说的次第——“诸比丘,如来有这四种无畏,具足这些无畏的如来自称牛王之位,在众中作狮子吼,转梵轮”(《增支部》4.8;《中部》1.150)——成为第二的那个无畏,也就是由“对于自称漏尽者的你,若说‘这些漏未断尽’,那么,比丘们,我不见有沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵或世间任何人能以法如理呵责我;比丘们,我不见这样的相,所以住于安稳、无畏、获得无畏”所阐明的无畏。“前义成就”是指前一个词“阿拉汉”的义理成就,也就是阿拉汉性的成就;因为第二无畏就是那个义,所以说以这个无畏成就了那个义。因为第二无畏正是通过“对于自称漏尽者的你,若说‘这些漏未断尽’……”等话来说明的,而“阿拉汉”这个词的义理则是通过“远离烦恼故”等话来说明的。由此也可以知道:“正如以第二无畏成就前义,同样,以前面的义也成就第二无畏。”这样,以这种方式,以四无畏之力显示三个词的说法中的用意,就是合理的。否则,因为缺少某种用意,这句话在这里就不应该说了。其余各处也是同样的道理。巴利
Evaṃ padattayavacane hetālaṅkāranayena payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni catuvesārajjavasenapi dassento ‘‘dutiyenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha dutiyena vesārajjenāti ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave tathāgatassa vesārajjāni, yehi vesārajjehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.8; ma. ni. 1.150) bhagavatā vuttakkamena dutiyabhūtena ‘‘khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ‘ime āsavā aparikkhīṇā’ti, tatra vata maṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṃ saha dhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṃ bhikkhave na samanupassāmi, etamahaṃ bhikkhave nimittaṃ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmī’’ti paridīpitena vesārajjena. Purimasiddhīti purimassa ‘‘araha’’nti padassa atthasiddhi arahattasiddhi, dutiyavesārajjassa tadatthabhāvato tena vesārajjena tadatthasiddhīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ‘ime āsavā aparikkhīṇā’ ti’’ādinā vuttameva hi dutiyavesārajjaṃ ‘‘kilesehi ārakattā’’tiādinā vutto ‘‘araha’’nti padassa atthoti . Tato ca viññāyati ‘‘yathā dutiyena vesārajjena purimasiddhi, evaṃ purimenapi atthena dutiyavesārajjasiddhī’’ti. Evañca katvā iminā nayena catuvesārajjavasena padattayavacane payojanadassanaṃ upapannaṃ hoti. Itarathā hi kiñcipayojanābhāvato idaṃyeva vacanaṃ idha avattabbaṃ siyāti. Esa nayo sesesupi.
用第一无畏,就是按照前面所说的方式,以第一无畏——也就是由“你自称正自觉者,却说‘这些法你并未觉悟’,对此……我安住”这段所阐明的那种无畏。第二成就,就是第二个词“正自觉者”的义理成就,也就是佛性成就,因为那个无畏本身就是这个意思。第三和第四,就是按照同样的方式,以第三和第四无畏——也就是由“凡是你所说的那些障碍法,对受用它们的人来说根本不足以构成障碍,对此……我安住”以及“凡是为了这个目的而为你说的法,对如实修行的人来说并不能导向彻底灭苦,对此……我安住”(《增支部》4.8;《中部》1.150)所阐明的那些无畏。第三成就,就是第三个词“揭开覆盖者”的义理成就,也就是揭开覆盖这个意义的成就,因为靠这些无畏,那个意义就变得明显了——这就是它的意思。正如论师所说:“通过如实指出障碍法和出离法,导师在世间就显现出揭开覆盖的性质。”(《长部注》1.258)正因为以揭开覆盖的性质,障碍法和出离法的教说才得以成立,所以说“以第三无畏成就第三和第四”也是合理的。巴利
Paṭhamenāti vuttanayena paṭhamabhūtena ‘‘sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ‘ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’ti, tatra…pe… viharāmī’’ti paridīpitena vesārajjena. Dutiyasiddhīti dutiyassa ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti padassa atthasiddhi buddhattasiddhi tassa tadatthabhāvato. Tatiyacatutthehīti vuttanayeneva tatiyacatutthabhūtehi ‘‘ye kho pana te antarāyikā dhammā vuttā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyāti, tatra…pe… viharāmī’’ti ca ‘‘yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desito, so na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti, tatra…pe… viharāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.8; ma. ni. 1.150) ca paridīpitehi vesārajjehi. Tatiyasiddhīti tatiyassa ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti padassa atthasiddhi vivaṭṭacchadatthasiddhi tehi tassa pākaṭabhāvatoti attho. ‘‘Yāthāvato antarāyikaniyyānikadhammāpadesena hi satthu vivaṭṭacchadabhāvo loke pākaṭo ahosī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) ācariyena vuttaṃ, vivaṭṭacchadabhāveneva antarāyikaniyyānikadhammadesanāsiddhito ‘‘tatiyena tatiyacatutthasiddhī’’tipi vattuṃ yujjati.
像这样,在以三个词来表达时,先依四无畏说明其用意,现在再依三眼来显示,所以说“前一个……”等。这里“而”字是用来引出的。前一个词“应供”,成就了世尊下三分道果智所摄的法眼,因为它显示了烦恼之敌和轮回之轮辐已被摧毁。第二个词“正自觉者”,成就了意乐、随眠、根器上下智所摄的佛眼,因为只有正自觉者才有这种智。这两种智,声闻和独觉都没有。第三个词“揭开覆盖者”,成就了一切知智所摄的一切眼,因为它显示了连同习气在内的一切烦恼的断除。其实,说了“正自觉者”之后再说“揭开覆盖者”,正是为了说明正自觉者所必需的、连同习气在内的一切烦恼的断除。“我确实是,亲爱的庵婆咤,诸咒的授予者”这是次要的,“你是诸咒的领受者”才是主要的激励之语,因此说“以‘你是诸咒的领受者’这句话,在他心中生起对诸咒的勇健性”,意思就是生起名为“对诸相显现而明净的智性”的勇健性。巴利
Evaṃ padattayavacane catuvesārajjavasena payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni cakkhuttayavasenapi dassento ‘‘purimañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ca-saddo upanyāsattho. Purimaṃ ‘‘araha’’nti padaṃ bhagavato heṭṭhimamaggaphalattayañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ sādheti kilesārīnaṃ, saṃsāracakkassa arānañca hatabhāvadīpanato. Dutiyaṃ ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti padaṃ āsayānusayaindriyaparopariyattañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ buddhacakkhuṃ sādheti sammāsambuddhasseva taṃsambhavato. Tadetañhi ñāṇadvayaṃ sāvakapaccekabuddhānaṃ na sambhavati. Tatiyaṃ ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti padaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ samantacakkhuṃ sādheti savāsanasabbakilesappahānadīpanato. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho’’ti hi vatvā ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti vacanaṃ sammāsambuddhabhāvāya savāsanasabbakilesappahānaṃ vibhāvetīti. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho pana tāta ambaṭṭha mantānaṃ dātā’’ti idaṃ appadhānaṃ, ‘‘tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetā’’ti idameva padhānaṃ samuttejanāvacananti sandhāya ‘‘tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetāti iminā’ssa mantesu sūrabhāvaṃ janetī’’ti vuttaṃ, lakkhaṇavibhāvane visadañāṇatāsaṅkhātaṃ sūrabhāvaṃ janetīti attho.
259 “如是,尊者”这里,“如是”这个词是表示接受对方话语的虚词。这里接受话语,就是接受沸伽罗娑罗说出的那番话:“我们将会这样了知那位乔达摩尊者,你是诸咒的领受者。”因为“其义……”等文句也正是在显示这个意思。同样,文中说“婆罗门沸伽罗娑罗应诺后”,他之所以这样说,是因为他以对诸相毫无迷惑的明净状态,见到了佛陀的咒语,由于老师的激励;为了显示这一点,所以说了“他也……”等话。其中,老师解释说:“‘以此’就是以此前所说的那种激励。”(《长部注》1.259)不过现在书本中看到的文本是“以此老师之语”。从意义上说,这并不矛盾。因为在诸咒中能生起正念的言说,就是激励。巴利
259.Evaṃbhoti ettha evaṃ-saddo vacanasampaṭicchane nipāto, vacanasampaṭicchanañcettha tathā mayaṃ taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ vedissāma, tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetāti ca evaṃ pavattassa pokkharasātino vacanassa sampaṭiggaho. ‘‘Tassattho’’tiādināpi hi tadevatthaṃ dasseti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa paṭissutvā’’ti, taṃ panesa ācariyassa samuttejanāya lakkhaṇesu vigatasammohabhāvena buddhamante sampassamānattā vadatīti dassento ‘‘sopī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘tāyāti tāya yathāvuttāya samuttejanāyā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.259) ācariyena vuttaṃ, adhunā pana potthakesu ‘‘tāya ācariyakathāyā’’ti pāṭho dissati. Atthato cesa aviruddhoyeva. Mantesu satisamuppādikā hi kathā samuttejanāti.
所谓“非车行处”,就是车走不了的地方,也就是车辆无法到达之处,意思是走到门楼附近。巴利
Ayānabhūminti yānassa abhūmiṃ, yānena yātumasakkuṇeyyaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, dvārakoṭṭhakasamīpaṃ gantvāti attho.
即使是笼统说出的那句话,它的意思也要依据注释书的标准来具体把握,所以(注释书)说“在正午时分”。先按所有比丘的日常惯例讲了第一种说法,再按专修头陀行者的特有惯例讲了第二种说法。“日间专修者”就是白天致力于专修的人,意思是他们在白天为了履行沙门之法而这样经行。因此说“因为那样的……”等。“从一座精舍走到另一座精舍会变成闲扯,我要先问过再进去”——为了说明安巴塔这样前往的意图,而说“据说他……”等。巴利
Avisesena vuttassapi vacanassa attho aṭṭhakathāpamāṇato visesena gahetabboti āha ‘‘ṭhitamajjhanhikasamaye’’ti. Sabbesamāciṇṇavasena paṭhamanayaṃ vatvā padhānikānameva āveṇikāciṇṇavasena dutiyanayo vutto. Divāpadhānikāti divāpadhānānuyuñjanakā, divasabhāge samaṇadhammakaraṇatthaṃ te evaṃ caṅkamantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘tādisānañhī’’tiādi. ‘‘Pariveṇato pariveṇamāgacchanto papañco hoti, pucchitvāva pavisissāmī’’ti ambaṭṭhassa tadupasaṅkamanādhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘so kirā’’tiādimāha.
260 260. 生在有名望的家族,就是有名望的家族出身。虽然按照后面要说的方式,从前安巴塔家族并不出名,但那时已经出名了,所以他说“据说那时……”等等。以容色、出身、财富、家族这四种作为“他是这样一个人”这种指称的依据——也就是以这四种有名望的容色、出身、财富、家族。为了说明那些比丘心里想的是什么,说了“因为凡是……”等等。用“指香室而言”这一句,表明即使是笼统说出来的话,也是针对具体可理解的含义而说的。在这些类似的情形中也是如此。巴利
260. Abhiññātakule jāto abhiññātakolañño. Kāmañca vakkhamānanayena pubbe ambaṭṭhakulamapaññātaṃ, tadā pana paññātanti āha ‘‘tadā kirā’’tiādi. Rūpajātimantakulāpadesehīti ‘‘ayamīdiso’’ti apadisanahetubhūtehi catūhi rūpajātimantakulehi. Yena te bhikkhū cintayiṃsu, tadadhippāyaṃ āvi kātuṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Avisesato vuttampi visesato viññāyamānatthaṃ sandhāya bhāsitavacananti dasseti ‘‘gandhakuṭiṃ sandhāyā’’ti iminā. Evamīdisesu.
“不匆忙”就是不急躁。也有写成“aturanto”的版本,意思一样。那么,怎样算是慢慢地进去呢?所以接着说“缓缓地”等等。其中,“一步大小的地方”是指两步之间大约一拃宽的位置。“辛杜瓦罗”是一种会开花的树,开白色的花,也叫“尼衮迪”。“面前”是指香室房间的门口。为了说明“在钥匙孔附近”这句话,所以说了“据说门……”等等。巴利
Aturitoti avegāyanto, ‘‘aturanto’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Kathaṃ pavisanto ataramāno pavisati nāmāti āha ‘‘saṇika’’ntiādi. Tattha padappamāṇaṭṭhāneti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanapamāṇaṭṭhāne. Sinduvāro nāma eko pupphūpagarukkho, yassa setaṃ pupphaṃ hoti, yo ‘‘nigguṇḍī’’ tipi vuccati. Pamukhanti gandhakuṭigabbhapamukhaṃ. ‘‘Kuñcikacchiddasamīpe’’ti vuttavacanaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘dvāraṃ kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
261 “当他们布施时”这句话,是在说明:凭借波罗蜜的威力,门自己就打开了。巴利
261.‘‘Dānaṃ dadamānehī’’ti iminā pāramitānubhāvena sayameva dvāravivaraṇaṃ dasseti.
世尊与那些青年互相问候,这里要说明的是:通过带有“完全”含义的“sam”这个词所表达的、世尊与他们之间最初生起的喜悦,这是一种需要引申理解的含义,所以经文接着说“如同……”等。因为世尊也是先开口问那些青年“贤者们,还受得了吗?还能维持吗?”等等,因此他跟他们之间最先就产生了喜悦。“同时生起的喜悦”是指随着世尊的举动而一同生起的互相问候。为了连同比喻一起说明这个意思,经文说“犹如冷水……”等。其中应当看到:世尊因为烦恼和热恼已彻底止息,所以像冷水;那些青年因为烦恼和热恼尚未止息,所以像热水。“sammoditaṃ”就是互相融合。这里“muda”这个词只取“互相融合”的意思,不取“喜悦”的意思,因为只有这样,前面所说的比喻才能成立。正如经文所说“成为一体”,意思是问候行为中的平等、同一。巴利
Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodiṃsūti ettha samatthena saṃ-saddena viññāyamānaṃ bhagavato tehi saddhiṃ paṭhamaṃ pavattamodatāsaṅkhātaṃ neyyatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā’’tiādimāha. Bhagavāpi hi ‘‘kacci bho māṇavā khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādīni pucchanto tehi māṇavehi saddhiṃ pubbabhāsitāya paṭhamaññeva pavattamodo ahosi. Samappavattamodāti bhagavato tadanukaraṇena samaṃ pavattasaṃsandanā. Tadatthaṃ saha upamāya dassetuṃ ‘‘sītodakaṃ viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paramanibbutakilesadarathatāya bhagavato sītodakasadisatā, anibbutakilesadarathatāya ca māṇavānaṃ uṇhodakasadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Sammoditanti saṃsanditaṃ. Mudasaddo hettha saṃsandaneyeva, na pāmojje, evañhi yathāvuttaupamāvacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘ekībhāva’’nti, sammodanakiriyāya samānataṃ ekarūpatanti attho.
“能忍吗”是在问:这个四轮九门的身体机器,因为本性多苦,本来就难以忍受,到底还能不能忍得下去?“能维持吗”是在问:这个依靠食物等条件才能维持、被称为长久延续的生命,到底还能不能维持下去?因为可能没有头痛等疾病,所以问“是否少病”;因为可能没有困苦的生活,所以问“是否少恼”;因为在做各种事情时起身轻松,所以问“是否轻快起身”;因为具有与身体相应的力气,所以问“是否有力”;因为可能有安稳快乐的果报,所以问“是否有安稳快乐”。所有这些地方都要加上“是否”来理解。
“得力的喜”就是喜本身。“年轻的喜”是欢悦。“能产生互相问候”就是能作问候,也就是sammodanikaṃ,这个词又作sammodaniyaṃ,是把ka变成ya。通过“因为适合问候”这句话,表明“因为值得被问候,所以叫sammodanīyaṃ”这个意思。这是诸位老师说的。还应当看到,这也显示了另一层意思:“值得问候的是sammodanikaṃ,按照前面说的方式,也就是sammodaniyaṃ。”
“令忆念”这个词的意思是“持续不断地进行”。“应当被忆念”是因为应当被随念。在“值得令忆念”这个意思上,按照词形,把长音加进去说成“sāraṇīya”。而在“应当被忆念”这个意思上,本来应该说“saraṇīya”,但把元音拉长后说成“sāraṇīya”,应当这样理解。
这样从词句上说明了含义之后,现在为了从意义上说明,说了“因为听起来快乐”等话。其中,“因为听起来快乐”是说听起来悦耳动听;“因为回忆起来快乐”是说反复回味时令人愉悦。“因为言辞清净”是说由于符合事物的自然表达,那段话具有语言上的善巧;“因为意义清净”是说意义没有杂染。“以多种方式”是以多种原因。巴利
Khamanīyanti ‘‘catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ dukkhabahulatāya sabhāvato dussahaṃ kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti pucchanti, yāpanīyanti āhārādipaccayapaṭibaddhavuttikaṃ cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya kacci yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ, sīsarogādiābādhābhāvena kacci appābādhaṃ, dukkhajīvikābhāvena kacci appātaṅkaṃ, taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇe uṭṭhānasukhatāya kacci lahuṭṭhānaṃ, tadanurūpabalayogato kacci balaṃ, sukhavihāraphalasabbhāvena kacciphāsuvihāro atthīti sabbattha kacci-saddaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo. Balappattā pīti pītiyeva. Taruṇā pīti pāmojjaṃ. Sammodanaṃ janeti karotīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodaniyaṃ ka-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā. Sammodetabbato sammodanīyanti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato’’ti iminā. Evaṃ ācariyehi vuttaṃ. Sammodituṃ arahatīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodaniyaṃ yathāvuttanayenāti imamatthampi dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Sāretu’’nti etassa ‘‘nirantaraṃ pavattetu’’nti atthavacanaṃ. Saritabbabhāvatoti anussaritabbabhāvato. ‘‘Sāretuṃ arahatī’’ti atthe yathāpadaṃ dīghena ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saritabba’’nti atthe pana ‘‘saraṇīya’’nti vattabbe dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ saddato atthaṃ dassetvā idāni atthamattato dassetuṃ ‘‘suyyamānasukhato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suyyamānasukhatoti āpāthamadhurattamāha, anussariyamānasukhatoti vimaddaramaṇīyattaṃ. Byañjanaparisuddhatāyāti sabhāvaniruttibhāvena tassā kathāya vacanacāturiyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāyāti atthassa nirupakkilesattaṃ. Anekehi pariyāyehīti anekehi kāraṇehi.
“我要贬低他”,意思是我要让他难堪。“搭在双肩上挂着脖子”,是指把布搭在两肩、垂挂在脖子上,所以说“挂在脖子上”。“抓住衣角”,是指用一只手抓住身上所穿下衣的边角。“登上经行处”,是指登上经行处去经行,所以说“登上经行处”。“界平衡”,是指味等诸界处于平衡状态,也就是没有病。“为了让人生起净信”,这句和“在所到之处”相连。也有写成“因为令人净信”的,意思是:因为肢节能让人生起净信,所以和“生起广大尊敬”相连。“讥嫌之谈”,是指应当被人嘲笑的那种话。“以无行仪的状态而应被忆念”是它的修饰语,意思是:因为无行仪的状态而应被忆念,也就是应当被记起为“这实在没有行仪啊”。巴利
Apasādessāmīti maṅkuṃ karissāmi. Ubhosu khandhesu sāṭakaṃ āsajjetvā kaṇṭhe olambanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kaṇṭhe olambitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dussakaṇṇaṃ gahetvāti nivatthasāṭakassa koṭiṃ ekena hatthena gahetvā. Caṅkamitumāruhanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘caṅkamaṃ abhiruhitvā’’ti āha. Dhātusamatāti rasādidhātūnaṃ samāvatthatā, arogatāti attho. Pāsādikatthanti pasādajananatthaṃ ‘‘gatagataṭṭhāne’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Pāsādikattā’’tipi pāṭho, tassattho – aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ pasādāvahattāti, ‘‘uppannabahumānā’’ti iminā sambandho. Uppaṇḍanakathanti avahasitabbatāyuttakathaṃ. ‘‘Anācārabhāvasāraṇīya’’nti tassa visesanaṃ, anācārabhāvena sāraṇīyaṃ ‘‘anācāro vatāya’’nti saritabbakanti attho.
262 262. 为了说明“他着手去做这件难以做到、根本不可能做到的事”,所以说了“就像想要抓住有顶天”等话。因为即使连同诸天在内的整个世界,也无法做到这件事,那就是贬抑世尊。因此说“他在不可能的地方白费力气”。“来吧,我要和他谈谈”——这个愚人虽然在不可能的地方白费力气,但如果我什么都不说,他就会更加傲慢,心想“他什么也说不出来,甚至不敢再跟我多谈”;可一旦我说了,在交谈过程中,当他的出身和种姓被点明时,他的傲慢就会被压下去。所以,“来吧,我要和他谈谈”是世尊对青年安拔陀说这话的意思。通过教导行为举止和正当行仪而成为老师,而那些老师中更杰出的老师就是“老师的老师”,就像“曾祖父”一样。为了说明这个意思,所以说了“由老师们以及他们的老师们”。巴利
262. Kātuṃ dukkaramasakkuṇeyyaṃ kiccamayaṃ ārabhīti dassetuṃ ‘‘bhavaggaṃ gahetukāmo viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asakkuṇeyyañhetaṃ sadevakenapi lokena, yadidaṃ bhagavato apasādanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhāne vāyamatī’’ti. Handa tena saddhiṃ mantemīti evaṃ aṭṭhāne vāyamantopi ayaṃ bālo ‘‘mayi kiñci akathente mayā saddhiṃ uttari kathetumpi na visahatī’’ti mānameva paggaṇhissati, kathente pana kathāpasaṅgenassa jātigotte vibhāvite mānaniggaho bhavissati, ‘‘handa tena saddhiṃ mantemī’’ti bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ etadavocāti attho. Ācārasamācārasikkhāpanena ācariyā, tesaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ pakaṭṭhā ācariyāti pācariyā yathā ‘‘papitāmaho’’ti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ācariyehi ca tesaṃ ācariyehi cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
第一伊跋说释巴利
Paṭhamaibbhavādavaṇṇanā
263 263. 虽然“或躺着”这样的话本来不该说,但为了显示他是以傲慢之心在争辩对抗,所以说了“诚然,在三者中”等话。其中,“在三者中”指的是站立、行走、坐着这三种姿势。因为只有在这些姿势中,才适合与老师交谈;而躺着时则不行,因为对于应当尊敬的人,即使他们躺着,也不该在他们面前以躺卧的姿势来行礼。“谈话应对”是指以交谈的方式来进行对抗性的对话。因为和躺着的老师一起躺着说话,这确实不合规矩;不过这里把那种情况和其他情况等同起来,称之为“谈话应对”。巴利
263. Kiñcāpi ‘‘sayāno vā’’tiādivacanaṃ na vattabbaṃ, mānavasena pana yugaggāhaṃ karonto vadatīti dassento ‘‘kāmaṃ tīsū’’tiādimāha. Tattha tīsu iriyāpathesūti ṭhānagamananisajjāsu. Tesveva hi ācariyena saddhiṃ sallapitumarahati, na tu sayane garukaraṇīyānaṃ sayānānampi sammukhā garukārehi sayanassa akattabbabhāvato. Kathāsallāpanti kathāvasena yugaggāhakaraṇatthaṃ sallapanaṃ. Sayānena hi ācariyena saddhiṃ sayānassa kathā nāma ācāro na hoti, tathāpetaṃ itarehi sadisaṃ katvā kathanaṃ idha kathāsallāpo.
至于“乔达摩贤者啊,一个躺着的婆罗门,难道适合跟一个躺着的婆罗门交谈吗”这句话,是导师跟安拔陀谈话时,为了说明这种交谈不合威仪而说的。这段话虽然没有按经文形式收进结集,但靠着没有过失的师承,一直传到今天。为了指出它跟后面经文“乔达摩贤者啊,那些人……”之间的关联,所以说了“据说从那时起”等话。
“牛形”是因为“牛”这个字是就形态来说的,而“形”这个字也是表示那种状态。如果他不是出于轻蔑,就会说“秃头的沙门”;但因为是轻蔑,就用带有责备意味的“ka”音把词拉长,说成“秃头家伙们,沙门家伙们”。为了说明这一点,所以说了“对秃头,说秃头”等话。
“伊巴”是指居士,这只是就含义来说。从词形上看,“伊巴”的用法是省略了后半部分而成为“伊巴”,那些够得上“伊巴”这个称呼的,重叠一次就成了“伊巴们”。这话是什么意思呢?就像因为行走姿态优美而被称为“伊巴”的象乘,是随别人的意愿行动的,不能自主;同样,这些伺候婆罗门的首陀罗,也是随别人的意愿行动,不能自主,所以因为跟“伊巴”有相似的用法,就称为“伊巴们”。不过他们因为拥有家产,所以是住在家里的家主,为了说明这层意思,就用“居士们”这个说法。巴利
Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘sayāno vā hi bho gotama brāhmaṇo sayānena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ sallapitumarahatī’’ti vuttassa sallāpassa anācārabhāvavibhāvanaṃ satthārā ambaṭṭhena saddhiṃ kathentena kataṃ, taṃ pāḷivasena saṅgītimanāruḷhampi agarahitāya ācariyaparamparāya yāvajjatanā samābhatanti ‘‘ye ca kho te bho gotamā’’tiādikāya uparipāḷiyā sambandhabhāvena dassento ‘‘tato kirā’’tiādimāha. Gorūpanti go nūna rūpakavasena vuttattā, rūpasaddassa ca tabbhāvavuttito. Yadi ahīḷento bhaveyya, ‘‘muṇḍā samaṇā’’ti vadeyya, hīḷento pana garahatthena ka-saddena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘muṇḍakā samaṇakā’’ti vadatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘muṇḍe muṇḍā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ibbhāti gahapatikāti atthamattavacanaṃ, saddato pana ibhassa payogo ibho uttarapadalopena, taṃ ibhaṃ arahantīti ibbhā dvittaṃ katvā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā sobhanaṃ gamanato ibhasaṅkhāto hatthivāhanabhūto parassa vasena pavattati, na attano, evametepi brāhmaṇānaṃ sussūsakā suddā parassa vasena pavattanti, na attano, tasmā ibhasadisapayogatāya ibbhāti. Te pana kuṭumbikatāya gharavāsino gharasāmikā hontīti atthamattaṃ dasseti ‘‘gahapatikā’’ti iminā.
“黑色的”是指生来就是黑色种姓的人。他的意思是:只有再生族才是纯正种姓,其他人不是。因此说“黑皮肤的”。因为祖父的身份而有亲属关系,所以叫“亲属”。因此说“他们称为祖父”。“子孙”指儿子们。“从口出生”是说婆罗门的祖先是从梵天之口出生的,这是他们最初的起源,这就是他的意图。其余的词句也是同样的道理。不过这里有一个特别之处:先说了“伊巴们是黑色的”,接着又说“亲属脚生的子孙”,是为了表明:从家族来看,沙门属于吠舍家族;但从最初起源来看,他们是从梵天的脚背出生的,不像普通吠舍那样从肚脐出生。然而,比起“从口出生”等说法,他这句话实在是极其未经审察的说法,因为沙门身份只可能存在于四种种姓之中。“不限定”就是不加以区分,意思是没有差别地。巴利
Kaṇhāti kaṇhajātikā. Dvijā eva hi suddhajātikā, na itareti tassādhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘kāḷakā’’ti. Pitāmahabhāvena ñātibandhavattā bandhu. Tenāha ‘‘pitāmahoti voharantī’’ti. Apaccāti puttā. Mukhato nikkhantāti brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbapurisā brahmuno mukhato nikkhantā, ayaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamuppattīti adhippāyo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha viseso – ‘‘ibbhā kaṇhā’’ti vatvā ‘‘bandhupādāpaccā’’ti vadanto kulavasena samaṇā vessakulapariyāpannā, paṭhamuppattivasena pana brahmuno piṭṭhipādato nikkhantā, na pakativessā viya nābhitoti dassetīti, idaṃ panassa ‘‘mukhato nikkhantā’’tiādivacanatopi ativiya asamavekkhitapubbavacanaṃ catuvaṇṇapariyāpannasseva samaṇabhāvasambhavato. Aniyametvāti avisesetvā, anuddesikabhāvenāti attho.
他依靠傲慢来说话,意思是:以傲慢为依托,抬高自己、贬低别人,说出“秃头沙门”这类话。“我要让他知道”,意思是我要通过如实揭示自己种姓的分量,让他明白。“目的”,指的是利益,或者所希求的事,而那正是应当做的事,所以说“来了以后应当做的事,就叫作目的”。他有这个目的,所以是“有目的者”,就像“有杖者”一样。第二个词也是指人,因为表示“他具有这个”的后缀确实存在,所以通过第一个词就能知道,那是以此为所缘的心。因此说“那个青年的心”。他有目的,所以是“有目的者”,就像“有德者”一样。巴利
Mānameva nissāya kathesīti mānamevāpassayaṃ katvā attānaṃ ukkaṃsento, pare ca vambhento ‘‘muṇḍakā samaṇakā’’tiādivacanaṃ kathesi. Jānāpessāmīti attano gottapamāṇaṃ yāthāvato vibhāvanena viññāpessāmi. Atthoti hitaṃ, icchitavatthu vā, taṃ pana kattabbakiccamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘āgantvā kattabbakiccasaṅkhāto attho’’ti, so etassa atthīti atthikaṃ yathā ‘‘daṇḍiko’’ti. Dutiyassapi puggalavācakassa tadassatthipaccayassa vijjamānattā paṭhamena tadārammaṇikacittameva viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tassa māṇavassa citta’’nti. Atthikamassa atthīti atthikavā yathā ‘‘guṇavā’’ti.
“正是为了那个目的”这句话,是通过“正是为了那个意义”来表明:它是就词性颠倒而说的。因此他说:“‘就是那个意义’——这是纯粹按阳性词性来说的。”因为在那里,是通过显示原本的词性,来成立此处并非原本的词性。不过,这里还有一种不同于义注的理解方式:“为了那个目的”,是纯粹按阳性词性来表达与格,即“为了那个被称为应做之事的目的”。所谓“她的”,是指“展示给安巴特哈的”,这是前后关联。所谓“来到其他人面前的”,是指来到值得尊敬之人面前的、具足善行的人。所谓“实行”,是指他们所遵行的做法。单从上下文就能知道“在老师家中”的意思,而“未住满者”和“未受训练的状态”,只是随顺世俗说法而说的,就像“他以三衣覆盖了衣的布施”那样。因此他说:“在老师家中未住满者、未受训练者。”正因为未受训练,所以是少闻者;接着为了与“自认为已住满者”这句话相呼应,表明“虽是未完成学业者”是剩余的文句,所以通过“虽是少闻者”来显示。因为所谓多闻,只应为了寂静而希求;由于缺乏这一点,这位安巴特哈就被理解为未住满者、未受训练者、少闻者。这样从义理推论来阐明理由,他说:“除了未住满之外还有什么?”又以“因为对于他”等语来说明这一关联。然而,从字面来看,这是通过粗恶语的现行来显示非寂静的原因。其中,这个连接是这样的:“除了未住满之外还有什么?”——这是对于这位安巴特哈的粗恶语现行之原因的理由。也有“通过粗恶语的现行”这样的文本,那样的话,意思就是:依现行而说的理由。他们也这样连接:除了未住满的状态之外,将未住满的状态搁置一边,对于他这样粗恶语的现行,还有什么别的理由呢?在这里,前面的连接方式更为妥当,因为应按照文本进行连接。“除了”是由于虚词的连接关系,“未住满”是依业格意义的从格表达。同一个理由,他以“在老师家中”等语来证明。巴利
‘‘Yāyeva kho panatthāyā’’ti liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttanti dasseti ‘‘yeneva kho panatthenā’’ti iminā. Tenevāha ‘‘tameva atthanti idaṃ purisaliṅgavaseneva vutta’’nti. Tattha hi sābhāvikaliṅgatādassanena idha asābhāvikaliṅgatāsiddhīti. Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – yāya atthāyāti pulliṅgavaseneva tadatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, yassa kattabbakiccasaṅkhātassa atthassa atthāyāti atthoti. Assāti ambaṭṭhassa dassetvāti sambandho. Aññesaṃ santikaṃ āgatānanti garuṭṭhāniyānaṃ santikamupagatānaṃ sādhurūpānaṃ. Vattanti tesaṃ samāciṇṇaṃ. Pakaraṇatoyeva ‘‘ācariyakule’’ti attho viññāyati, ‘‘avusitavā’’ti ca asikkhitabhāvoyeva vohāravasena vutto yathā taṃ cīvaradānaṃ ticīvarena acchādesīti. Tenāha ‘‘ācariyakule avusitavā asikkhito’’ti. Asikkhitattā eva appassuto, ‘‘vusitamānī’’ti ca padāpekkhāya apariyositavacanattā samānoti pāṭhasesoti dasseti ‘‘appassutova samāno’’ti iminā. Bāhusaccañhi nāma yāvadeva upasamatthaṃ icchitabbaṃ, tadabhāvato panāyaṃ ambaṭṭho avusitavā asikkhito appassutoti viññāyatīti evampi atthāpattito kāraṇaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘kimaññatra avusitattā’’ti. Imampi sambandhaṃ dīpeti ‘‘etassa hī’’tiādinā. Yathārutato pana pharusavacanasamudācārena anupasamakāraṇadassanametaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘kimaññatra avusitattā’’ti idaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassa ambaṭṭhassa pharusavacanasamudācāre kāraṇanti. ‘‘Pharusavacanasamudācārenā’’tipi pāṭho, tathā samudācāravasena vuttaṃ kāraṇanti attho. Evampi yojenti – avusitattā avusitabhāvaṃ aññatra ṭhapetvā etassa evaṃ pharusavacanasamudācāre kāraṇaṃ kimaññaṃ atthīti. Purimayojanāvettha yuttatarā yathāpāṭhaṃ yojetabbato. ‘‘Aññatrā’’ti nipātayogato avusitattāti upayogatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. Tadeva kāraṇaṃ samattheti ‘‘ācariyakule’’tiādinā.
264 264. 因为心跟随被称为“忿怒”的他人,所以不能自主。“为了摧破慢”,意思是为了摧破慢、粉碎慢,或者为了没有慢,也就是为了远离慢和醉。“吐出过失”,是指通过喝下润泽之物,让被滋润的风、胆、痰这三种过失上涌而吐出。“以姓氏对姓氏”,是指被安巴特哈自己向世尊问起、说出的那个有过失的旧姓氏,来对治如今被称为无过失的姓氏。“以家族称呼对家族称呼”,这里也是同样的道理。“使之起来”,是指从有过失的状态中让它站起来,也就是拔出来。在这里,姓氏要依据始祖来理解,而家族称呼则要依据其传承中出现的著名人物来理解,比如“阿提车是摩伽婆”。因为释迦族的阿提车族姓,是以一位名叫阿提底的天女之子为始祖,人们也称他为“乔达摩族姓”。正如《出家经》中所说:巴利
264. Kodhasaṅkhātassa parassa vasānugatacittatāya asakamano. Mānanimmadanatthanti mānassa nimmadanatthaṃ abhimaddanatthaṃ, amadanatthaṃ vā, mānamadavirahatthanti attho. Dosaṃ uggiletvāti sinehapānena kilinnaṃ vātapittasemhadosaṃ ubbamanaṃ katvā. Gottena gottanti ambaṭṭheneva bhagavatā puṭṭhena vuttena sāvajjena purātanagottena adhunā anavajjasaññitaṃ gottaṃ. Kulāpadesena kulāpadesanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Uṭṭhāpetvāti sāvajjato uṭṭhahanaṃ katvā, uddharitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gottañcettha ādipurisavasena, kulāpadeso pana tadanvaye uppannābhiññātapurisavasena gahetabbo yathā ‘‘ādicco māghavo’’ti. Sākiyānañhi ādiccagottaṃ aditiyā nāma devadhītāya puttabhūtaṃ ādipurisaṃ pati hoti, taṃ ‘‘gotamagotta’’ntipi vadanti. Yathāha pabbajjāsutte –
从姓氏来说,叫阿迭恰;从出身来说,叫释迦族。
我从那个家族出家,并不是在贪求各种欲乐。巴利
‘‘Ādiccā nāma gottena, sākiyā nāma jātiyā; Tamhā kulā pabbajitomhi, na kāme abhipatthaya’’nti. (su. ni. 425);
不过,摩伽婆族在那个传承中,是针对一位著名的马卡拉村人而言的。因为安拔陀自身族姓起源的可受责性,这表明它不能作为傲慢的依据,所以说“我要从根上砍断傲慢之旗,把它放倒”。所谓“撞击”,就是拿出生和族姓来轻蔑对方。所谓“轻蔑”,就是轻视、责备。“乔达摩尊者!释迦族是凶暴的”等等——当有人把凶暴等过失加到释迦族头上时,沙门乔达摩也就同样被加上了罪过,这就是那句话的用意。巴利
Māghavakulaṃ pana tadanvaye abhiññātaṃ macalagāmikapurisaṃ pati hotīti. Gottamūlassa gārayhatāya amānavatthubhāvapavedanato ‘‘mānaddhajaṃ mūle chetvā nipātessāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ghaṭṭentoti jātigottavasena omasanto. Hīḷentoti hīḷanaṃ garahaṃ karonto. ‘‘Caṇḍā bho gotama sakyajātī’’tiādinā sākiyesu caṇḍabhāvādidosaṃ pāpitesu samaṇopi gotamo pāpito bhavissatīti adhippāyo.
当慢随眠和忿怒随眠互相助长时,那个人就被称为“凶暴者”。为了说明这一点,论师用“与依止慢的忿怒相应”这句话来表示。这里所说的“依止”,是从自然亲依止和所缘的角度来说的,不是从俱生等角度来说的。“粗硬”是指心和言语都粗硬。“轻率”是指年轻、行为不成熟,所以他说“以很少的……”等等。“葫芦碗”是指葫芦果那层打不破的硬壳。为了展示注释书之外的另一种说法,论师说:“有些人说‘bhassā’是鲁莽的意思,另一些人说是好斗的意思。”(《长部注疏》1.264)“虽是”就是“成为、存在”的意思,这是依据“as”这个词根的含义,所以他说“‘santā’正是前一个词的同义词”。“不尊重”就是不做恭敬之事,用“不尊重婆罗门”等话正是要表达这个意思。“恭敬的行为”是指合掌礼拜的行为。在后一句“那些释迦族”中,关系代词“ya”的所指并不确定,而在前一句“乔达摩尊者啊,那件事”中,用指示代词“ta”加以限定,这一点应当知道,所以他说“那些释迦族”等等。“不随顺”是指与自己的出身不相称。巴利
Yasmiṃ mānussayakodhussayā aññamaññūpatthaddhā, so ‘‘caṇḍo’’ti vuccatīti dasseti ‘‘mānanissitakodhayuttā’’ti iminā, pakatūpanissayārammaṇavasena cettha nissitabhāvo, na sahajātādivasena. Kharāti cittena, vācāya ca kakkhaḷā. Lahukāti taruṇā avuddhakammā. Tenāha ‘‘appakenevā’’tiādi. Alābukaṭāhanti lābuphalassa abhejjakapālaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāmuttakanayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhassāti sāhasikāti keci vadanti, sārambhakāti apare’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.264) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Samānāti hontā bhavamānāti asasaddavasenatthoti āha ‘‘santāti purimapadasseva vevacana’’nti. Na sakkarontīti sakkāraṃ na karontīti atthameva viññāpeti ‘‘na brāhmaṇāna’’ntiādinā. Apacitikammanti paṇipātakammaṃ. ‘‘Yadime sakyā’’ti pacchimavākye ya-saddassa kiriyāparāmasanassa aniyamassa ‘‘tayidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti purimavākye ta-saddena niyamanaṃ veditabbanti āha ‘‘yaṃ ime sakyā’’tiādi. Nānulomanti attano jātiyā na anucchavikaṃ.
第二“仆役之说”的注释巴利
Dutiyaibbhavādavaṇṇanā
265 265. “议事堂”这个词的解释,前面已经说过了。那时,也是针对许多已经灌顶的释迦王,才说“已灌顶的释迦王们”。因为在释迦王族里,确实是所有族人中最年长又有能力的那一位才获得灌顶。不过,有些人虽然已经灌顶,却想:“这王位实在事务繁多、牵扯太多”,于是对王位心生厌离,把它交给年纪仅次于自己的人;有时那个人又把它交给另一个人。这样辗转交付下来,那时就有许多曾经灌顶过的释迦王——这是论师所认可的看法(《长部注疏》1.265)。另外,也可以说,这是根据场合,针对处在不同位置上的许多已灌顶释迦王而这样说的,这也说得通。因为他们都被称为“王”。正如他所说:巴利
265. Sandhāgārapadanibbacanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tadā abhisittasakyarājūnampi bahutaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘abhisittasakyarājāno’’ti. Kāmañhi sakyarājakule yo sabbesaṃ vuddhataro, samattho ca, so eva abhisekaṃ labhati . Ekacco pana abhisitto samāno ‘‘idaṃ rajjaṃ nāma bahukiccaṃ bahubyāpāra’’nti tato nibbijja rajjaṃ vayasā anantarassa niyyāteti, kadāci sopi aññassāti evaṃ paramparāniyyātanavasena tadā bahū abhisittapubbā sakyarājāno hontīti idaṃ ācariyassābhimataṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.265). Apica yathārahaṃ ṭhānantaresu abhisittasakyarājūnampi bahutaṃ sandhāya evamāhātipi yujjati. Te hi ‘‘rājāno’’ti vuccanti. Yathāha –
所谓王,就是大地之王、地方之王、领主、中域主、判官、大臣,以及那些执行裁决和分割事务并进行统治的人,这些人就叫做王。巴利
‘‘Rājāno nāma pathabyārājā, padesarājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā, akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ karontā anusāsanti, ete rājāno nāmā’’ti (pārā. 92).
用凶兽皮做成的坐具、吉祥凳、藤椅。只是微微一笑,只是轻轻一笑。所谓“随笑”,是指她们针对我而发出的大笑,因为这是对“anujagghantā(随笑)”这个词的解释。“jaggha(笑)”这个词也用来表示大笑,就像在“我不会哈哈大笑地进入村落”等(《巴帝摩卡》586)语句中那样。巴利
Saṃhārimehi vāḷarūpehi kato pallaṅko, bhaddapīṭhaṃ vettāsanaṃ. Mihitamattaṃ hasitamattaṃ. Anuhasantīti mamuddesikaṃ mahāhasitaṃ karonti, idañhi ‘‘anujagghantā’’ti etassa saṃvaṇṇanāpadaṃ. Jagghasaddo ca mahāhasane pavattati ‘‘na ujjagghikāya antaraghare gamissāmī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 586) viya.
从迦那延那开始,他们靠代代相传的家族世系,凭听闻来知道。以家族为傲的人,大多数都会用各种方式谈论他人家族的高低,也知道自己的家族世系。阿摩昼也是这样,正因为如此,当他被世尊这样追问时,因为害怕金刚手,就如实说出了自己的家族世系。“垂下”是指把衣服像象鼻的形状那样垂下来。“于彼”是指由于这样知道,也由于前往。“唯我想”是指她们只是在对我随笑取乐,我这样想。巴利
Kaṇhāyanato paṭṭhāya paramparāgataṃ kulavaṃsaṃ anussavavasena jānanti. Kulābhimānino hi yebhuyyena paresaṃ uccāvacaṃ kulaṃ tathā tathā udāharanti, attano ca kulavaṃsaṃ jānanti, evaṃ ambaṭṭhopi, tathā hesa parato bhagavatā pucchito vajirapāṇi bhayena attano kulavaṃsaṃ yāthāvato kathesīti. Olambetvāti hatthisoṇḍasaṇṭhānādinā sāṭakaṃ avalambetvā. Tatoti tathājānanato, gamanato ca. Mamaññeva maññeti mamameva anujagghantā maññe.
第三,关于“富者说”的注释巴利
Tatiyaibbhavādavaṇṇanā
266 “田里的土块”是指田里因为耕作而翻起来的碎土块。因为这种小鸟住在土块之间,所以就被叫做“土块鸟”,这是一种小鸟。在《中部·中分五十经》的《土块鸟喻经注释》里,把它称为“乞雨鸟”,但在各种词典里,则称它为“拉巴鸟”。“因嗔怒而黏附”是指缠上去、结下怨恨的意思。巴利
266.Khettaleḍḍūnanti khette kasanavasena uṭṭhāpitamattikākhaṇḍānaṃ. Leḍḍukānamantare nivāsitattā ‘‘leḍḍukikā’’ icceva (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.266) saññātā khuddakasakuṇikā. Majjhimapaṇṇāsake leḍḍukikopamasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘cātakasakuṇikā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.150) vuttā, nighaṇṭusatthesu pana taṃ ‘‘lāpasakuṇikā’’ti vadanti. Kodhavasena laggitunti upanayhituṃ, āghātaṃ bandhitunti attho.
说“他把我们变成天鹅、孔雀和野鹅”这句话,是在指出:前面所引的“没有哪只天鹅、孔雀或野鹅跑来问你‘你在嚷嚷什么’来阻止你”这段话,也并没有被收进结集诵本里,而只是世尊当时亲口说出的。因为当时正在说这话的人,本来就该说“他这样做”。“如此对你”等话,以及“尚未完成”等话,阿摩昼认为那是沙门乔达摩出于傲慢才说的,出于这个用意,注释者才说“现在他觉得自己离慢已经生起了”。巴利
‘‘Amhe haṃsakoñcamorasame karotī’’ti vadanto heṭṭhā gahitaṃ ‘‘na taṃ koci haṃso vā koñco vā moro vā āgantvā kiṃ tvaṃ lapasīti nisedhetī’’ti idampi vacanaṃ saṅgītimanāruḷhaṃ tadā bhagavatā vuttamevāti dasseti. Tadā vadantoyeva hi evaṃ karotīti vattumarahati. ‘‘Evaṃ nu te’’tiādivacanaṃ, ‘‘avusitavāyevā’’tiādivacanañca mānavasena samaṇena gotamena vuttanti ambaṭṭho maññatīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘nimmāno dāni jātoti maññamāno’’ti.
《奴仆之子说》的注释巴利
Dāsiputtavādavaṇṇanā
267 “Nimmādeti(令人发狂)”这句,是把a音改成ā音来解说的,以此说明这个词是由mada(醉、骄慢)这个词音变来的,所以用“nimmadeti(令离慢)”来表示。“Nimmaneti”就是远离慢的意思。“如果我问他的族姓就好了”,就是这个意思。为了让他把话说清楚,世尊大声说了三遍。那为什么还要问呢?虽然已经知道他不清净,仍然这样问他,是为了追问他说这话的理由。这里指的是那个本身就是族姓的名字,而不是另外有个什么族姓,所以说“父母所属的”,意思是属于父母的。因为族姓本来就应该从父亲那边得到,只属于父亲一方,而不是属于父母双方。因为婆罗门并不要求非得同族姓才能通婚,而族姓这个名字是生来就有的,不是人为安立的,也不是根据德行取的名字;出身跟父母双方都有关系,所以说是父母所属的,不是只属于父亲一方。“名族姓”就是指那个作为族姓的名字,不是安立的名字,也不是根据德行取的名字,因为这里是按照修饰语后置的构词方式来说的,就像“agyāhita(不降甘露)”那样。这个名字因为是一代代传承下来的,所以也是族姓,因此叫“名族姓”。其中,“迦那延那”这个名称施设是约定俗成的,针对这一点才说“从施设的角度说是名”。不过这个名字是从迦那伊沙那开始,沿着这个家族代代传下来的,并不是只在这里才约定俗成的,所以说“从传承的角度说是族姓”。族姓这个词的词义,前面已经讲过了。巴利
267.Nimmādetīti a-kārassa ā-kāraṃ katvā niddeso ummāde madasaddena nipphannattāti dasseti ‘‘nimmadetī’’ti iminā. Nimmāneti vigatamāne. Yadi panāhaṃ gottaṃ puccheyyaṃ sādhu vatāti attho. Pākaṭaṃ kātukamyatāya tikkhattuṃ mahāsaddena avoca. Kasmā avocāti pana asuddhabhāvaṃ jānantassāpi tathāvacane kāraṇapucchā. Gottabhūtaṃ nāmameva adhippetaṃ, na visuṃ gottanti āha ‘‘mātāpettikanti mātāpitūnaṃ santaka’’nti. Gottañhi pitito laddhabbaṃ pettikameva, na mātāpettikaṃ. Na hi brāhmaṇānaṃ sagottāya eva āvāhavivāho icchito, gottanāmaṃ pana jātisiddhaṃ, na kittimaṃ, na guṇanāmaṃ vā, jāti ca ubhayasambandhinīti mātāpettikameva, na pettikamattaṃ. Nāmagottanti gottabhūtaṃ nāmaṃ, na kittimaṃ, na guṇanāmaṃ vā visesanaparanipātavasena vuttattā yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti. Nāmañca tadeva paveṇīvasena pavattattā gottañcāti hi nāmagottaṃ. Tattha yā ‘‘kaṇhāyano’’ti nāmapaṇṇatti niruḷhā, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘paṇṇattivasena nāma’’nti. Taṃ panetaṃ nāmaṃ kaṇhaisito paṭṭhāya tasmiṃ kulaparamparāvasena āgataṃ, na etasmiṃyeva niruḷhanti vuttaṃ ‘‘paveṇīvasena gotta’’nti. Gottapadassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
“随念”在这里并不只是指随念本身,而是特指以考察家族清净的方式来说的,所以说“澄清家族端绪的人”,意思是澄清家族最上端的人。“圣子”这里,“圣”这个词就是“圣女”,说的是“主人之子”。在四个婢女当中,地萨是甘蔗王的家生婢女,所以说“家婢之子”。这里,因为阿摩昼依仗出身而骄慢,如果不按实际情况揭示他的出身,就无法折伏他的慢心;如果没折伏慢心,他就会因慢心而错失三宝;如果折伏了慢心,他以后就会对三宝生起净信。而且这样的话,他的话也不能算是粗恶语,因为他的心已经变得柔软。《中分五十》里的《无畏经》(《中部》2.83)在这里也是一个例证。有些人虽然被粗语呵责,却像铁等被火烧过一样变得柔软,所以世尊想让阿摩昼谦逊,便说:“释迦族是圣子,你是释迦族的奴子。”巴利
‘‘Anussarato’’ti ettha na kevalaṃ anussaraṇamattaṃ adhippetaṃ, atha kho kulasuddhivīmaṃsanavasenevāti āha ‘‘kulakoṭiṃ sodhentassā’’ti, kulaggaṃ visodhentassāti attho. ‘‘Ayyaputtā’’ti ettha ayyasaddo ayyiraketi vuttaṃ ‘‘sāmino puttā’’ti. Catūsu dāsīsu disā okkākarañño antojātadāsī. Tenāha ‘‘gharadāsiyā putto’’ti. Ettha ca yasmā ambaṭṭho jātiṃ nissāya mānathaddho, na ca tassa yāthāvato jātiyā avibhāvitāya mānaniggaho karīyati, akate ca mānaniggahe mānavasena ratanattayaṃ aparajjhissati, kate pana mānaniggahe aparabhāge ratanattaye pasīdissati, na cedisī vācā pharusavācā nāma hoti cittassa saṇhabhāvato. Majjhimapaṇṇāsake abhayasuttañca (ma. ni. 2.83) ettha nidassanaṃ . Keci ca janā kakkhaḷāya vācāya vuttā agginā viya lohādayo mudubhāvaṃ gacchanti, tasmā bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṃ nibbisevanaṃ kattukāmo ‘‘ayyaputtā sakyā bhavanti, dāsiputto tvamasi sakyāna’’nti avoca.
这里,“daha”这个词,像“某类恶比丘学了如来所宣说的法与律之后,把它执为自己所有”等句子(《波罗夷》195)中那样,是“执持”的意思;而这里的执持,是就“祖先”这个意义来让人理解,所以说“欧卡卡是我们的祖先”等等。因为通达音声的人认为,“daha”这个词既有“焚烧”的意思,也有“执持”的意思。“光芒发出”的意思是:变得光亮而发出,因为那样的善业,牙齿本身就有光亮的状态。巴利
‘‘Idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 195) viya dahasaddo dhāraṇattho, dhāraṇañcettha pubbapurisavasena saññāpananti āha ‘‘okkāko no pubbapuriso’’tiādi. Dahasaddañhi bhasmīkaraṇe, dhāraṇe ca icchanti saddavidū. Pabhā niccharatīti pabhassaraṃ hutvā nikkhamati tathārūpena puññakammena dantānaṃ pabhassarabhāvato.
“Te”指的是那几位年长的王子。“Paṭhamakappikānaṃ”指的是在最初劫的最初时期出生的人。这里用“kira”这个词,是表示“传闻”的意思,用来暗示在所讲述的这套王统传承中,某些人有不同的看法。正是通过“传闻”这个说法,排除了优多罗毗诃罗住者等未曾听闻此说的人的不同意见。“Mahāsammatassa”指的是:按照《起世因本经》中将要讲述的方式,大众认可并立他为“这是我们的王”,因此被称为“大众认可者”的那位。关于他,人们这样说——巴利
Teti jeṭṭhakumāre. Paṭhamakappikānanti paṭhamakappassa ādikāle nibbattānaṃ. Kirasaddena cettha anussavatthena, yo vuccamānāya rājaparamparāya kesañci matibhedo, taṃ ulliṅgeti. Anussavavacaneneva hi ananussuto uttaravihāravāsiādīnaṃ matibhedo nirākarīyatīti. Mahāsammatassāti aggaññasutte vakkhamānanayena ‘‘ayaṃ no rājā’’ti mahājanena sammannitvā ṭhapitattā ‘‘mahāsammato’’ti evaṃ sammatassa. Yaṃ sandhāya vadanti –
他出身于太阳族,是清净功德汇聚之处。
曾有一位拥有大威力的国王,名叫大选王。
他是世间的眼目,功德的光芒灿烂闪耀;
他驱散了黑暗,光辉闪耀,就像第二个太阳。
那位为世间谋求利益的人,已经在世间立下了界限;
人们无法越过他所划定的界限。
具足名声与威德,守护着世间的界限;
人们称这位最初的大英雄为“摩奴”。巴利
‘‘Ādiccakulasambhūto, suvisuddhaguṇākaro; Mahānubhāvo rājāsi, mahāsammatanāmako. Yo cakkhubhūto lokassa, guṇaraṃsisamujjalo; Tamonudo virocittha, dutiyo viya bhāṇumā. Ṭhapitā yena mariyādā, loke lokahitesinā; Vavatthitā sakkuṇanti, na vilaṅghayitu janā. Yasassinaṃ tejassinaṃ, lokasīmānurakkhakaṃ; Ādibhūtaṃ mahāvīraṃ, kathayanti ‘manū’ti ya’’nti. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.267);
人们说到他的子孙后裔代代相传时,就这样说——巴利
Tassa ca puttapaputtaparamparaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vadanti –
他的儿子有大威德,名叫罗阇,是一位大地之主。
他的儿子瓦拉罗阇,是王族之中最尊贵的一位。
他有一个具备善德的儿子,名叫羯梨仰。
那位国王有一个儿子,名叫瓦拉迦罗耶那。
他的儿子是具大精进的曼陀多,在享受欲乐的人中最为第一。
他成了至高无上者,受到帝释天王以半个王国供养。
他的儿子有大威神力,名叫瓦拉曼陀多。
他的儿子名叫优波萨他,声名远扬。
有个叫瓦拉的人,威光炽盛,他的儿子是马哈瓦拉。
他的儿子是优波瓦罗王,力气极大。
他的儿子是摩伽提婆,一位堪比天神的大地之主。
他的子孙一代接一代,共有八万四千人。
他们当中的最后一位国王,被人们称为甘蔗王。
他名声广大,威德炽盛,在国王的圈子里也不容轻视。巴利
‘‘Tassa putto mahātejo, rojo nāma mahīpati; Tassa putto vararojo, pavaro rājamaṇḍale. Tassāsi kalyāṇaguṇo, kalyāṇo nāma atrajo; Rājā tassāsi tanayo, varakalyāṇanāmako. Tassa putto mahāvīro, mandhātā kāmabhoginaṃ; Aggabhūto mahindena, aḍḍharajjena pūjito. Tassa sūnu mahātejo, varamandhātunāmako; ‘Uposatho’ti nāmena, tassa putto mahāyaso. Varo nāma mahātejo, tassa putto mahāvaro; Tassāsi upavaroti, putto rājā mahābalo. Tassa putto maghadevo, devatulyo mahīpati; Caturāsīti sahassāni, tassa puttaparamparā. Tesaṃ pacchimako rājā, ‘okkāko’iti vissuto; Mahāyaso mahātejo, akhuddo rājamaṇḍale’’ti. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.267);
这是不违背义注的说法。不过《岛史》里是这样说的——巴利
Idaṃ aṭṭhakathānuparodhavacanaṃ. Yaṃ pana dīpavaṃse vuttaṃ –
刚刚灌顶登基的国王,是守护大地、持有光辉的人。
这位名叫“大选出”的刹帝利,治理着王国。
他的儿子名叫罗阇,还有瓦拉罗阇,是刹帝利。
贤善、胜贤善,布萨日,大自在者。
曼陀多是他们当中的第七位,是四洲之主。
瓦拉王、优波瓦拉王,还有支提耶,是大自在者”等等。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamābhisitto rājā, bhūmipālo jutindharo; Mahāsammato nāmena, rajjaṃ kāresi khattiyo. Tassa putto rojo nāma, vararojo ca khattiyo; Kalyāṇo varakalyāṇo, uposatho mahissaro. Mandhātā sattamo tesaṃ, catudīpamhi issaro; Varo upavaro rājā, cetiyo ca mahissaro’’tiādi.
还有《大史》等书里所说的——巴利
Yañca mahāvaṃsādīsu vuttaṃ –
大牟尼确实是大众认可王的族裔。
劫初的时候,有一位国王名叫大众认可。
罗阇和瓦拉罗阇,同样还有两位迦罗耶那;
布萨王、曼陀多王、瓦拉卡王,还有两位帕瓦拉王,等等。巴利
‘‘Mahāsammatarājassa, vaṃsajo hi mahāmuni; Kappādismiṃ rājāsi, mahāsammatanāmako. Rojo ca vararojo ca, tathā kalyāṇakā duve; Uposatho ca mandhātā, varako pavarā duve’’tiādi.
这些说法大多和注疏相冲突。因为在注疏里,曼陀多王被说成第六位,摩伽提婆王是第十一位,而摩伽提婆王的子孙传承中,八万四千位国王的最后一位是甘蔗王;但在那些说法里,曼陀多王却被说成第七位,摩伽提婆王是许多千位国王中的最后一位,他的子孙传承中许多千位国王的最后一位才是甘蔗王。像这样等等,注疏用种种方式否定了这些相冲突的说法。我们不是说过吗:“这里用‘据说’这个词,是表示传闻的意思,用来暗示在所述的王统传承中某些人的意见分歧。”所谓“在他们之后”,是指以迦罗罗阇那迦为终点的、属于摩伽提婆传承的八万四千位刹帝利之后的那部分,是导师依据传闻而说的。但在《岛史》等书中则说:“迦罗罗阇那迦王的子孙传承中,许多千位刹帝利的最后一位国王名叫须阇多,他的儿子就是甘蔗王。”在摩伽提婆传承的许多千位国王之后,有第一位名叫甘蔗王的国王;在他传承的许多千位国王之后,有第二位名叫甘蔗王的国王;在他传承的许多千位国王之后,又有第三位名叫甘蔗王的国王。针对这一点,他说“有三个甘蔗王族”等等。巴利
Sabbametaṃ yebhuyyato aṭṭhakathāvirodhavacanaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyañhi mandhāturājā chaṭṭho vutto, maghadevarājā ekādasamo, tassa ca puttaparamparāya caturāsītisahassarājūnaṃ pacchimako okkākarājā, tesu pana mandhāturājā sattamo vutto, maghadevarājā anekesaṃ rājasahassānaṃ pacchimako, tassa ca puttaparamparāya anekarājasahassānaṃ pacchimako okkākarājāti evamādinā anekadhā virodhavacanaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ nirākaroti. Nanu avocumha ‘‘kirasaddena cettha anussavatthena, yo vuccamānāya rājaparamparāya kesañci matibhedo, taṃ ulliṅgetī’’ti. Tesaṃ pacchatoti maghadevaparamparābhūtānaṃ kaḷārajanakapariyosānānaṃ caturāsītikhattiyasahassānaṃ aparabhāgeti yathānussutaṃ ācariyena vuttaṃ. Dīpavaṃsādīsu pana ‘‘kaḷārajanakarañño puttaparamparāya anekakhattiyasahassānaṃ pacchimako rājā sujāto nāma, tassa putto okkāko rājā’’ti vuttaṃ. Maghadevaparamparāya anekasahassarājūnaṃ aparabhāge paṭhamo okkāko nāma rājā ahosi, tassa paramparābhūtānaṃ pana anekasahassarājūnaṃ aparabhāge dutiyo okkāko nāma rājā ahosi, tassapi paramparāya anekasahassarājūnaṃ aparabhāge tatiyo okkāko nāma rājā ahosi. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tayo okkākavaṃsā ahesu’’ntiādi.
在出生后的第五天举行命名等庆典,是世间通行的习俗,所以经文说“在第五天,妆饰之后”。“他立刻赐予恩赐”的意思是:他因为见到儿子而产生了极强的欢喜,于是匆忙地、未经审察地出于欢喜而赐予恩赐,说道:“你想要什么,就拿去吧。”这里的“她”是指禅度王子的母亲。“她想转移王位”的意思是:她想以我赐予恩赐这件事作为机会,把这个王位转移出去。巴利
Jātiyā pañcamadivase nāmakammādimaṅgalaṃ lokāciṇṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcamadivase alaṅkaritvā’’ti. Sahasā varaṃ adāsinti puttadassanena balavasomanassappatto turitaṃ avīmaṃsitvā tuṭṭhidāyavasena varaṃ adāsiṃ ‘‘yaṃ icchasi, taṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti. Sāti jantukumāramātā. Rajjaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ icchatīti mama varadānaṃ antaraṃ katvā imaṃ rajjaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ icchati.
他们会让人登上王位,意思是让大众成为王者,或者让大众去行使王权。不能承受,意思是作为居住的地方,它并非为居住所备。巴利
Rajjaṃkāressantīti rājabhāvaṃ mahājanena mahājanaṃ vā kārāpessanti. Nappasaheyyāti nivāsatthāya pariyatto na bhaveyya.
因为肤色像黑檀一样深,所以叫迦毗罗婆罗门。“出离”是指从在家生活和各种欲乐中离开出来。“萨迦”是一种全部由坚实木料构成的上等树,用它来建造宫殿等;这里指的是由这种树聚集而成的树林。“地”是指发生在地面上的;“地网”是说它能烧、能照出那地的优点和缺点,或者说,借着它而燃烧、照亮、显现出来。“下方”这里,用“ca”这个字把“八十肘”这一说法也连带进来。“在这个地方”说的是萨迦树林。按树干排列来看,是向南旋绕。按树枝排列来看,是朝向东方。那些是指鹿、野猪、青蛙和老鼠。那些是指狮子、老虎等以及猫鼬。巴利
Kaḷāravaṇṇatāya kapilabrāhmaṇo nāma ahosi. Nikkhammāti gharāvāsato kāmehi ca nikkhamitvā. Sāko nāma sabbasāramayo rukkhaviseso, yena pāsādādi karīyate, taṃsamudāyabhūte vanasaṇḍeti attho. Bhūmiyā pavattaṃ bhummaṃ, taṃ guṇadosaṃ jāleti joteti, taṃ vā jalati jotati pākaṭaṃ bhavati etāyāti bhummajālā. Heṭṭhā cāti ettha ca-saddena ‘‘asītihatthe’’ti idamanukaḍḍhati. Etasmiṃ padeseti sākavanasaṇḍamāha. Khandhapantivasena dakkhiṇāvaṭṭā. Sākhāpantivasena pācīnābhimukhā. Tehīti migasūkarehi, maṇḍūkamūsikehi ca. Teti sīhabyagghādayo sappabiḷārā ca.
“在此”是指在这样建造的城市里。整句的意思是:在你们这些人当中,哪怕只有一个人成为敌人,其他人也无法战胜上百个甚至上千个这样的敌人。“以转轮王之力”是指以转轮王之力那样的状态。“最胜”是指成为最为殊胜的。因为这里是迦毗罗仙人的住处,所以叫迦毗罗卫。巴利
Etthāti evaṃ māpiyamāne nagare. Tumhākaṃ purisesu pariyāpannaṃ ekekampi purisaṃ paccatthikabhūtaṃ aññaṃ purisasatampi purisasahassampi abhibhavituṃ na sakkhissatīti yojanā. Cakkavattibalenāti cakkavattibalabhāvena. Atiseyyoti ativiya uttamo bhaveyya. Kapilassa isino vasanaṭṭhānattā kapilavatthu.
“应存在于他们面前”是句义上的连接。“与不匹配者结合”是指与出身不相似的人以在家生活的方式结合,这是原因。“与其余的”是指与各自最年幼的(女性)。巴利
Nesaṃ santike bhaveyyāti sambandho. Asadisasaṃyogeti jātiyā asadisānaṃ gharāvāsapayoge hetubhūte. Avasesāhi attano attano kaṇiṭṭhāhi.
“正在增长”这个词用的是不尊重格的主格形式,意思是:在子女毫无障碍地成长的过程中,就在他们正在成长的时候,生出来了。因血色而像紫矿花一样。所谓麻风病,就像肺痨、天花等病一样,大多数都具有传染性,所以说“这种病会传染”。用木板盖在上面,堆上土后施与。所谓舞女,就是跳舞的女人。国王的妻妾,称为后宫。“其”指孔穴。在“鹿、鸟等”中,“等”字包含了林中游行者、饿鬼之类。巴利
Vaḍḍhamānānanti anādare sāmivacanaṃ, anantarāyikāya puttadhītuvaḍḍhanāya vaḍḍhamānesu eva udapādīti attho. Lohitakatāya koviḷārapupphasadisāni. Kuṭṭharogo nāma sāsamasūrīrogā viya yebhuyyena saṅkamanasabhāvoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ rogo saṅkamatī’’ti. Upari padarena paṭicchādetvā paṃsuṃ rāsikaraṇena datvā. Nāṭakitthiyo nāma naccantiyo. Rājabhariyāyo orodhā nāma. Tassāti susirassa. Migasakuṇādīnanti ettha ādisaddena vanacarakapetādike saṅgaṇhāti.
“坐在那座罗摩林苑里”是语义上的连接。“木板”指木片。通过宣示刹帝利种姓,让人知道自己是刹帝利出身。巴利
Tasmiṃ rāmaraññe nisinneti sambandho. Padareti dāruphalake. Khattiyamāyārocanena attano khattiyabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā.
“论母”是指从母亲那边传下来的。“礼物”是指根本财物,或者赠品。“国王”是指罗摩王的长子,也就是波罗奈国王。“在那里”是指在波罗奈城。“就在这里”是指就在雪山旁边。“城”是指作为国都的大城。名叫“拘罗树”的,是一种能用来治疗麻风的特别树木。“虎道”是指老虎走的路。巴利
Mātikanti mātito āgataṃ. Pābhatanti mūlabhaṇḍaṃ, paṇṇākāro vā. Raññoti rāmarājassa jeṭṭhaputtabhūtassa bārāṇasirañño. Tatthāti bārāṇasiyaṃ. Idhevāti himavantapasseyeva. Nagaranti rājadhānībhūtaṃ mahānagaraṃ. Kolarukkho nāma kuṭṭhabhesajjupago eko rukkhaviseso. Byagghapatheti byagghamagge.
“舅父”就是母亲的兄弟。“抓头发”是指编扎发辫。“抓衣服”是指穿衣服的方式。“沐浴处”就是前面说的那个池塘里用来洗澡的水边。现在为了说明他们至今仍然没有血统混杂,才说“他们这样”等等。“娶妻”是把女孩迎进门。“嫁女”是把女孩送出去。“在那里”是指在那些释迦族和拘利族当中。因为“dhātu”这个词有很多意思,而“saṃ”这个词有居住的意思,所以就说“居住”。关于“最初”:这里用处格来表示宾格的意思,“agga”这个词有“最初”的意思,同时也是动作的限定,所以用“那是最初”等话来表明。世尊在这里所说的:“阿摩昼啊,那时奥迦迦王发出感叹:‘这些王子真是释迦,这些王子真是最上的释迦。’阿摩昼啊,从那时起,释迦族就得名了。”从音和义两方面来看,这是自然词源的示范:“能够和自己的姊妹一起居住而不造成血统混杂,能够守护、维持家族传承,所以叫释迦。”他们正是因为发音构造上的这点差别而被称为释迦。然而,在《释迦尼犍度》等论典中所说的——巴利
Mātulāti mātu bhātaro. Kesaggahaṇanti kesaveṇibandhanaṃ. Dussaggahaṇanti vatthassa nivasanākāro. Nhānatitthanti yathāvuttāya pokkharaṇiyā udakanhānatitthaṃ. Idānipi tesaṃ jātisambhedābhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ tesa’’ntiādimāha. Āvāho dārikāharaṇaṃ. Vivāho dārikādānaṃ. Tatthāti tesu sakyakoliyesu. Dhātusaddānamanekatthattā samusaddo nivāsatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vasantī’’ti. Aggeti upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ, ādyatthe ca aggasaddo, kiriyāvisesoti ca dasseti ‘‘taṃ agga’’ntiādinā. Yadettha bhagavatā vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho ambaṭṭha rājā okkāko udānaṃ udānesi ‘sakyā vata bho kumārā, paramasakyā vata bho kumārā’ti, tadagge kho pana ambaṭṭha sakyā paññāyantī’’ti, tadetaṃ saddato, atthato ca sābhāvikanibbacananidassanaṃ ‘‘sakāhi bhaginīhipi saddhiṃ saṃvāsavasena jātisambhedamakatvā kulavaṃsaṃ anurakkhituṃ sakkuṇanti samatthentīti sakyā’’ti teyeva saddaracanāvisesena sākiyā. Yaṃ panetaṃ sakkatanighaṇṭusatthesu vuttaṃ –
因为过去曾以萨咖树为遮蔽,而把那里当作住处;
因此,当这一族姓出现在大地上时,就被称为“释迦”,声名远播。巴利
‘‘Sākarukkhapaṭicchannaṃ, vāsaṃ yasmā purākaṃsu; Tasmā diṭṭhā vaṃsajāte, bhuvi ‘sakyā’ti vissutā’’ti.
这仅仅是对“声音”本身所作的一种不实指称的假名示例,比如“因为住在迦毗罗仙人住处所在的萨咖林中,所以叫释迦、释迦族”。巴利
Tadetaṃ saddamattaṃ pati asābhāvikanibbacananidassanaṃ ‘‘kapilamunino vasanaṭṭhāne sākavane vasantīti sakyā,sākiyā’’ti ca.
因为肤色黑,所以叫“黑”,这就是“黑色”等说法的由来。下巴上长出的胡须,以及上唇两边像獠牙一样长出来的牙须。这只是按字面意思说的。若从派生构词的角度来说,就像现在人们见到毗舍遮就称其为“毗舍遮”一样,那时的人们见到他,也就称他为“黑”。所以他刚一生下来就能开口说话,因为形貌类似毗舍遮,就被叫作“黑”。正如经中所说:“阿摩昼!就像现在的人们见到毗舍遮,认出是‘毗舍遮’一样,阿摩昼!那时的人们见到毗舍遮,也认出是‘黑’。”其中“毗舍遮已生”这句话,是用现在通行的名称来方便说明,作为前面那个词的同义语而说的。至于“我将不用含食的嘴说话”等语句中,harа这个字通过前缀而有发声之义,再与第二个前缀结合,就用于高声之义,所以说“发出了高声”。巴利
Kāḷavaṇṇatāya kaṇho nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāḷavaṇṇa’’ntiādi. Hanuyaṃ jātā massū, uttaroṭṭhassa ubhosu passesu dāṭhākārena jātā dāṭhikā. Idañca atthamattena vuttaṃ, taddhitavasena pana yathā etarahi yakkhe ‘‘pisāco’’ti samaññā, evaṃ tadā ‘‘kaṇho’’ti, tasmā jātamatteyeva sabyāharaṇena pisācasadisatāya kaṇhoti. Tathāhi vuttaṃ ‘‘yathā kho pana ambaṭṭha etarahi manussā pisāce disvā ‘pisācā’ti sañjānanti, evameva kho ambaṭṭha tena kho pana samayena manussā pisāce ‘kaṇhā’ti sañjānantī’’tiādi. Tattha pisāco jātoti idāni pākaṭanāmena suviññāpanatthaṃ purimapadasseva vevacanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na sakabaḷena mukhena byāharissāmī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 619) viya upasaggavasena saddakaraṇattho harasaddo, puna dutiyopasaggena yutto uccāsaddakaraṇe vattatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘uccāsaddamakāsī’’ti.
268 268. “为了解除对自己的讥嫌”:这是说,老师和庵婆咤各自为了去除可能落到自己头上的非难。“自己”在这里是分别指各人。“将离间”:意思是由于宣说不利的意图,他将进行分裂,也就是要搬弄是非。由于在表达义理时言语本身就是工具,所以从语法上说,言语就是“语具”,而善妙的就是“善语具”。“于此语中”:这里的“彼”字,虽然可以指庵婆咤先前所说的“乔达摩尊者!有四种姓”等种姓论,但这种种姓论应当依照吠陀所说的方式与他论辩,为了显示论辩的根据,所以用众人熟知的三吠陀语来指称,因此说“于自己所学之三吠陀语中”。现在为了显示世尊所说的“庵婆咤!你的父母系谱实为古旧”等话也被指称,所以说“或于此婢子之语中”。再者,“对论”就是解答问题,或者进一步论说,因此应当知道,这是为了显示依这两种含义相应,而用“彼”字来指称其对象。巴利
268. Attano upārambhamocanatthāyāti ācariyena, ambaṭṭhena ca attano attano upari pāpetabbopavādassa apanayanatthaṃ. ‘‘Attano’’ti hetaṃ vicchālopavacanaṃ. Paribhindissatīti anatthakāmatāpavedanena paribhedaṃ karissati, pesuññaṃ upasaṃharissatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthaviññāpane sādhanatāya vācā eva karaṇaṃ vākkaraṇaṃ niruttinayena, taṃ kalyāṇamassāti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Asmiṃ vacaneti ettha tasaddena kāmaṃ ‘‘cattārome bho gotama vaṇṇā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.266) ambaṭṭhena heṭṭhā vutto jātivādo parāmasitabbo hoti, tathāpesa jātivādo vede vuttavidhināyeva tena paṭimantetabbo, tasmā paṭimantanahetubhāvena pasiddhaṃ vedattayavacanameva parāmasitabbanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘attanā uggahite vedattayavacane’’ti. Idāni ‘‘porāṇaṃ kho pana te ambaṭṭha mātāpettika’’ntiādinā bhagavatā vuttavacanassapi parāmasanaṃ dassento ‘‘etasmiṃ vā dāsiputtavacane’’ti āha. Apica paṭimantetunti ettha paṭimantanā nāma pañhāvissajjanā, uttarikathanā vā, tasmā atthadvayānurūpaṃ tabbisayassa ta-saddena parāmasanaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
269 “Tāva”的意思是:在商议的最初,也就是还没商议的时候。这里说的是“商议还没有进行”。“Dujjānā”就是难以知道、难以理解,因为一开始他就连头都抬不起来,也因为他的出身难以知道,又因为那件事很难做到,所以意思是让庵婆咤自己解脱。所谓“自己绑的包袱”,是指他自己通过把释迦族说成卑贱来抬高自己,从而落到自己头上,这就是“自己绑的包袱”的意思,也就是自己绑起来的包袱。巴利
269.Tāvāti mantanāya paṭhamameva, akatāya eva mantanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dujjānāti dubbiññeyyā, paṭhamameva sīsamukkhipituṃ asamatthanato , jātiyā ca dubbiññeyyattā, aṭṭassa ca dukkaraṇato ambaṭṭho sayameva mocetūti adhippāyo. Attanāva sakyesu ibbhavādanipātanena attano upari pāpuṇanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘attanā baddhaṃ puṭaka’’nti vuttaṃ, attanāva baddhaṃ puṭoḷinti attho.
270 这里的“法”是指原因,就像在“法无碍解”等(《分别论》718等)中的用法一样。与法一起存在,所以叫“共法”,那本身就是“共法者”,因此说“有因的”等等,这是一种同义词的说法。或者,能产生的是因,支持的是缘。用一种在一个地方说不通的说法,去说另一个地方也说不通的说法。因此说“因为……”等等。巴利
270.Dhammo nāma kāraṇaṃ ‘‘dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 718 ādayo) viya, dhammena saha vattatīti sahadhammo, so eva sahadhammikoti āha ‘‘sahetuko’’tiādi, pariyāyavacanametaṃ. Janako vā hetu, upatthambhako kāraṇaṃ. Aññena aṭṭhānagatena aññaṃ aṭṭhānagataṃ vacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi.
关于这一点,因为劝了两次之后,在第三次劝告还没发生的时候,就说“我要走了”。巴利
Tatoti dvikkhattuṃ codanāto paraṃ, tatiyacodanāya anāgatāya eva pakkamissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
271 271. 因为应当受供养,所以帝释天王被称为夜叉。凡具有火的自然色相者,就说为“燃烧的,即火色”。“Kandala”(甘陀罗)是一种依花树而生的特别树种,它开白色的花,花蕾也是白色,呈象牙的形状。“Virūparūpa”(维鲁帕鲁帕)意思是颠倒的形貌。巴利
271. Pūjitabbato sakko devarājā yakkho nāma. Yo aggissa pakativaṇṇo, tena samannāgatanti vuttaṃ ‘‘ādittanti aggivaṇṇa’’nti. Kandalo nāma pupphūpagarukkhaviseso, yassa setaṃ pupphaṃ pupphati, makuḷampissa setavaṇṇaṃ dāṭhākāraṃ hoti. Virūparūpanti viparītarūpasaṇṭhānaṃ.
在第八个七日,坐在阿阇波罗榕树下的诸佛所惯常行的少事少务,针对这个而说了“若我……”等话。“Avattamāne”的意思是不实行,或者不随行。“Tasmā”是因为当时那样承认了的缘故。为了让对方害怕之后再回答问题而前来,就像《根本五十篇》中记载的萨遮迦遍行者前来集会时那样。巴利
Aṭṭhamasattāhe ajapālanigrodhamūle nisinnassa sabbabuddhassa āciṇṇasamāciṇṇaṃ appossukkataṃ sandhāya ‘‘ahañcevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Avattamāneti appaṭipajjamāne, ananuvattamāne vā. Tasmāti tadā tathāpaṭiññātattā. Tāsetvā pañhaṃ vissajjāpessāmīti āgato yathā taṃ mūlapaṇṇāsake āgatassa saccakaparibbājakassa samāgame (ma. ni. 1.357).
“世尊看见,阿摩昼也看见”这句话里,为了说明其他人看不见的两种原因,就说了“如果确实……”等话。“Hi”这个词是表示原因的不变词。因为不重,又因为他们会说,所以这样连接。对其他人来说也是共通的,所以不重、不成为负担。“Āvāhetvā”的意思是用咒力召唤之后。“Tassā”指的是阿摩昼的。腹内指的是肠、内脏之类。“Vādasaṅghaṭṭe”指的是言语冲突。“Maññamāno”的意思是从思量。这是为了显示关联。巴利
‘‘Bhagavā ceva passati ambaṭṭho cā’’ti ettha itaresamadassane duvidhampi kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘yadi hī’’tiādimāha. Hi-saddo kāraṇatthe nipāto. Yasmā agaru, yasmā ca vadeyyuṃ, tasmāti sambandho. Aññesampi sādhāraṇato agaru abhāriyaṃ. Āvāhetvāti mantabalena avhānaṃ katvā. Tassāti ambaṭṭhassa. Antokucchi antaantaguṇādiko. Vādasaṅghaṭṭeti vācāsaṅghaṭṭane. Maññamānoti maññanato. Sambandhadassanañhetaṃ.
272 寻求救护,意思是:这位沙门乔达摩才是能让我从这怖畏中得救护的人,于是就把世尊当作“救护”来寻求,也就是前去亲近。其余两个词也是同样的道理。“Tāyati”的意思是从当前出现的怖畏中保护,所以说“保护”,这是主动语态的构词。“Nilīyati”的意思是被当前出现的怖畏所逼迫而躲藏起来,这是处所语态的构词。“Sara”这个词有伤害的意思,而这里指的正是摧毁,所以说“怖畏伤害、摧毁”,这是主动语态的构词。巴利
272.Tāṇaṃ gavesamānoti ‘‘ayameva samaṇo gotamo ito bhayato mama tāyako’’ti bhagavantaṃyeva ‘‘tāṇa’’nti pariyesanto , upagacchantoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tāyatīti yathūpaṭṭhitabhayato pāleti. Tenāha ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti, kattusādhanametaṃ. Nilīyatīti yathūpaṭṭhiteneva bhayena upadduto nilīno hoti, adhikaraṇasādhanametaṃ. Sarasaddo hiṃsane, tañca viddhaṃsanameva adhippetanti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhayaṃ hiṃsati viddhaṃsetī’’ti, kattusādhanametaṃ.
庵婆咤族姓故事解说巴利
Ambaṭṭhavaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā
274 “恒河南岸”是指名为恒河的那条河的南边一带。“婆罗门苦行者”是说出身婆罗门家族的苦行者。有人想靠咒力把箭或矛之类投到别人身上,可他的手根本转不动;手都转不动,武器又怎么能转得动呢?就是针对这种转不动的情形,才说“武器转不动”。“贤善哉”是表示接受的话,意思是“好啊”。“弓所射之箭到不了的地方”,这是按照带着装备之人的说法,说成“弓到不了”,就像说“用弓射,用眼看”一样。名为“阿摩昼”的,是人们身上涂油时能安住的那种明咒,按词源的说法就叫“阿摩昼”,意思是如此得名的咒术明咒。因为这种明咒在他身上,所以黑仙人就被称为“阿摩昼”;而这个青年因为生在他的族系里,也就被称为“阿摩昼”。据说他心想:“我怎么会生在方位婢女的胎里?”他厌恶那低贱的出身,就出去想:“我现在要用某种办法洗净这个出身。”因此说“现在我要满足我的心愿”。他的心愿就是:靠明咒的力量吓住国王,从得到他女儿的时候起,我这婢女所生的出身就算洗净了。巴利
274.Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇatoti gaṅgāya nāma nadiyā dakkhiṇadisābhāge. Brāhmaṇatāpasāti brahmakulino tāpasā. Saraṃ vā sattiādayo vā parassa upari khipitukāmassa mantānubhāvena hatthaṃ na parivattati, hatthe pana aparivattante kuto āvudhaṃ parivattissatīti tathā aparivattanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘āvudhaṃ na parivattatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhadraṃ bhoti sampaṭicchanaṃ, sādhūti attho. Dhanunā khittasarena agamanīyaṃ sasambhārakathānayena ‘‘dhanu agamanīya’’nti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘dhanunā vijjhati, cakkhunā passatī’’ti. Ambaṭṭhaṃ nāma vijjanti sattānaṃ sarīre abbhaṅgaṃ ṭhapetīti ambaṭṭhā niruttinayena, evaṃladdhanāmaṃ mantavijjanti attho. Yato ambaṭṭhā vijjā etasmiṃ atthīti katvā kaṇho isi ‘‘ambaṭṭho’’ti paññāyittha, tabbaṃsajātatāya panāyaṃ māṇavo ‘‘ambaṭṭho’’ti voharīyati. So kira ‘‘kathaṃ nāmāhaṃ disāya dāsiyā kucchimhi nibbatto’’ti taṃ hīnaṃ jātiṃ jigucchanto ‘‘handāhaṃ yathā tathā imaṃ jātiṃ sodhessāmī’’ti niggato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idāni me manorathaṃ pūressāmī’’ti. Ayañhissa manoratho – vijjābalena rājānaṃ tāsetvā tassa dhītaraṃ laddhakālato paṭṭhāya myāyaṃ dāsajāti sodhitā bhavissatīti.
“最胜咒”指的是最殊胜的吠陀咒。意思是:一个身为婢女之子的人,到底凭什么理由来求娶貌如天女的女儿?Khurati是切割的意思,或者khurappo是指饮刀,又或者因为刀被安放在箭端,所以叫khurappo,也就是箭。靠咒力的作用,国王的手臂变得只像一根柱子那样僵直。正因为那只手臂僵直不动,国王就害怕、疑虑、惊怖,心想:“谁知道会发生什么?”因此说:“他因怖畏而颤抖地站着。”巴利
Seṭṭhamanteti seṭṭhabhūte vedamante. Ko nu kiṃ kāraṇā dāsiputto samāno maddarūpiṃ dhītaraṃ yācatīti attho. Khurati chindati, khuraṃ vā pāti pivatīti khurappo, khuramassa agge appīyati ṭhapīyatīti vā khurappo, saro. Mantānubhāvena rañño bāhukkhambhamattaṃ jātaṃ, tena pana bāhukkhambhena ‘‘ko jānāti, kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti rājā bhīto ussaṅkī utrasto ahosi. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘bhayena vedhamāno aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
《萨罗邦伽本生》(《本生》2.17.52)里提到的檀达基王等人之后,出现了奥卡卡王;他们的事迹在各地长久以来都广为人知,所以说“檀达基王……”等。檀达基王犯了过错,那利凯罗犯了过错,阿周那也犯了过错,应当这样理解他们的关联。即使有沙雨等,也唯独因武器雨而毁灭,所以说“以武器雨”。他们心想“这位也有如此大的威力”,这样思惟之后,因为害怕才说出那些话,应当这样理解。巴利
Sarabhaṅgajātake (jā. 2.17.52) āgatānaṃ daṇḍakīrājādīnaṃ pacchā okkākarājā ahosi, tesaṃ pavatti ca sabbattha cirakālaṃ pākaṭāti āha ‘‘daṇḍakīrañño’’tiādi. Aparaddhassa daṇḍakīrañño, aparaddho nāḷikero, ajjuno cāti sambandho. Satipi vālukādivasse āvudhavasseneva vināsoti vuttaṃ ‘‘āvudhavuṭṭhiyā’’ti. ‘‘Ayampi īdiso mahānubhāvo’’ti maññamānā evaṃ cintayantā bhayena avocunti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“将会破裂”的意思就是将会碎掉。因为这里说的“业色”是就业和作者的角度称为“大地”,就像说“谷仓破裂”一样。所以经文说“将会破裂”。“一把谷壳”是指一把叶子壳,或者一把糠。为什么这么说呢?于是说“仅仅在箭和僵硬上”等等。巴利
Undriyissatīti bhindiyissati. Kammarūpañhetaṃ ‘‘pathavī’’ti kammakattuvasena vuttattā yathā ‘‘kusulo bhijjatī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘bhijjissatī’’ti. Thusamuṭṭhīti palāsamuṭṭhi, bhusamuṭṭhi vā. Kasmāti āha ‘‘sarasanthambhanamatte’’tiādi.
心怀恐惧、胆怯的人,因为怖畏而身体颤抖、汗毛竖立,成为毛竖之人;而无所畏惧、泰然自若的人,因为不存在怖畏和灾祸,身体不颤抖、汗毛平伏,成为毛伏之人,安稳地住立。然而,从汗毛平伏这一点,他的安稳状态就变得明显,所以为了以果显因,经中说了“安稳”,并以“平毛”等语来显示。从词源规则来看,这个词的成立,正如《怖畏经》中所说:“我在林中居住时,得到了更大的安稳。”(中部1.36等)这里的“此”是结语。“如果国王让我见到那个女孩,王子就会安稳、平安”——这个承诺仅从上下文就已经很清楚。“由此”指由黑天神。“咒语”指名为手臂支撑咒的平息明咒。因为对于这类能带来怖畏灾祸的咒语,必定有能平息它的咒语,正如莲花箭明咒等一样。“令回转”意为被念诵。为了解除自己女儿所受的诽谤,他使她成为非奴、自由之身。为了让她有与之相称的地位,他将她置于崇高的位置。“以一方”指母方。这是出于悲悯,为了安慰而说,并不是为了显示出身高贵。因此经文说“那时,世尊”等等。巴利
Bhītatasitā bhayavasena chambhitasarīrā uddhaggalomā honti haṭṭhalomā, abhītatasitā pana bhayupaddavābhāvato acchambhitasarīrā patitalomā honti ahaṭṭhalomā, khemena sotthinā tiṭṭhanti, tāya pana patitalomatāya tassa sotthibhāvo pākaṭo hotīti phalena kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pallomo’ti vuttanti dasseti ‘‘pannalomo’’tiādinā. Niruttinayena padasiddhi yathā taṃ bhayabheravasutte ‘‘bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṃ araññe vihārāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.36 ādayo). Idanti osānavacanaṃ. ‘‘Sace me rājā taṃ dārikaṃ dasseti, kumāro sotthi pallomo bhavissatī’’ti paṭiññākaraṇaṃ pakaraṇatoyeva pākaṭaṃ. Tenāti kaṇhena. Manteti bāhukkhambhakamantassa paṭippassambhakavijjāsaṅkhāte mante. Evarūpānañhi bhayupaddavakarānaṃ mantānaṃ ekaṃseneva paṭippassambhakamantāhonti yathā taṃ kusumārakavijjādīnaṃ. Parivattiteti pajappite. Attano dhītuyā apavādamocanatthaṃ taṃ adāsaṃ bhujissaṃ karoti. Tassā anurūpe issariye ṭhapanatthaṃ uḷāre ca naṃ ṭhāne ṭhapesi. Ekena pakkhenāti mātupakkhena. Karuṇāyanto samassāsanatthaṃ āha, na pana uccākulīnabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādi.
刹帝利最胜性的解说巴利
Khattiyaseṭṭhabhāvavaṇṇanā
275 “在婆罗门中”只是一种世俗的说法,意思是应当在婆罗门附近、从婆罗门那里得到座位等东西。所以说“在婆罗门之间”。纯粹是为了表明,这是与吠陀经典相应、对已故者仅凭信心就应当做的事,而不是在希求别的什么;为了显示“信”这个词的来源,才说“为死者所设的食物”。“吉祥等食物”里,“等”字包含了节庆、供天神等食物。“祭祀食物”指以恶想等为由而做的食物。因为有“他将成为恶想等食物的受用者”这样的说法,所以这里的火供就是祭祀。“宾客的”指属于客人的。即使是不速之客的馈赠食物,也叫“宾客的”,所以说“或礼物食物”。“遮止”就是阻挡。“不遮止”就是不阻挡。因为没有达到刹帝利种姓,不是双方出身都清净,所以说“不清净”。巴利
275.Brāhmaṇesūti vohāramattaṃ, brāhmaṇānaṃ samīpe brāhmaṇehi laddhabbāni āsanādīni labhethāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇānaṃantare’’ti. Kevalaṃ vedasatthānurūpaṃ paralokagate saddhāya eva kātabbaṃ, na tadaññaṃ kiñci abhipatthentenāti saddhanti nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘matake uddissa katabhatte’’ti vuttaṃ. Maṅgalādibhatteti ettha ādisaddena ussavadevatārādhanādibhatte saṅgaṇhāti. Yaññabhatteti pāpasaññamādivasena katabhatte. ‘‘Pāpasaññamādibhatto bhavissatī’’tiādinā hi aggihomo idha yaññaṃ. Pāhunakānanti atithīnaṃ. Anāgantukānampi pāheṇakabhattaṃ ‘‘pāhuna’’ntveva vuccatīti āha ‘‘paṇṇākārabhatte vā’’ti. Āvaṭaṃ nivāraṇaṃ. Anāvaṭaṃ anivāraṇaṃ. Khattiyabhāvaṃ appatto ubhatosujātābhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘aparisuddho’’ti.
276 在“以女人或使成为女人”这一句里,“作”是指普遍意义上的行为,因为“作”等词根的含义涵盖一切词根,所以说“寻求之后”。意思是:寻求并取得那位已成为刹帝利王子妻子的婆罗门少女;或者,对婆罗门来说,女人中以刹帝利为最胜,婆罗门为卑下——应引用经文后再这样连接。阿阇梨说:“在‘以男人或使成为男人’中,方法也一样。”因为在那里也是寻求并取得那位已成为刹帝利公主丈夫的婆罗门青年男子;或者,对婆罗门来说,男人中以刹帝利为最胜,婆罗门为卑下,如此连接。“在某种过失中”:这里的“过失”指原因,就像“在此因缘、在此过失中”等说法一样,所以是指以贪等堕落之处为因,其义就是罪过,而那是不可做的事,因此说“在某种过失中”等。“灰”一词是灰烬的同义词。因为它以无意义的方式被丢弃,所以称为灰,即灰烬。“杀后”的义释是“撒灰后”。巴利
276.Itthiyā vā itthiṃ karitvāti ettha karaṇaṃ nāma kiriyāsāmaññavisayaṃ karabhūdhātūnaṃ atthavasena sabbadhātvantogadhattāti āha ‘‘pariyesitvā’’ti. Khattiyakumārassa bhariyābhūtaṃ brāhmaṇakaññaṃ itthiṃ pariyesitvā gahetvā brāhmaṇānaṃ itthiyā vā khattiyāva seṭṭhā, ‘‘hīnā brāhmaṇā’’ti pāḷimudāharitvā yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Purisena vā purisaṃ karitvāti etthāpi eseva nayo’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.276) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi hi khattiyakaññāya patibhūtaṃ brāhmaṇakumāraṃ purisaṃ pariyesitvā gahetvā brāhmaṇānaṃ purisena vā khattiyāva seṭṭhā, hīnā brāhmaṇāti yojanā. Kismiñcideva pakaraṇeti ettha pakaraṇaṃ nāma kāraṇaṃ ‘‘etasmiṃ nidāne etasmiṃ pakaraṇe’’tiādīsu (pāci. 42, 90) viya, tasmā rāgādivasena pakkhalite ṭhāne hetubhūteti attho, taṃ pana atthato aparādhova, so ca akattabbakaraṇanti āha ‘‘kismiñcideva dose’’tiādi. Bhassasaddo bhasmapariyāyo. Bhasīyati niratthakabhāvena khipīyatīti hi bhassaṃ, chārikā. ‘‘Vadhitvā’’ti etassa atthavacanaṃ ‘‘okiritvā’’ti.
277 由业和烦恼所产生,或者从它们而生起,所以叫“所生”;这个所生本身就是能生者,也就是人。正如所说的“那些随种姓而忆念的人”。这就像“众生”这个词,依“生”这个字而以单数表示复数,所以说“意思是众生”。在这里,“能生”也适用。“随念”是指依种姓而忆念、分别,比如“我是乔达摩,我是迦叶”等等。巴利
277. Kammakilesehi janetabbo, tehi vā jāyatīti janito, sveva janeto, manussova . Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘ye gottapaṭisārino’’ti. Tadetaṃ pajāvacanaṃ viya jātisaddavasena bahumhi ekavacananti āha ‘‘pajāyāti attho’’ti. Etasmiṃ janetipi yujjati. Paṭisarantīti gottaṃ paṭicca ‘‘ahaṃ gotamo, ahaṃ kassapo’’tiādinā saraṇaṃ karonti vicinanti.
明行论的注释巴利
Vijjācaraṇakathāvaṇṇanā
278 278. 不过,在引用这首偈颂时,敬重梵天的人会生起信心,阿摩昼听到“明行足”这个词之后,就会问起明行。这样一来,这段阐明明行的开示就会对大众有利益。世尊看到这一点,就引用了这首常童子所说的偈颂。为了阐明这个意思,他说了“然而以这首偈颂”等话。否则,世尊也会成为不是一切知者、要依赖别人的人,而世尊依赖别人,这与正自觉者的身份不相符。所以他说了“阿摩昼,我也这样说”等话。“在婆罗门教中成立”是指在婆罗门见解中众所周知。依照下文所说方式,是与种姓论等相关的。“‘合和’是指将其结合,使之不相矛盾,此为阿阇梨所说。”然而现在诸本中见到“拒绝”的文本,那是不恰当的。为什么呢?因为在巴利文中,并没有拒绝婆罗门教中成立的明行,而是将阿摩昼所设想的明行结合起来、使之不相矛盾,从而开示无上的明行。巴利
278. Imasmiṃ pana siloke āhariyamāne brahmagarukā saddheyyataṃ āpajjissanti, ambaṭṭho ca ‘‘vijjācaraṇasampanno’’ti padaṃ sutvā vijjācaraṇaṃ pucchissati, evamayaṃ vijjācaraṇaparidīpanī desanā mahājanassa sātthikā bhavissatīti passitvā lokanātho imaṃ silokaṃ sanaṅkumārabhāsitaṃ āharīti imamatthampi vibhāvento ‘‘imāya pana gāthāyā’’tiādimāha. Itarathā hi bhagavāpi asabbaññū parāvassayo bhaveyya, na ca yujjati bhagavato parāvassayatā sammāsambuddhabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘ahampi hi, ambaṭṭha, evaṃ vadāmī’’tiādi. Brāhmaṇasamaye siddhanti brāhmaṇaladdhiyā pākaṭaṃ. Vakkhamānanayena jātivādādipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ.‘‘Saṃsanditvāti ghaṭetvā, aviruddhaṃ katvāti attho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.277) ācariyenavuttaṃ. Idāni pana potthakesu ‘‘paṭikkhipitvā’’ti pāṭho dissati, so ayuttova. Kasmāti ce? Na hi pāḷiyaṃ brāhmaṇasamayasiddhaṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ paṭikkhipati, tadeva ambaṭṭhena cintitaṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ ghaṭetvā aviruddhaṃ katvā anuttaraṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ desetīti.
“论”是指执见,或者言语表达。因此说“婆罗门……等言说”。因为执见也是应当被说及的,所以它本身就是言说。“此”是指教授、学习、祭祀、令祭祀等行为,这些不是吠舍的,不是刹帝利的,也不是其他那些人的——用“等”这个字把此义收摄进来。“于一切处”是指在种姓论和慢论之中。在那里,“种姓论”就是依种姓而起的论议,意思是“这适合迦叶,不适合拘私耶”等言说。“慢论”就是依慢而起的论议,以自赞毁他的方式展开,意思是“这适合婆罗门,不适合首陀罗”等言说。“系缚于种姓论”是指依附于依种姓而起的论议。“于一切处”是指在系缚于种姓论等之中。“系缚于种姓论者”就是系缚于种姓论;“系缚于慢论者”就是系缚于慢论。那些以“教授、学习、祭祀、令祭祀等只适合婆罗门”这种自赞毁他的方式而转起的人,就是系缚于慢论者。“系缚于嫁娶者”就是系缚于嫁娶之事。那些依三种系缚而转起“你配我,或者你不配我”的人,就是系缚于嫁娶者——为了说明这未尽之义,所以说“此理趣”。为了阐明系缚于嫁娶之状态,经中说了“你配我,或者你不配我”,这应当与种姓论等三个词结合起来。因为依重复等方式,种姓论等是两次显示其义的。正如论师所说:“那些系缚于嫁娶者,正是依三种关系而转起‘你配我,或者你不配我’的人。”巴利
Vādoti laddhi, vacībhedo vā. Tenāha ‘‘brāhmaṇa…pe…ādivacana’’nti. Laddhipi hi vattabbattā vacanameva. Idanti ajjhenajjhāpanayajanayājanādikammaṃ, na vessassa, na khattiyassa, na tadaññesanti atthaṃ ādisaddena saṅgaṇhāti. Sabbatthāti gottavādamānavādesu. Tatthāpi hi gottavādoti gottaṃ ārabbha vādo, kassapassevidaṃ vaṭṭati, na kosiyassātiādivacananti attho. Mānavādoti mānaṃ ārabbha attukkaṃsanaparavambhanavasena vādo, brāhmaṇassevidaṃ vaṭṭati, na suddassātiādivacananti attho. Jātivāde vinibaddhāti jātisannissitavāde paṭibaddhā. Sabbatthāti gottavādavinibaddhādīsu. Gottavādavinibaddhāti hi gottavāde vinibaddhā. Mānavādavinibaddhāti mānavāde vinibaddhā, ye hi brāhmaṇasseva ajjhenajjhāpanayajanayājanādayoti evaṃ attukkaṃsanaparavambhanavasena pavattā, te mānavādavinibaddhā ca honti. Āvāhavivāhavinibaddhāti āvāhavivāhesu vinibaddhā. Ye hi vinibaddhattayavasena ‘‘arahasi vā maṃ tvaṃ, na vā maṃ tvaṃ arahasī’’ti evaṃ pavattanakā, te āvāhavivāhavinibaddhā ca hontīti imamatthasesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘esa nayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Āvāhavivāhavinibaddhabhāvavibhāvanatthañhi ‘‘arahasi vā maṃ tvaṃ, na vā maṃ tvaṃ arahasī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ jātivādādīhi tīhi padehi yojetabbaṃ. Āvuttiādinayena hi jātivādādayo dvikkhattumatthadīpakā. Tathā hi ācariyena vuttaṃ ‘‘ye pana āvāhavivāhavinibaddhā, te eva sambandhattayavasena ‘arahasi vā maṃ tvaṃ, na vā maṃ tvaṃ arahasī’ti evaṃ pavattanakā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.278).
有人会问:前面不是已经问过明行了吗?为什么还要再问一次?为了澄清这个责难,所以说了“于是,庵婆咤……”等话。其中,“于彼处”是指在那种明行成就中。这是就婆罗门宗义所成立的明行而说的。“我们将依附”是指我们将归附进去、成为其中一部分。“由此”是指由那种明行成就。“他抛下”是指他说出。因为从究竟意义上说,他所执取的“明行”其实只是“无明无行”,所以当从究竟意义上对明行加以区分时,他就被称为被远远地从那里移开了。“于彼处”是指在那种明行成就中。这是就无上的明行而说的。在认知动作的关联中,所知的业也适用;在相应动作的关联中,作者本身就适用。因为作者是依主要动作而说的,所以说“这明行成就适合我们来了解”。在诸如此类的情况中也是如此。“从集起”是指从因等而生起。巴利
Nanu pubbe vijjācaraṇaṃ puṭṭhaṃ, kasmā taṃ puna pucchatīti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘tato ambaṭṭho’’tiādimāha. Tattha yatthāti yassaṃ vijjācaraṇasampattiyaṃ. Brāhmaṇasamayasiddhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Laggissāmāti olaggā antogadhā bhavissāma. Tatoti tāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya. Avakkhipīti avacāsi. Paramatthato avijjācaraṇāniyeva ‘‘vijjācaraṇānī’’ti gahetvā ṭhito hi paramatthato vijjācaraṇesu vibhajiyamānesu so tato dūrato apanīto nāma hoti. Yatthāti yassaṃ pana vijjācaraṇasampattiyaṃ. Anuttaravijjācaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Jānanakiriyāyoge kammampi yujjanakiriyāyoge kattāyeva upapanno. Padhānakiriyāpekkhā hi kārakāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ no vijjācaraṇasampadā ñātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Evamīdisesu. Samudāgamatoti ādisamuṭṭhānato.
279 虽然戒本来就包含在行中,所以按行来交付是合适的,但为了阻止庵婆咤走上不正之道,世尊只按戒来交付。为了说明这个意思,才说“虽包含在行中”。按照《梵网经》所说,戒有小小戒等三种。“只按戒”就是只按戒这个同义说法。“某种某种戒”是指婆罗门依种姓而成就的、以不害等为特征的、少量的戒。因此,由于如此存在,即使只是依于自身所具有的少量戒也会执著,这是意趣。阿阇梨说:“在那里那里就执著,即在那个那个婆罗门宗义所成就的少量戒上执著为‘行’。”由于这是义注中本身就有详细文句的所说,所以应当考察,或者这只是显示意趣而已。这里的意思是这样的:在那里那里就执著,即在那个那个与自身所具有的少量戒相关联之处,执著“我们也是具足行的”,因此只按戒来交付,这是关联。然而,由于没有那样发生的缘故,上面显示只按行来交付,所以说“然而,那……”等。由于在色界第四禅的解说中就已经解说了无色界诸禅,所以说“八等至也被交付为‘行’”。因为它们也由于支分相等而就是第四禅。所谓“被交付”,就是无余地取出而受持、指示的意思。然而,从观智开始,即“他这样入定、心清净、纯洁、无秽、离随烦恼、柔软、堪任、住立、达到不动,为了智见而引导、转向心”等,从观智开始。巴利
279. Kāmaṃ caraṇapariyāpannattā caraṇavasena niyyātetuṃ vaṭṭati, ambaṭṭhassa pana asamapathagamanaṃ nivārento sīlavaseneva niyyātetīti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘caraṇapariyāpannampī’’ti vuttaṃ. Brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.7, 11, 21) vuttanayena khuddakādibhedaṃ tividhaṃ sīlaṃ. Sīlavasenevāti sīlapariyāyavaseneva. Kiñci kiñci sīlanti brāhmaṇānaṃ jātisiddhaṃ ahiṃsanādiyamaniyamalakkhaṇaṃ appamattakaṃ sīlaṃ. Tasmāti tathā vijjamānattā, attani vijjamānaṃ sīlamattampi nissāya laggeyyāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Tattha tattheva laggeyyāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃyeva brāhmaṇasamayasiddhe sīlamatte ‘caraṇa’nti laggeyyā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.279) ācariyena vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyameva sākāravacanassa vuttattā vicāretabbaṃ, adhippāyamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha attho – tattha tattheva laggeyyāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃyeva attani vijjamānasīlamattapaṭisaṃyuttaṭṭhāne ‘‘mayampi caraṇasampannā’’ti laggeyya, tasmā sīlavaseneva niyyātetīti sambandho. Tathāpasaṅgābhāvato pana upari caraṇavaseneva niyyātetīti dassento ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaniddeseneva arūpāvacarajjhānānampi niddiṭṭhabhāvāpattito ‘‘aṭṭhapi samāpattiyo ‘caraṇa’nti niyyātitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tānipi hi aṅgasamatāya catutthajjhānānevāti. Niyyātitāti ca asesato nīharitvā gahitā, nidassitāti attho. Vipassanāñāṇato panāti ‘‘so evaṃ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammanīye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmetī’’tiādinā nayena vipassanāñāṇato paṭṭhāya.
四恶趣门的解说巴利
Catuapāyamukhakathāvaṇṇanā
280 “未达到”是指已经开始,却没办法完成。“无力承受”是指连开始都做不到。“khārī”是苦行者用具的名称,而它又有许多种类,为了分别说明,所以说了“火钻”等。其中,“火钻”是指上下两块用来摩擦生火的钻木。“水壶”就是净瓶。“sujā”是祭祀用的勺子。因为“sujā”这个词,是用来舀取祭品等的勺子,就像《究罗檀头经》里说的:“当第一或第二把勺子举起时。”也正因如此,阿阇梨在这里说:“sujā就是勺子。”因为容易拿取祭品等,所以叫sujā。不过有些人没有分辨这个意思,只取了“缝合”这个义项,于是读成“针”,这是不对的,因为阿阇梨并没有那样解释。“camaro”是“吞食”的意思,也就是吃,是一种特别的鹿,用它的尾毛做成的扇子就叫“cāmarā”(拂尘)。用“等”字,还包括三杖、三瓶等物。因为是以丑陋弯曲的样子生成的,所以叫“kājo”(扁担),就像“kālavaṇa”这个词一样;或者是因为在这里“kacati”,即绑缚重担,所以叫“kāco”。声论师们认为这两种词形都可以。“khāribharita”是指装满了khārī的。有人把词形增加一个音节,读成“khārivividha”,为了说明这种说法的含义,是以集合复合词来表达,所以说了“ye panā”等话。巴利
280.Asampāpuṇantoti ārabhitvāpi sampajjitumasakkonto. Avisahamānoti ārabhitumeva asakkonto. ‘‘Khārī’’ti tāpasaparikkhārassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, so ca anekabhedoti vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘araṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha araṇīti heṭṭhimuparimavasena aggidhamanakaṃ araṇīdvayaṃ. Kamaṇḍalūti kuṇḍikā. Sujāti homadabbi. Sujāsaddo hi homakammani habyannādīnamuddharaṇatthaṃ katadabbiyaṃ vattati yathā taṃ kūṭadantasutte ‘‘paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṃ paggaṇhantāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.341). Tathā hi imasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ācariyena vuttaṃ ‘‘sujāti dabbī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.280). Habyannādīnaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ jāyatīti hi sujā. Keci pana imamatthamavicāretvā tunnatthameva gahetvā ‘‘sūcī’’ti paṭhanti, tadayuttameva ācariyena tathā avaṇṇitattā. Camati adatīti camaro, migaviseso, tassa vālena katā bījanī cāmarā. Ādisaddena tidaṇḍatighaṭikādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Kucchitena vaṅkākārena jāyatīti kājo yathā ‘‘kālavaṇa’’nti; kacati bhāraṃ bandhati etthāti vā kāco. Duvidhampi hi padamicchanti saddavidū. Khāribharitanti khārīhi paripuṇṇaṃ. Ekena vi-kārena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘khārivividha’’nti paṭhantānaṃ vāde samuccayasamāsena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘ye panā’’tiādimāha.
难道说,对已受具足戒的比丘来说,任何一个未受具足戒的人,实际上都只是侍者而已,就连漏尽沙弥也不例外,那对外道出家者就更不用说了。为了回应这个追问、显示其中的差别,才说了“诚然……”等话。所谓“依前述方式”,就是依照前面所说的“通过做净……中略……履行义务的方式”。因为具足戒的身份是通过受持数十万种律仪而显得殊胜,所以即使是漏尽沙弥,也被说成是凡夫比丘的侍者。巴利
Nanu upasampannassa bhikkhuno sāsanikopi yo koci anupasampanno atthato paricārakova hoti api khīṇāsavasāmaṇero, kimaṅgaṃ pana bāhirakapabbajiteti anuyogaṃ pati tattha visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘kappiya…pe… vattakaraṇavasenā’’ti evaṃ vuttanayena. Anekasatasahassasaṃvaravinayasamādānavasena upasampannabhāvassa visiṭṭhabhāvato khīṇāsavasāmaṇeropi puthujjanabhikkhuno paricārakoti vutto.
九千俱胝,还有八十百俱胝;
五百万,另外还有三十六。
这些律仪戒,是正自觉者所开示的。
通过略说方式所开示的,就是律仪戒中的修学。巴利
‘‘Navakoṭisahassāni, asītisatakoṭiyo; Paññāsasatasahassāni, chattiṃsa ca punāpare; Ete saṃvaravinayā, sambuddhena pakāsitā; Peyyālamukhena niddiṭṭhā, sikkhā vinayasaṃvare’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.20; apa. aṭṭha. 2.55; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.2.37);
像这样,通过受学、持守上面所说的各种不同种类的几十万种律仪戒,而达到超越、最上的成就,这就叫具足戒。而这位凡夫比丘,正是依靠这种具足戒,才成为具足戒者。巴利
Evaṃ vuttappabhedānaṃ anekasatasahassānaṃ saṃvaravinayānaṃ samādāya sikkhanena uparibhūtā aggabhūtā sampadāti hi upasampadā, tāya cesa upasampadāya puthujjanabhikkhu upasampannoti.
这里说的“此”,就是指前面描述过的那种苦行者。苦行者是主张业论和行论的人,并不是教法的对立者,因此他们来出家时,律藏《犍度》中允许不必经过外道别住就可以直接出家。他们具有苦行,所以叫“苦行者”,是把ta这个音读成长音。就像“Lomasā”等词一样,语言学家们认为它是带有词缀的。这里要说明的是:即使是一位漏尽沙弥,实质上也是凡夫比丘的侍者,但他只是通过履行义务来当侍者,并不是以低劣的身份。而苦行者则无论在德行上还是在提供服务上,都是以低劣的身份来当侍者,不是仅仅通过履行义务。正是针对他们之间的这种差别,才说只有苦行者具有侍者的身份。巴利
Ayaṃ panāti yathāvuttalakkhaṇo tāpaso. Tāpasā hi kammavādikiriyavādino, na sāsanassa paṭāṇībhūtā, yato nesaṃ pabbajitumāgatānaṃ vināva titthiyaparivāsena khandhake pabbajjā anuññātā. Tapo etesamatthīti tāpasā ta-kārassa dīghaṃ katvā. ‘‘Lomasā’’tiādīsu viya hi sa-paccayamicchanti saddavidū. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kāmaṃ khīṇāsavopi sāmaṇero puthujjanassa bhikkhuno atthato paricārakova hoti, so pana vattakaraṇamatteneva paricārako, na lāmakabhāvena. Tāpaso tu guṇavasena ceva veyyāvaccakaraṇavasena ca lāmakabhāveneva paricārako, na vattakaraṇamattena, evamimesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ sandhāya tāpasasseva paricārakatā vuttāti.
“为什么”等话,是质问者在质问原因。“因为”等话,是导师先显示原因再回答。为了把这样简略回答的含义展开说明,才说了“于此中”等话。“不能”是指没有能力而行为不正、不知羞耻的人。“如刀刃之喻”是指只能踩在刀刃尖上行走的譬喻。“为众人所认可”是指被大众认可为最上。“其他”是指别的比丘。“此处”是指在苦行者的出家法中。“随欲而行”就是随心所欲而行,也就是随自己的意愿去做。“随学”是指跟着所见的样子去学。苦行者是很多的,而不是比丘。巴利
‘‘Kasmā’’tiādinā codako kāraṇaṃ codeti. ‘‘Yasmā’’tiādinā ācariyo kāraṇaṃ dassetvā pariharati. Evaṃ saṅkhepato pariharitamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘imasmiñhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asakkontanti asamatthanena vippaṭipajjantaṃ alajjiṃ. Khuradhārūpamanti khuradhārānaṃ matthakeneva akkamitvā gamanūpamaṃ. Bahujanasammatāti mahājanena seṭṭhasammatā. Aññeti apare bhikkhū. Idhāti tāpasapabbajjāya. Chandena saha carantīti sachandacārino, yathākāmaṃ paṭipannakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anusikkhantoti diṭṭhānugatiyā sikkhanto. Tāpasāva bahukā honti, na bhikkhū.
“锄头篮”的解释前面已经说过了。“为了欺骗众人”的意思是让很多人感到惊奇。“火堂”就是火供堂。“以种种薪木”就是用吉祥树枝等各种木柴。“以作供养”就是指做祭祀。巴利
Kudālapiṭakānaṃ nibbacanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Bahujanakuhāpanatthanti bahuno janassa vimhāpanatthaṃ . Aggisālanti aggihuttasālaṃ. Nānādārūhīti palāsarukkhadaṇḍādīhi nānāvidhasamidhādārūhi. Homakaraṇavasenāti yaññakaraṇavasena.
这里因为水的缘故,所以设了饮水堂。因此说“准备好饮用水”等等。所谓“或者饭团,或者米等”,这是连接关系。所谓“酸粥”,就是混了酪浆等酸味的粥。衣服等物因为能被贪爱等接触,所以叫“利养”。所谓“以增长”,就是两倍、三倍地增长。“安立家产”,就是建立财富。为了在圣典里只是举例说明前面所说的意思,所以说“而这是他的行门”,意思是说,这段圣典的话只是第四种人诈现行径的入门而已。为什么呢?因为他用种种诈现,让世人惊奇,就待在那里。因此说“以此……”等等。就是这样,按照“在那里准备好饮用水”等等所说的方式。巴利
Udakavasenettha pānāgāraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Yaṃ bhattapuṭaṃ vā yāni taṇḍulādīni vāti sambandho. Ambilayāgu nāma takkādiambilasaṃyuttā yāgu. Taṇhādīhi āmasitabbato cīvarādi āmisaṃ nāma. Vaḍḍhiyāti diguṇatiguṇādivaḍḍhiyā. Kuṭumbaṃ saṇṭhapetīti dhanaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ nidassanamattena vuttanti āha ‘‘idaṃ panassa paṭipattimukha’’nti, idaṃ pana pāḷivacanaṃ assa catutthassa puggalassa kohaññapaṭipattiyā mukhamattanti attho. Kasmāti ce? So hi nānāvidhena kohaññena lokaṃ vimhāpayanto tattha acchati. Tenāha ‘‘iminā hī’’tiādi. Evanti ‘‘tattha pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’tiādinā vuttanayena.
“一切苦行出家都已说明”,这是按法的立场展示的;为了再按人的立场把它开显出来,才说了“确实有八种”等话。在谷堆等处,走到人跟前站着,按乞食的规矩把稻谷、绿豆、芝麻等收拢来,这种拾取就叫拾取;这种行持就是他们的生活方式,所以叫拾取行者。靠火烤过的食物乞食活命,就是火烤食者;不是火烤食者,就不是火烤食者,意思是只靠乞来的米活命。拾取行者是走到谷堆等处,站在人跟前,接受人们给的所谓谷堆上的谷物;而非火烤食者则不接受那样的东西,只接受米,这就是他们的区别。不自己煮食,所以叫非自煮者,靠已煮好的乞食活命。像铁一样、坚硬般、拳头大小的石头,叫铁拳,靠它过活,所以叫铁拳行者。用牙齿咬剥下来的树皮,也就是树的外皮,叫齿树皮,靠它过活,所以叫齿树皮行者。以戒行吃从树上等地方掉下来的果实,叫受用落果者。枯黄落叶这个词,按省略并列项的用法有两种意思:一是因衰老而枯黄的叶子,二是因老熟而与它相似的花果等。因此下文会说“自己吃自然掉落的花果枯叶等来维持”,靠这个过活的人就叫枯黄落叶行者,也就是吃自然掉落的叶、花、果的人。现在为了把这八种的具体样子显示出来,才说了“其中”等话。可依《犍度释》中计尼亚螺髻的故事来了解。巴利
‘‘Sabbāpi tāpasapabbajjā niddiṭṭhā’’ti dhammādhiṭṭhānanayena dassitameva puggalādhiṭṭhānanayena vivarituṃ ‘‘aṭṭhavidhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khalādīsu manussānaṃ santike upatiṭṭhitvā vīhimuggamāsatilādīni bhikkhācariyaniyāmena saṅkaḍḍhitvā uñchanaṃ uñchā, sā eva cariyā vutti etesanti uñchācariyā. Aggipakkikāya bhattabhikkhāya jīvantīti aggipakkikā, na aggipakkikā anaggipakkikā, taṇḍulabhikkhāya eva jīvikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Uñchācariyā hi khalādīni gantvā upatiṭṭhitvā manussehi diyyamānaṃ khalaggaṃ nāma dhaññaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, anaggipakkikā pana tādisamapaṭiggaṇhitvā taṇḍulameva paṭiggaṇhantīti ayametesaṃ viseso. Na sayaṃ pacantīti asāmapākā, pakkabhikkhāya eva jīvikā. Ayo viya kaṭṭhino muṭṭhippamāṇo pāsāṇo ayamuṭṭhi nāma, tena vattantīti ayamuṭṭhikā. Dantena uppāṭitaṃ vakkalaṃ rukkhattaco dantavakkalaṃ, tena vattantīti dantavakkalikā. Pavattaṃ rukkhādito pātāpitaṃ phalaṃ bhuñjanti sīlenāti pavattaphalabhojino. Paṇḍupalāsasaddassa ekasesanayena dvidhā attho, jiṇṇatāya paṇḍubhūtaṃ palāsañceva jiṇṇapakkabhāvena taṃsadisaṃ pupphaphalādi cāti. Tena vakkhati ‘‘sayaṃ patitāneva pupphaphalapaṇḍupalāsādīni khādantā yāpentī’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.280) tena vattantīti paṇḍupalāsikā, sayaṃpatitapaṇṇapupphaphalabhojino. Idāni te aṭṭhavidhepi sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Keṇiyajaṭilavatthu khandhakavaṇṇanāya (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300) gahetabbaṃ.
把(食物)收集起来,是指按照乞食的规矩,把东西归拢到一处。巴利
Saṅkaḍḍhitvāti bhikkhācariyāvasena ekajjhaṃ katvā.
“米施食”就是拿米本身当施食。所谓“施食”(bhikkhā),意思是应当施与、应当乞求,或者“这是属于比丘们的东西”,所以“施食”这个词也固定用在了米等食物上。因此说“煮好之后吃”。巴利
Taṇḍulabhikkhanti taṇḍulameva bhikkhaṃ. Bhikkhitabbā yācitabbā, bhikkhūnaṃ ayanti vā bhikkhāti hi bhikkhāsaddo taṇḍulādīsupi niruḷho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pacitvā paribhuñjantī’’ti.
所谓“乞食的寻求是苦”,意思是:从别人的家走到另一家去乞求食物,这种寻求因为属于低劣的谋生方式,所以是苦。巴利
Bhikkhāpariyeṭṭhi nāma dukkhāti paresaṃ gehato gehaṃ gantvā bhikkhāya pariyesanā nāma dīnavuttibhāvena dukkhā.
不过,有些人说“出家人占有石头是苦”,于是就用牙齿把树皮咬剥下来吃,这些人就叫“齿树皮行者”。这是注释书之外的一种说法。巴利
Ye pana ‘‘pāsāṇassa pariggaho nāma dukkho pabbajitassā’’ti danteheva uppāṭetvā khādanti, te dantavakkalikā nāmāti ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāmuttakanayo.
“枯黄落叶”这个词也涉及花和果,这是通过相似假立来说明的;这一点由“花果枯黄落叶等”这句话显示出来。巴利
Paṇḍupalāsasaddo pupphaphalavisayopi sadisatākappanenāti dasseti ‘‘pupphaphalapaṇḍupalāsādīnī’’ti iminā.
“他们”指的是枯黄落叶行者。这只是举例,因为其他人也同样有这类差别。在“应到达处”中,就是应当证得的地方。在“于一树下”中,就是从最初所到的那棵树。巴利
Teti paṇḍupalāsikā. Nidassanamattametaṃ aññesampi tathā bhedasambhavato. Pāpuṇanaṭṭhāneti gahetuṃ sampāpuṇanaṭṭhāne. Ekarukkhatoti paṭhamaṃ upagatarukkhato.
“如果这样,那岂不是一切苦行出家都已经说明了吗?”这个责难还没有澄清,所以他说“然而这些……”等等。只有四种,也就是依据“挑着隐士器物的担子”等所说的:受用落果者、受用块根果实者、事火者、在家者——只有这四种苦行出家。在家者,就是以家作为住处而趋入。因为凭这句“造了四门的家而住”等,就显示出这里所说的第四种苦行出家是他们的界限。其余的也应当按相反的顺序配合来理解。事火者,就是以侍奉火的方式趋入火堂。这样说明他们的界限时,应当看出,这是依照相应的顺序,显示这些人也各有两种。巴利
Kathamettāvatā sabbāpi tāpasapabbajjā niddiṭṭhāti codanā na tāva visodhitāti āha ‘‘imā panā’’tiādi. Catūhiyevāti ‘‘khārividhamādāyā’’tiādinā vuttāhi pavattaphalabhojanikā, kandamūlaphalabhojanikā, agyāgārikā, āgārikā ceti catūhi eva tāpasapabbajjāhi. Agāraṃ bhajantīti agāraṃ nivāsabhāvena upagacchanti. Iminā hi ‘‘catudvāraṃ agāraṃ karitvā acchatī’’tiādinā idha vuttāya catutthāya tāpasapabbajjāya tesamavarodhataṃ dasseti. Evamitaresupi paṭilomato yojanā veditabbā. Aggiparicaraṇavasena agyāgāraṃ bhajanti. Evaṃ pana tesamavarodhataṃ vadanto tadanurūpaṃ imesampi paccekaṃ duvidhataṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
281 281. 因为与老师沸伽罗娑帝一起行事,所以称为“有老师者”,这属于他。“也是恶趣之门”指毁灭的原因。更何况在明行圆满上显现呢?“也”这个字表示责备。因此说:“你难道能在这无上的明行圆满上显现为有老师者吗?”等等。在这里,这是注释书之外的理路——先用“不,贤者乔达摩!”拒绝显现,然后为了说明不显现的方式,而说“我是谁?”等等。我是有老师者,我是谁?我变成什么样,能在无上的明行圆满上显现?无上的明行圆满又是什么?变成什么样,能在有老师者的我身上显现?我远离……中略……有老师者——这是依照带随伴读法来连接的。巴利
281. Ācariyena pokkharasātinā saha pavattatīti sācariyako, tassa. Apāyamukhampīti vināsakāraṇampi. Pageva vijjācaraṇasampadāya sandissaneti pi-saddo garahāyaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘api nu tvaṃ imāya anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya sandissasi sācariyako’’tiādi. Tatrāyamaṭṭhakathāmuttakanayo – ‘‘no hidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti sandissanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā asandissanākārameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ko cāha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sācariyako ahaṃ ko ca kīdiso hutvā anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya sandissāmi, anuttarā vijjācaraṇasampadā kā ca kīdisā hutvā sācariyake mayi sandissati, ārakā ahaṃ…pe… sācariyakoti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā.
282 282. “堕恶趣者”是指被恶趣、毁灭之道所束缚的人。他不能圆满那种状态,无法使之圆满,所以叫“不圆满者”;意思就是他的那种状态不圆满。虽然他自己就是堕恶趣者,却未能圆满那种状态,沸伽罗娑提说了这句话;由于意义上相关联,这里用主格,是为了表达“施事者”的含义,所以说“也由堕恶趣者、不圆满者”。再者,虽然他自己不圆满、是堕恶趣者,也就是说,他自己成了不圆满的堕恶趣者,沸伽罗娑提说了这句话;从意义上说,这里用主格,是在表达“如此状态”这一特征,所以也这样说。因为词序是一回事,义序是另一回事。不过有些人说:“这样说只是为了显示‘施事者’的含义。”这种说法并不妥当,因为这两个词与表示行为者的词意义相同,而意义相同的词互相之间不可能有“所作”的关系。不必过度推究了。巴利
282. Apāye vināsanupāye niyutto āpāyiko. Tabbhāvaṃ na paripūreti paripūretuṃ na sakkotīti aparipūramāno, tabbhāvena aparipuṇṇoti attho. Attanā āpāyikena hontenāpi tabbhāvaṃ aparipūramānena pokkharasātinā esā vācā bhāsitāti atthato sambandhattā katvatthe cetaṃ paccattavacananti āha ‘‘āpāyikenāpi aparipūramānenā’’ti. Apica attanā aparipūramānena āpāyikenāpi sayaṃ aparipūramānāpāyikena hutvāpi pokkharasātinā esā vācā bhāsitāti atthayuttito itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ paccattavacanantipi evaṃ vuttaṃ. Añño hi saddakkamo, añño atthakkamoti. Keci pana ‘‘karaṇatthameva dassetuṃ evaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti, tadayuttameva padadvayassa kattupadena samānatthattā, samānatthānañca padānaṃ aññamaññaṃ karaṇabhāvānupapattito, alamatipapañcena.
先前的仙人修行状态的解释巴利
Pubbakaisibhāvānuyogavaṇṇanā
283 “被给予”就是 datti,而它本身就是 dattika,所以说“已给予的”。即使本来不想给,也让他变得想给,当面使他转变、令他迷惑,因此叫“当面回转”。所以说“没办法说‘我不给’”。再说“他的”,指的是那位婆罗门的。与理由相称的国王们的满钵,所以说“为什么给我”。螺白斑麻风,就是像洗净的白螺那样白色的斑麻风。因为身体和白莲、白银在功德上相似,所以这样说。“跟随”就是紧紧追随。巴利
283. Dīyateti datti, sā eva dattikanti āha ‘‘dinnaka’’nti. Adātukāmampi dātukāmaṃ katvā sammukhā paramāvaṭṭeti sammūḷhaṃ karoti etāyāti sammukhāvaṭṭanī. Tenāha ‘‘na demīti vattuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Puna tassāti brāhmaṇassa. Kāraṇānurūpaṃ rājūnaṃ puṇṇapattanti āha ‘‘kasmā medinno’’ti. Saṅkhapalitakuṭṭhanti dhotasaṅkhamiva setakuṭṭhaṃ. Setapokkhararajatato guṇasamānakāyattā evamāha. Anugacchatīti paramanubandhati.
如果国王因为这两种理由,都不让婆罗门当面见到自己,那为什么不干脆拒绝他前来亲近呢?所以接着就说“然而因为……”等话。“所谓田明,就是政事论”,这是导师说的。在上面的《梵网经》注释里也这样说过:“田明,就是关于降伏未降伏者、关于王政等的政事论。”在这里,布是用作帷幕的。因此说“站在布幕围墙之内”。而“anta”这个词,当它在这种复合词中扩展时,就像“vananta”那样,有“布幕之内”的意思。“已出发,就是带着信心,或者指常论者。因此说‘带来之后给予’”,这是导师说的。所以应当理解为:无论是用“亡者供食”这个简称,还是用“常供”这个简称,指的都是带来之后给予的食物。“然而这个……”等话,是说明义理必然如此。“确定”就是决定。那么,世尊为什么对这位婆罗门说出这样不中听、刺人心的话呢?为了显示理由并澄清这个责难,才说了“然而这个……”等话。连秘密的、隐藏的、刺人心的话也揭示出来,这就是其中的关联。巴利
Yadi duvidhenapi kāraṇena rājā brāhmaṇassa sammukhābhāvaṃ na deti, atha kasmā tadupasaṅkamanaṃ na paṭikkhittanti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Khettavijjāyāti nītisatthe’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.283) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhāpi brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘khettavijjāti abbheyyamāsurakkharājasatthādinītisattha’’nti. (Dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.21) dussamettha tirokaraṇiyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sāṇipākārassa anto ṭhatvā’’ti. Antasaddena pana tabbhāvena pade vaḍḍhiyamāne dussantaṃ yathā ‘‘vananto’’ti. ‘‘Payātanti saddhaṃ, sassatikaṃ vā. Tenāha abhiharitvā dinna’’nti ācariyena vuttaṃ, tasmā matakabhattasaṅkhepena vā niccabhattasaṅkhepena vā abhiharitvā dinnaṃ bhikkhanti attho veditabbo. ‘‘Ayaṃ panā’’tiādi atthāpattivacanaṃ. Niṭṭhanti nicchayaṃ. Kasmā pana bhagavā brāhmaṇassa evarūpaṃ amanāpaṃ mammavacanaṃ avocāti codanaṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetvā sodhetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rahassampi paṭicchannampi mammavacanaṃ pakāsesīti sambandho.
284 284. 所谓“王座”,是指大象肩部那个位置,经文中因此说“或坐在象颈上”。“在车座上”,指车上方铺好坐垫的地方。所以说“在车上”等等。“由极高贵者”,意思是由高贵之中最为高贵者。因为并列复合词不被世俗学者所认可。国王的后代叫“王族”,这是就多数而言,或者按省略其余、只举其一的方式,所以说“由王族们”。“公开的商议”,就是公开进行的商议。这里指的正是这种,而不是秘密商议,因为希望连首陀罗等人也能听到。因此说“这时如果有首陀罗或首陀罗奴仆前来”等等。“与那样的人”,就是与国王举止相似的人。国王所说能成就此义的话是怎样的,他也同样能说出成就此义的话——应当这样连接理解。巴利
284. Rājāsanaṃ nāma hatthikkhandhapadesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘hatthigīvāya vā nisinno’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Rathūpatthareti rathassa upari attharitapadese. Tenāha ‘‘rathamhī’’tiādi. Uggatuggatehīti uggatānamatisayena uggatehi. Na hi vicchāsamāso lokikehi abhimatoti. Rañño apaccaṃ rājañño, bahukattaṃ pati, ekasesanayena vā ‘‘rājaññehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pākaṭamantananti pakāsabhūtaṃ mantanaṃ. Tadevidhādhippetaṃ, na rahassamantanaṃ suddādīhipi suyyamānassa icchitattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha āgaccheyya suddo vā suddadāso vā’’tiādi. Tādisehiyevāti rañño ākārasadiseheva. Tassatthassa sādhanasamatthaṃ vacanaṃ raññā bhaṇitaṃ yathā, tathā sopi tassatthassa sādhanasamatthameva bhaṇitaṃ vacanaṃ apinu bhaṇatīti yojetabbaṃ.
285 “宣说者”这个词,从圣典用语的角度来说,字面意思就是“说者”。不过,因为他们这样成了咒语的宣说者,所以为了显示其内在意图上的含义,就说成“令宣说者”。以 vada 词根加上 hi、tup 后缀,就构成了“vattāro”这个词的形式;同样,以 vatu 词根构成了“pavattayitāro”这个词的形式。这是导师(《长部》注疏 1.285)和身为导师的舍利弗长老的意见。也有人说,仅以 vatu 词根就显示了“pavattāro”这个词的成立。由于两个词是同格关系,所以说“即是咒语”。“将首陀罗排除在外,以应当秘密言说的含义,咒语本身即是因通达种种义理而成为文句”,这是同格关系;因未受具足戒者不得共许,以秘密性而应被说的商议行为,其文句是通达义理的方便,所以称为咒语句,这是注释书之外的理解方法。歌咏,就是以歌唱的方式诵习,而这里的歌唱,正是以成就高音、低音等音声为所指,因此说“以音声成就”。从圣典用语的角度,是他人所说的。那是为了让他人论说而教授读诵的。汇集之后,以层层累积的方式综合而成。以梨俱吠陀、夜柔吠陀、娑摩吠陀等,其中又各以咒语、梵书等,以及以章节、分卷等而集成。就是如此。所谓“令他人随诵他人所诵习的”,是指作为受词的他者被他们教授读诵的咒语句,如今的婆罗门又令其他人随之诵习。巴利
285.‘‘Pavattāro’’ti etassa pāvacanabhāvena vattāroti saddato attho. Yasmā pana te tathābhūtā mantānaṃ pavattakā nāma, tasmā adhippāyato atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pavattayitāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Vadasaddena, hi tupaccayena ca ‘‘vattāro’’ti padasiddhi, tathā vatusaddena ‘‘pavattayitāro’’ti. Idaṃ ācariyassa (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.285) ca ācariyasāriputtattherassa ca mataṃ. Vatusaddeneva ‘‘pavattāro’’ti padasiddhiṃ dassetītipi keci vadanti. Padadvayassa tulyādhikaraṇattā ‘‘mantamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sudde bahi katvā raho bhāsitabbaṭṭhena mantā eva taṃ taṃ atthapaṭipattihetutāya pada’’nti hi tulyādhikaraṇaṃ hoti, anupanītāsādhāraṇatāya rahassabhāvena vattabbāya mantanakiriyāya padamadhigamupāyantipi mantapadanti aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo. Gītanti gāyanavasena sajjhāyitaṃ, gāyanampidha udattānudattādisarasampādanavaseneva adhippetanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sarasampattivasenā’’ti. Pāvacanabhāvena aññesaṃ vuttaṃ. Tamaññesaṃ vādāpanavasena vācitaṃ. Saṅgahetvā uparūpari saññūḷhāvasena samupabyūḷhaṃ. Iruvedayajuvedasāmavedādivasena, tatthāpi paccekaṃ mantabrahmādivasena, ajjhāyānuvākādivasena ca rāsikataṃ. Yathāvuttanayeneva piṇḍaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ. Aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācentīti aññesaṃ kammabhūtānaṃ tehi vācāpitaṃ mantapadaṃ etarahi brāhmaṇā aññesaṃ anuvācāpenti.
“他们的”是指那些咒语的作者。天眼通所带的随业趣生智,因为能直接看见,所以类似天眼;宿住随念智也同样类似天眼,因此这里说“以天眼”。所以应当这样理解:用天眼通所带的随业趣生智,观察众生业之自属等;再用类似天眼的宿住随念智,观察过去劫中婆罗门们诵咒和修定的做法。因为天眼通只以当下的色法为所缘,所以在这里直接说天眼并不合适。要与圣典相合,也就是与迦叶正自觉者所说的、依止轮回的言教相合,不与之相违。因为他们对依止还灭的义理并不能直接看见。他们以偈颂、长行等体裁,用梵语结集。其他后来者,与阿咤迦等不同,是后来在甘蔗王时代等出现的婆罗门。他们加入杀生等内容,就是在阿咤迦等所结集的咒语篇章中,到处添入依止杀生等烦恼的语句。他们使之相违背,就是像《经集·婆罗门法经》等所说的那样,因显示杂染之义而使其成为对立。“仙人”在这里只是举例,因为应当说“是仙人,或为仙性而修行者”。那么,为什么世尊在这里不顺着他们的承认让说法顺势而下呢?所以说“在此世尊……”等。“在此”,就是指“我学习那些咒语,而你却认为‘我是有导师的’”这句话所说的地方。不取承认,就是不像前面那样取承认,而是说:“阿摩昼,你怎么想?仅凭这样,你就是仙人,或为仙性而修行者,是有导师的吗?”不是的,乔达摩。巴利
Tesanti mantakattūnaṃ. Dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ, paccakkhato dassanaṭṭhena dibbacakkhusadisañca pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ato dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍena yathākammūpagañāṇena sattānaṃ kammassakatādīni ceva dibbacakkhusadisena pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena atītakappe brāhmaṇānaṃ mantajjhenavidhiñca oloketvāti attho gahetabbo. Rūpameva hi paccuppannaṃ dibbacakkhussa ārammaṇanti tamidha aṭṭhānagataṃ hoti. Pāvacanena saha saṃsanditvāti yaṃ kassapasammāsambuddhena vuttaṃ vaṭṭasannissitaṃ vacanaṃ, tena saha saṃsanditvā aviruddhaṃ katvā. Na hi tesaṃ vivaṭṭasannissito attho paccakkhato hoti. Ganthiṃsūti pajjagajjabandhavasena sakkatabhāsāya bandhiṃsu. Aparā pareti aṭṭhakādīhi aparā aññepi pare pacchimā okkākarājakālādīsu uppannā. Pāṇātipātādīni pakkhipitvāti aṭṭhakādīhi ganthitamantapadesveva pāṇātipātādikilesasannissitapadānaṃ tattha tattha pakkhipanaṃ katvā. Viruddhe akaṃsūti suttanipāte brāhmaṇadhammikasuttādīsu (su. ni. brāhmaṇadhammikasutta) āgatanayena saṃkilesikatthadīpanato paccanīkabhūte akaṃsu. Isīti nidassanamattaṃ. ‘‘Isi vā isitthāya paṭipanno vā’’ti hi vattabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha paṭiññāgahaṇavasena desanāsotapatitaṃ na karotīti āha ‘‘idha bhagavā’’tiādi. Idhāti ‘‘tyāhaṃ mante adhīyāmi, ‘sācariyako’ti tvaṃ maññasī’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne. Paṭiññaṃ aggahetvāti yathā heṭṭhā paṭiññā gahitā, tathā ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi ambaṭṭha, tāvatā tvaṃ bhavissasi isi vā isitthāya vā paṭipanno sācariyakoti, no hidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti evaṃ idha paṭiññaṃ aggahetvā.
286 “无腥臭”是指远离由烦恼不净所产生的恶臭。“无女人味”是指连女人一丝气味都无法忍受,因此远离女人味。“持尘垢”是指保持着自然的尘土、汗垢等尘垢。“城墙与男子守护”是指城墙的防护和男子的防护。在这里,用“无腥臭”显示这十位婆罗门的烦恼已被镇伏;用“无女人味、梵行者”显示他们独住;用“持尘垢”显示他们没有装饰打扮;用“住在山林、山麓”显示他们舍弃了人间聚落而住在僻静处;用“以林中树根果实为食而住”显示他们拒绝米饭、肉食等精美食物;用“当……”等语显示他们拒绝车乘;用“于一切方……”等语显示他们拒绝守护和防护。这样显示时,相对于追随邪行派的阿摩昼及其老师的生活方式,这些婆罗门的生活方式虽然属于正行派,但依圣律中的正行道来看,其实仍是邪行。他们怎么会有与苦行相应的修行呢?世尊用“他们如此……”等语呵责、降伏阿摩昼,这一点也由此阐明。这就是对后文经文的义理总摄。巴利
286.Nirāmagandhāti kilesāsucivasena vissagandharahitā. Anitthigandhāti itthīnaṃ gandhamattassapi avisahanena itthigandharahitā. Rajojalladharāti pakatirajasedādijalladharā. Pākārapurisaguttīti pākārāvaraṇaṃ, purisāvaraṇañca. Ettha pana ‘‘nirāmagandhā’’ti etena tesaṃ dasannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ vikkhambhitakilesataṃ dasseti, ‘‘anitthigandhā, brahmacārino’’ti ca etena ekavihāritaṃ, ‘‘rajojalladharā’’ti etena maṇḍanavibhūsanābhāvaṃ, ‘‘araññāyatane pabbatapādesu vasiṃsū’’ti etena manussūpacāraṃ pahāya vivittavāsaṃ, ‘‘vanamūlaphalāhārā vasiṃsū’’ti etena sālimaṃsodanādipaṇītāhāra paṭikkhepaṃ, ‘‘yadā’’tiādinā yānavāhanapaṭikkhepaṃ, ‘‘sabbadisāsū’’tiādinā rakkhāvaraṇapaṭikkhepaṃ. Evañca dassento micchāpaṭipadāpakkhikaṃ sācariyakassa ambaṭṭhassa vuttiṃ upādāya sammāpaṭipadāpakkhikāpi tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ vutti ariyavinaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ upādāya micchāpaṭipadāyeva. Kathañhi nāma te bhavissati sallekhapaṭipattiyuttatāti. ‘‘Evaṃ su te’’tiādinā bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṃ santajjento niggaṇhātītipi vibhāveti. Idañhi vakkhamānāya pāḷiyā piṇḍatthadassananti.
“布片”就是布条。“布束”就是布编成的辫子。“以缠裹物”是指用缠裹的布板,也就是用布缠裹做成的、像柔软肋骨一样的东西,这里是这个意思。“令剪”就是用剪刀剪断。“于已剪之毛”这里也是同样的道理。就像“诸比丘,不应令剪须”等文句里那样,kapu这个词是用来表示剪断的意思。“于适当之处”指颈部、头部、尾部等处。“毛”指生长在那些部位的毛发。因为伴随而行,或者按部位名称,称为“kuttavālā”。不过有些人把读法改成“vāḷayuttattā”,解释成“因为系有猛兽”,这是他们的错误,因为不顾经文。经文中说的是“以kuttavāla、以母马车”。“城周围”指城的四周。城墙下方做过白灰涂抹的地方,因为应当做在城的附近,又能起到辅助作用,所以称为“upakārikā”。这些是城的upakārikā,所以叫“城之upakārikā”,这是相对于王都而用阴性来表达。因此说“但在此……”等。“慧”指以疑惑为因而产生的、并非确定唯一的了知。为了显示后文说法增长的原因,说了“此世尊……”等。经文中“他以问题问我”指那个人以提问来考验我。“我以解答来清净”指我也以解答来清净他,应当知道这里的意思是随宜而说。巴利
Dussapaṭṭikā dussapaṭṭaṃ. Dussakalāpo dussaveṇī. Veṭhakehīti veṭhakapaṭṭakehi, dussehi saṃveṭhetvā katanamitaphāsukāhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kappetunti kattarikāya chindituṃ. Kappitavālehīti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Na bhikkhave massu kappāpetabba’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 275) viya hi kapusaddo chedane vattati. Yuttaṭṭhānesūti gīvāsīsavāladhīsu. Vālāti tesu ṭhānesu jāyamānā lomā. Sahacaraṇavasena, ṭhānīnāmena vā ‘‘kuttavālā’’ti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘vāḷayuttattā’’ti pāṭhaṃ kappetvā vāḷarūpayuttattāti atthaṃ vadanti, pāḷiyānapekkhanameva tesaṃ doso. ‘‘Kuttavālehi vaḷavārathehī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Samantānagaranti nagarassa samantato. Pākārassa adhobhāge katasudhākammaṃ ṭhānaṃ nagarassa samīpe kattabbato, upakārakaraṇato ca ‘‘upakārikā’’ti vuccati. Nagarassa upakārikā etāsanti nagarūpakārikāyo, rājadhānīapekkhāya itthiliṅganiddeso. Tenāha ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi. Matīti vicikicchāvasena anekaṃsikajānanā. Upari desanāya avaḍḍhakāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Pāḷiyaṃ so maṃ pañhenāti so jano maṃ pucchāvasena sodheyya. Ahaṃ veyyākaraṇena sodhessāmīti ahampimaṃ vissajjanāvasena sodhessāmīti yathārahamadhikāravasena attho veditabbo.
两种相见的解说巴利
Dvelakkhaṇadassanavaṇṇanā
287 “坐着”等说法,是对不恭敬者用的属格,或者是修饰语。因为在蜷缩的姿势中,诸相无法完全清晰地显现,所以说“不能”;而因为能清晰地显现,所以说“能”。应当知道,那时的习惯行为只是为了追求安乐。因此,就是由于这两种原因。巴利
287.‘‘Nisinnāna’’ntiādi anādare sāmivacanaṃ, visesanaṃ vā. Saṅkucite iriyāpathe anavasesato lakkhaṇānaṃ dubbibhāvanato ‘‘na sakkotī’’ti vuttaṃ, tathā suvibhāvanato pana ‘‘sakkotī’’ti. Pariyesanasukhatthameva tadāciṇṇatā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāti duvidhenapi kāraṇena.
“寻求”是指用智慧去寻求。“计算”是指用智慧去合计。“正确收集”是指正确地取来、汇集。“疑惑”这个词有“期望”的意思,所以论师说“啊,但愿……”等话。有时候,不带前缀的词也像带前缀的词一样表达特殊含义,比如“种姓”这个词。从各处,也就是从身体的各个部位。“疲惫”就是劳累。因此说“不能见”。以彼,也就是以所说的“寻思而疲惫”的那种疑惑。从此,也就是因为没有达到决定。这样显示了“疑惑”这个词的期望义之后,现在显示它的怀疑义,所以说“或以疑惑……”等。其中,“以疑惑”是指“疑惑”这个词所说的疑惑。动词词根主要不带前缀的含义而出现。其余的也是如此。处于不同阶段的犹豫,就是说为“以三法”,意思是以三种怀疑之法。浑浊性就是指因不清净而有的混浊状态。巴利
Gavesīti ñāṇena pariyesanamakāsi. Gaṇayantoti ñāṇeneva saṅkalayanto. Samānayīti sammā ānayi samāhari. ‘‘Kaṅkhatī’’ti padassa ākaṅkhatīti atthoti āha ‘‘aho vatā’’tiādi. Anupasaggampi hi padaṃ katthaci saupasaggamiva atthavisesavācakaṃ yathā ‘‘gotrabhū’’ti. Tato tato sarīrappadesato. Kicchatīti kilamati. Tenāha ‘‘na sakkoti daṭṭhu’’nti. Tāyāti ‘‘vicinanto kicchatī’’ti vuttāya vicikicchāya. Tatoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ agamanato. Evaṃ ‘‘kaṅkhatī’’ti padassa āsisanatthataṃ dassetvā idāni saṃsayatthataṃ dassento ‘‘kaṅkhāya vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kaṅkhāyāti ‘‘kaṅkhatī’’ti padena vuttāya kaṅkhāya. Asatvapadhānañhi ākhyātikaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Avatthāpabhedagatā vimati eva ‘‘tīhi dhammehī’’ti vuttā, tippakārehi saṃsayadhammehīti attho. Kālusiyabhāvoti appasannatāya hetubhūto āvilabhāvo.
所谓“以膀胱囊”,是指在脐下那个叫膀胱的部位长出来的阴茎包皮。就像“卵壳”等说法里一样,kosa这个词是用来指包裹在外面的囊袋。因为要用布遮住,所以叫“布密处”。世尊藏在囊里的布密处,是一切佛所共有的、不与其他任何人相同的,它像极为清净的金环一样,凭自身形状和构造的优美,就胜过良种香象身上最殊胜肢分的极可爱模样;又像绽放的红莲花那灿烂花蕊回旋的优美姿态;又像黄昏光芒映照在水云之间、显出圆满月轮的光辉那样庄严。由于内外垢秽都不能染污它,由于长久修习梵行的功德,由于形状安立圆满,所以它虽然本应隐藏,却成了不必隐藏的。因此说“世尊的……”等等。“如胜象”就是像良种香象一样。“广大性”就是宽广性。他的疑惑就在这里。至于柔软、细滑等功德,他根本没有去考察。巴利
Vatthikosenāti nābhiyā adhobhāgasaṅkhāte vatthimhi jātena liṅgapasibbakena. ‘‘Aṇḍakoso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.152, 189; 2.27; a. ni. 7.71; pārā. 11) viya hi kosasaddo pariveṭhakapasibbake vattati. Vatthena guhitabbattā vatthaguyhaṃ. Yasmā bhagavato kosohitaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ sabbabuddhāveṇikaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ suvisuddhakañcanamaṇḍalasannibhaṃ, attano saṇṭhānasannivesasundaratāya ājāneyyagandhahatthino varaṅgaparamacārubhāvaṃ, vikasamānatapaniyāravindasamujjalakesarāvattavilāsaṃ, sañjhāpabhānurañjitajalavanantarābhilakkhitasampuṇṇacandamaṇḍalasobhañca attano siriyā abhibhuyya virājati, yaṃ bāhirabbhantaramalehi anupakkiliṭṭhatāya, cirakālaparicitabrahmacariyādhikāratāya, saṇṭhitasaṇṭhānasampattiyā ca kopīnampi samānaṃ akopīnameva jātaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Varavāraṇassevāti varagandhahatthino iva. Pahūtabhāvanti puthulabhāvaṃ. Ettheva hi tassa saṃsayo. Tanumudusukumārādīsu panassa guṇesu vicāraṇā eva nāhosi.
288 “如是形”这个词是复合词,所以注释者说“彼形”。在这里,就像阿摩昼看见藏在囊中的密处那样,在作神通决意时也是如此。因为这里引用了“作如是神通决意”等经文,所以此处通过神通决意的方式,依据《弥兰陀问经》的文句,说明了显示密处的原因。但有些人引用为“在显示密处时”,这完全不对。因为经中和注释中都没有可以这样引用的内容,而且神通决意的方式也没有得到说明。这里何必还要用别的来说呢?应当接受具足四无碍解、六神通、论师之首的具寿那先长老所说的方式。在这里生起惭耻,所以是惭耻处,那正是这样的地方,是应当惭耻之处。“北方的”指《经集》中所说的北方青年。所有这些内容都应当从《经集》中取得。巴利
288. ‘‘Tathārūpa’’nti idaṃ samāsapadanti āha ‘‘taṃrūpa’’nti. Etthāti yathā ambaṭṭho kosohitaṃ vatthaguyhamaddassa, tathā iddhābhisaṅkhāramabhisaṅkharaṇe. Iminā hi ‘‘tathārūpaṃ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharī’’tiādipāḷiparāmasanaṃ, ato cettha saha iddhābhisaṅkhāranayena vatthaguyhadassanakāraṇaṃ milindapañhāpāṭhena (mi. pa. 3.3) vibhāvitaṃ hoti. Keci pana ‘‘vatthaguyhadassane’’ti parāmasanti, tadayuttameva. Na hi taṃ pāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyañca atthi, yaṃ evaṃ parāmasitabbaṃ siyā, iddhābhisaṅkhāranayo ca avibhāvito hoti. Kimettha aññena vattabbaṃ catupaṭisambhidāpattena chaḷabhiññena vādīvarena bhadantanāgasenattherena vuttanayeneva sampaṭicchitabbattā. Hirī karīyate etthāti hirikaraṇaṃ, tadeva okāso tathā, hiriyitabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Uttarassāti suttanipāte āgatassa uttaramāṇavassa (ma. ni. 2.384). Sabbesampi cetesaṃ vatthu suttanipātato gahetabbaṃ.
“影像”指的就是影像。为了说明“他是怎样示现的、示现的是什么样的影像”,所以经文说“以神通”等等。“仅仅是影像之形”的意思是:那只是世尊的影像之形,并不是他原本的身体和隐秘部位;而且,因为那影像已经脱离了佛陀的相续,所以它只是色法,是与世尊的色泽、形态、肢节相似的、由神通变化出来的影像而已。这样理解之后,用表示“仅仅”这个意思的音节“ka”来加以限定,就是合理的。“以神通造作出仅仅是影像之形,然后示现出来”,这就是句子的关联。老师们说:“然而,世尊在示现那个影像时,是让自己真正的佛身不显现出来,以这种方式示现的。”这与具寿那先长老所说的“示现由神通所造作的仅仅是影像之形”这句话完全吻合、完全一致,应当理解为就像“用乳配乳,用恒河水配耶牟那河水”那样。正是因为这样的说法,当时其他佛身没有被示现这一点,在意义上就已经成立了。而这里通过“穿着下衣”等说法,则表明:即使那影像已经脱离了佛陀的相续,它的下衣等部分也并没有露在外面。不应该这样责难:“世尊怎么能示现一个包含下衣等在内的影像?阿摩昼又怎么能看见?”因为神通的境界是不可思议的。“见了影像”就是“影像被看见之后”。“那个”就是指那个影像。意思是:如果对方是个能觉悟的人,世尊甚至连命根所依的心脏肉都会示现给他看。“引出”就是抽出来。或者这个读法本身就是对的。“你是能者”是在回答的时候说的,意思是:你善于回答、你精通回答,或者说,如上所说的回答方式你能够胜任、能够做到。有些人读作“你是善巧者”,那是不对的。因为在《弥兰陀问经》里,所有回答结束时,看到的都是“能者”这个词。巴利
Chāyanti paṭibimbaṃ. Kathaṃ dassesi, kīdisaṃ vāti āha ‘‘iddhiyā’’tiādi. Chāyārūpakamattanti bhagavato paṭibimbarūpakameva, na pakativatthaguyhaṃ, tañca buddhasantānato vinimuttattā rūpakamattaṃ bhagavatā sadisavaṇṇasaṇṭhānāvayavaṃ iddhimayaṃ bimbakameva hoti, evañca katvā appakatthena ka-kārena visesitavacanaṃ upapannaṃ hoti. Chāyārūpakamattaṃ iddhiyā abhisaṅkharitvā dassesīti sambandho. ‘‘Taṃ pana dassento bhagavā yathā attano buddharūpaṃ na dissati, tathā katvā dassetī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.288) ācariyā vadanti. Tadetaṃ bhadantanāgasenattherena vuttena iddhābhisaṅkhatachāyārūpakamattadassanavacanena saṃsandati ceva sameti ca yathā taṃ ‘‘khīrena khīraṃ, gaṅgodakena yamunodaka’’nti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathāvacaneneva hi sesabuddharūpassa taṅkhaṇe adassitabhāvo atthato āpanno hoti. Nivāsananivatthatādivacanena panettha buddhasantānato vinimuttassapi chāyārūpakassa nivāsanādiabahigatabhāvo dassito, na ca codetabbaṃ ‘‘kathaṃ nivāsanādiantaragataṃ chāyārūpakaṃ bhagavā dasseti, kathañca ambaṭṭho passatī’’ti. Acinteyyo hi iddhivisayoti. Chāyaṃ diṭṭheti chāyāya diṭṭhāya. Etanti chāyārūpakaṃ. Bujjhanake sati jīvitanimittampi hadayamaṃsaṃ dasseyyāti adhippāyo. Ninnetvāti nīharitvā. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Kallosīti vissajjane tvaṃ kusalo cheko asi, yathāvutto vā vissajjanāmaggo upapanno yutto asīti attho. ‘‘Kusalo’’ti keci paṭhanti, ayuttametaṃ. Milindapañhe hi sabbattha vissajjanāvasāne ‘‘kallo’’ icceva diṭṭhoti.
把舌头从嘴里伸出来,让它朝向耳孔等方向伸展,这就是“伸出来”的意思。为了点明他的用意,所以接着说“引出来之后”。所谓“像硬针一样”,是说让舌头变得又结实又细密,就像一根坚硬的针。所谓“通过那样的做法”,就是通过像做硬针那样的方式。所谓“在这里”,是指在广长舌上。柔软、长、薄这三种性质被显示出来,是因为如果不柔软,就不可能让舌头变得又结实又细密——这是论师(《长部注疏》1.288)说的。这里的用意是这样的:正因为只有柔软的舌头才能变得又结实又细密,所以通过那样的做法显示了柔软性,就像通过烟知道有火一样。又因为只有柔软的舌头在变得又结实又细密之后才能伸得很长,所以通过触及耳孔显示了长性。又因为只有柔软的舌头在变得又结实又细密之后才能变得很薄,所以通过触及鼻孔显示了薄性。至于不宽大的舌头,因为不可能那样覆盖住,所以通过覆盖额头显示了宽大性。巴利
Ninnāmetvāti mukhato nīharaṇavasena kaṇṇasotādiabhimukhaṃ paṇāmetvā, adhippāyameva dassetuṃ ‘‘nīharitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kathinasūciṃ viyāti ghanasukhumabhāvāpādanena kakkhaḷasūcimiva katvā. Tathākaraṇenāti kathinasūciṃ viya karaṇena. Etthāti pahūtajivhāya. Mudubhāvo, dīghabhāvo, tanubhāvo ca dassito amuduno ghanasukhumabhāvāpādanatthamasakkuṇeyyattāti ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.288) vuttaṃ. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yasmā mudumeva ghanasukhumabhāvāpādanatthaṃ sakkoti, tasmā tathākaraṇena mudubhāvo dassito aggi viya dhūmena. Yasmā ca muduyeva ghanasukhumabhāvāpajjanena dīghagāmi, tasmā kaṇṇasotānumasanena dīghabhāvo dassito. Yasmā pana mudu eva ghanasukhumabhāvāpajjanena tanu hoti, tasmā nāsikāsotānumasanena tanubhāvo dassitoti. Aputhulassa tathāpaṭicchādanatthamasakkuṇeyyattā nalāṭacchādanena puthulabhāvo dassito.
289 应当把“期望者”和“注视者”结合起来理解。巴利
289. Patthento hutvā udikkhantoti yojetabbaṃ.
290 根本语是谈论,应答语是对话。巴利
290. Mūlavacanaṃ kathā. Paṭivacanaṃ sallāpo.
291 在“膨胀相”等词里,就像《相应部》和《清净道论》中那样,“ka”这个音节是表示厌恶的意思,所以说“正是厌恶那个”。“正是那个”指的就是那种智者的状态,也可以指阿摩昼本人。因为这句话就是针对阿摩昼说的。经中确实这样说过:“……对阿摩昼青年说了这样的话。”虽然这话是针对阿摩昼说的,但要知道,世尊呵责时并不限定于某个名字或族姓,而是用复数来表达。对于“Yadeva kho tva”nti这个不限定语,以“evarūpenā”ti这个限定语来说明,通过“yādiso”等词来显示。在“bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe”这个处格义中,是具格语,所以说“edise atthacarake”。“Na aññatrāti”的意思是:不在别处,即不在善趣。在这里,通过“atthacarakenā”ti这个词,以相反的方式说明了非利益行为者。“Upaneyya upaneyyā”ti这个以tvā等结尾的词是分别语,所以说“brāhmaṇo kho panā”ti等。这样一再带来、一再带来,就是一再带来那种种过失。因此说“suṭṭhu dāsādibhāvaṃ āropetvā”。“Pātesīti”的意思是:以堕落的方式使其坠落。而他所去之处,也截断了他那被称为如去之处的状态,这样连接。巴利
291. ‘‘Uddhumātaka’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.242; visuddhi. 1.102) viya ka-saddo jigucchanatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘tameva jigucchanto’’ti. Tamevāti paṇḍitabhāvameva, ambaṭṭhamevātipi attho. Ambaṭṭhañhi sandhāya evamāha. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ…pe… ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ etadavocā’’ti. Kāmañca ambaṭṭhaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ, nāmagottavasena pana aniyamaṃ katvā garahanto puthuvacanena vadatīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Yadeva kho tva’’nti etassa aniyamavacanassa ‘‘evarūpenā’’ti idaṃ niyamavacananti dasseti ‘‘yādiso’’tiādinā. Bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe bhummavacanatthe karaṇavacananti vuttaṃ ‘‘edise atthacarake’’ti. Na aññatrāti na aññattha sugatiyaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘atthacarakenā’’ti iminā byatirekamukhena anatthacarakataṃyeva vibhāvetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Upaneyya upaneyyā’’ti idaṃ tvādyantaṃ vicchāvacananti āha ‘‘brāhmaṇo kho panā’’tiādi. Evaṃ upanetvā upanetvāti taṃ taṃ dosaṃ upanīya upanīya. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhu dāsādibhāvaṃ āropetvā’’ti. Pātesīti pavaṭṭanavasena pātesi. Yañca agamāsi, tampi assa tathāgamanasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ acchinditvāti yojanā.
《沸伽罗娑罗婆罗门往见佛陀》的注释巴利
Pokkharasātibuddhūpasaṅkamanavaṇṇanā
292-3-6 292-3-6. 那么,“有多少时间”这句话,是针对“连说友善问候语的时间都没有”而说的。“Āgamā nu”就是“他来了吗”。“Kho”只是一个不变词。“Idha”在这里是“在您这里”的意思。“Adhivāsetu”就是“请接受”;不过这里的接受只是内心的领受,不是通过身体或言语,所以注释说“请应允”。“Kāranti”:恩惠,或尊敬。“Acopetvāti”:不使其动摇。“Ajja pavattamānaṃ ajjatanaṃ, puññaṃ, pītipāmojjañca, imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘yaṃ me’tiādi vuttaṃ.” 为了说明“当下正在发生的现世福业以及喜与悦”这个含义,所以说“凡我……”等语。巴利
292-3-6. Kittako pana soti vuttaṃ ‘‘sammodanīyakathāyapi kālo natthī’’ti. Āgamā nūti āgato nu. Khoti nipātamattaṃ. Idhāti ettha, tumhākaṃ santikanti attho. Adhivāsetūti sādiyatu, taṃ pana sādiyanaṃ idha manasāva sampaṭiggaho, na kāyavācāhīti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchatū’’ti. Ajja pavattamānaṃ ajjatanaṃ, puññaṃ, pītipāmojjañca, imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ me’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāranti upakāraṃ, sakkāraṃ vā. Acopetvāti acāletvā.
297 “Sahatthā”(亲手)这个词是表示工具格的从格形式。因此注释里说“sahatthena”(以亲手)。Suhita 的意思是已满足,或者因为没有饥渴之苦而安乐。Yāvadattha 的意思是尽其所需要,也就是当时用食物做到满足。这里指的是拒绝性的遮止,不是邀请性的遮止,所以说“ala”(够了)等等。“Hatthasaññāya”(以手示意)只是举例说明,因为在别处也提到用面部表情和言语来表示拒绝,而且在一刹那间也能那样拒绝。Onītapattapāṇi 的意思是“手已从钵移开的人”,这是一个异依主释复合词,由三个词构成的外在复合词。通过颚音和连缀音,oṇitta 一词表示分离,所以注释里说“也有 oṇittapattapāṇi 的读法”等等。或者,oṇitta 一词用于清净义。Oṇittapattapāṇi 就是指通过去除食物残渣而清净的钵和手。因此说“洗手和钵后”。《精义灯》中说:“Oṇitta 意为分离、分开,或通过去除食物残渣而清净的钵和手,即 oṇittapattapāṇi。”其中后一种说法与“洗手和钵后”不一致,应加以审察。Evaṃbhūta 的意思是“已食者、手已离钵者”,即如所说的那样存在。巴利
297.‘‘Sahatthā’’ti idaṃ karaṇatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sahatthenā’’ti. Suhitanti dhātaṃ, jighacchādukkhābhāvena vā sukhitaṃ. Yāvadatthanti yāva attho, tāva bhojanena tadā kataṃ. Paṭikkhepapavāraṇāvettha adhippetā, na nimantanapavāraṇāti āha ‘‘ala’’ntiādi. ‘‘Hatthasaññāyā’’ti nidassanamattaṃ aññattha mukhavikārena, vacībhedena ca paṭikkhepassa vuttattā , ekakkhaṇepi ca tathāpaṭikkhepassa labbhanato. Onītā pattato pāṇi etassāti onītapattapāṇīti bhinnādhikaraṇavisayo tipado bāhiratthasamāso. Muddhajaṇa-kārena, pana saññogata-kārena ca oṇittasaddo vinābhūteti dasseti ‘‘oṇittapattapāṇintipi pāṭho’’tiādinā. Sucikaraṇatthe vā oṇittasaddo. Oṇittaṃ āmisāpanayanena sucikataṃ pattaṃ pāṇi ca assāti hi oṇittapattapāṇi. Tenāha ‘‘hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā’’ti. ‘‘Oṇittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ vinābhūtaṃ, āmisāpanayanena vā sucikataṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti oṇittapattapāṇī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.23) sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha pacchimavacanaṃ ‘‘hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā’’ti iminā asaṃsandanato vicāretabbaṃ. Evaṃbhūtanti ‘‘bhuttāviṃ onītapattapāṇi’’nti vuttappakārena bhūtaṃ.
298 “次第说”是指应当按次第来讲说的教说。因此说“按顺序的教说”。那是什么呢?回答说“布施论之后是戒论”等等。由此可以明白这个意思:布施论首先应当讲,因为它在普通人中也普遍流行、是一切人所共有的、容易做到,而且是安立于戒的方便。因为具有舍离品性的人,由于对所占有的东西能放得下,就能轻松地受持诸戒,并在戒上稳稳地站住。在布施论之后应当讲戒论,因为戒能使施者和受者都清净,说的是饶益他人而遮止损恼他人,说的是作持法而遮止止持法,说的是财富成就之因之后又说生存成就之因。如果这布施和戒还系缚于轮回,为了显示这生存成就就是它的果报,所以在戒论之后讲生天论。通过它就这样显示:“以这些布施和戒律所成的、以及以殊胜更殊胜等差别区分的种种福行事,可以获得在四大王天等处、以殊胜更殊胜等差别区分的无量天界成就。”这天界被贪等所染污,为了显示完全不被它们染污的是圣道,所以在生天论之后讲道论。讲道的时候,为了显示证得那道的方法,应当讲诸欲的过患、卑劣、杂染,以及出离的功德。因为即使属于天界的一切欲,也都有很多过患、是无常的、不坚固的、是变易之法,更何况其他呢——这就是过患;一切欲都是低劣的、凡俗的、属于凡夫的、非圣者的、与利益相违的——这就是卑劣性;一切生存都是烦恼的所依——这就是杂染;与一切杂染分离的是涅槃——这就是出离的功德,应当这样讲说。应当知道这个意思也已经阐明了。在这里,“道”这个词中,通过“iti”这个音声,以“等”的含义,也把诸欲过患等收摄在内,这是义释。因此说“即如——布施论、戒论、生天论、诸欲的过患、卑劣、杂染、出离的功德,予以阐明”。详细的解释应当从《义释灯》中获取。巴利
298.Anupubbiṃ kathanti anupubbaṃ kathetabbaṃ kathaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘anupaṭipāṭikatha’’nti. Kā pana sāti āha ‘‘dānānantaraṃ sīla’’ntiādi, tenāyamattho bodhito hoti – dānakathā tāva pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā, sukarattā, sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca ādito kathetabbā. Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu vinissaṭabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti, sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakasuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathetabbā. Tañce dānasīlaṃ vaṭṭanissitaṃ, ayaṃ bhavasampatti tassa phalanti dassanatthaṃ sīlakathānantaraṃ saggakathā. Tāya hi evaṃ dassitaṃ hoti ‘‘imehi dānasīlamayehi, paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnehi ca puññakiriyavatthūhi etā cātumahārājikādīsu paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnā aparimeyyā dibbasampattiyo laddhabbā’’ti. Svāyaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho, sabbathā pana tehi anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggakathānantaraṃ maggakathā. Maggañca kathentena tadadhigamupāyadassanatthaṃ kāmānaṃ ādīnavo, okāro, saṃkileso, nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabbo. Saggapariyāpannāpi hi sabbe kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammā, pageva itareti ādīnavo, sabbepi kāmā hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasaṃhitāti lāmakabhāvo okāro, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti saṃkileso, sabbasaṃkilesavippayuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti. Ayampi attho bodhitoti veditabbo. Maggoti hi ettha iti-saddena ādyatthena kāmādīnavādīnampi saṅgahoti ayamatthavaṇṇanā katā. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathidaṃ – dānakathaṃ sīlakathaṃ saggakathaṃ kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsetī’’ti. Vitthāro sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 3.26) gahetabbo.
“迦尸”这个词是通过智来把握的,所以经文说“已把握”等等。用“自己”这个词,是为了显示应当排除的含义,也就是“不与其他共通的”。因为出世间法的证得不需要依靠他人的教导,而且他是世间唯一最先证得无上正等正觉的人,所以说“不与其他共通”。“法眼”在这里特指入流道,不像《梵摩经》那样指下面三道,也不像《小罗睺罗教诫经》那样指漏尽。为什么说“为了显示它生起的方式”呢?难道道智只以无为法为所缘,不以有为法为所缘吗?为了澄清这个质疑,所以说了“因为彼”等话。就作用而言,是指无痴通达的作用。巴利
Kasi-saddo ñāṇena gahaṇeti āha ‘‘gahitā’’tiādi. Sāmaṃsaddena nivattetabbamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘asādhāraṇā aññesa’’nti iminā, lokuttaradhammādhigame parūpadesavigatattā, ekeneva loke paṭhamaṃ anuttarāya sammāsambodhiyā abhisambuddhattā ca aññesamasādhāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammacakkhunti ettha sotāpattimaggova adhippeto, na brahmāyusutte (ma. ni. 2.383 ādayo) viya heṭṭhimā tayo maggā, na ca cūḷarāhulovādasutte (ma. ni. 3.416) viya āsavakkhayo. ‘‘Tassa uppattiākāradassanattha’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇameva, na saṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘tañhī’’tiādimāha. Kiccavasenāti asammohapaṭivedhakiccavasena.
沸伽罗娑罗婆罗门近事男身份的证悟告知的解说巴利
Pokkharasātiupāsakattapaṭivedanākathāvaṇṇanā
299 在巴利圣典中,“已见法者”等说法里,“见”除了指智见之外,还有眼识等其他种类的见。为了排除这种理解,所以说了“已证得法者”。而“证得”除了智的证得之外,还有身体到达等其他证得方式。为了显示这里的区别,所以说了“已了知法者”。然而这种“了知法性”也可能只是部分的,为了显示无余的了知法性,所以说了“已深入法者”,以此表明他正是圆满现观四谛。因为道智以一次现观就完成遍知等四种作用,所以它是无余地、全面地深入四谛之法。因此说:“以这个见圣谛之法,所以是已见法者。”不应该说:“怎么可能一个智在一个刹那中完成四种作用而运作呢?世间没见过这样的事,也没有这样的教说。”应当知道,就像一盏灯在同一个刹那中燃烧灯芯、耗尽灯油、驱散黑暗、又显示光明,这个智也应当这样理解。这里还应当引用经文:“与道相应者的智,这是关于苦的智,这是关于苦集的智,这是关于苦灭的智,这是关于趣向苦灭之道的智。”巴利
299. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo’’tiādīsu dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇato aññampi cakkhādidassanaṃ atthīti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘pattadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇapattito aññāpi kāyagamanādipatti vijjatīti tato visesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘viditadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panesā viditadhammatā ekadesatopi hotīti nippadesato viditadhammataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ, tenassa saccābhisambodhameva dīpeti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādicatukiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesena catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāḷhaṃ nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenāti diṭṭhadhammo’’ti. ‘‘Kathaṃ pana ekameva ñāṇaṃ ekasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri kiccāni sādhentaṃ pavattati. Na hi tādisaṃ loke diṭṭhaṃ, na āgamo vā tādiso atthī’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Yathā hi padīpo ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe vaṭṭiṃ dahati, snehaṃ pariyādiyati, andhakāraṃ vidhamati, ālokañcāpi dasseti, evametaṃ ñāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ dukkhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudayepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyapetaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (vibha. 794) suttapadampettha udāharitabbanti.
“度脱了疑惑”是指:他已经超越了像可怕荒野一样的十六事疑惑和八事疑惑。“消除了犹豫”是指:对于各种生起的情形,那种“是这样呢,还是不是呢”的犹豫,在他那里已经离去、被彻底断除。“达到了无畏的状态”是指:因为导致怯懦的恶法已被舍断,又因为善住于与之相反的戒等功德中,所以达到了、证得了无畏的状态,也就是明达自信。有人问:这无畏的证得、善住,究竟立足于何处?为了说明“在导师的教法中”这句话,所以接着说“在哪里?在导师的教法中”。因为是自己亲身现见、亲自证得的缘故,所以没有另一个需要相信的理由或对象,这就是其含义。对此的意趣,通过“不依他人”等语句来说明。“不存在”是指不存在、不进行,或者不依止他人、不依靠他人,因此“不依他人”也说得通。这里本应说而未说的内容,因为前面已说、后面将说,所以应知为未说。巴利
Tiṇṇā vicikicchāti sappaṭibhayakantārasadisā soḷasavatthukā, aṭṭhavatthukā ca vicikicchā anena vitiṇṇā. Vigatā kathaṃkathāti pavattiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho’’ti evaṃ pavattikā kathaṃkathā assa vigatā samucchinnā. Visāradabhāvaṃ pattoti sārajjakarānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahīnattā, tappaṭipakkhesu ca sīlādiguṇesu suppatiṭṭhitattā visāradabhāvaṃ veyyattiyaṃ patto adhigato. Sāyaṃ vesārajjappatti suppatiṭṭhitatā katthāti codanāya ‘‘satthusāsane’’ti vuttanti dassento ‘‘kattha? Satthusāsane’’ti āha. Attanāva paccakkhato diṭṭhattā, adhigatattā ca na assa paccayo paccetabbo paro atthīti attho. Tatthādhippāyamāha ‘‘na parassā’’tiādinā. Na vattatīti na pavattati, na paṭipajjati vā, na paraṃ pacceti pattiyāyatīti aparappaccayotipi yujjati. Yaṃ panettha vattabbampi avuttaṃ, tadetaṃ pubbe vuttattā, parato vuccamānattā ca avuttanti veditabbaṃ.
《吉祥悦意》是《长部》的注释,它阐明极为微细、甚深、难以理解的义理,能让人生起极清净、广大的智慧与明辨。这部名为《善悦美》的《隐蔽义开显》,是由一位大阿阇梨、大语法家所造,他的名为智幢法帅长老,为大王法王所尊崇。他具足正直、柔和、克制、信、念、定、慧、忍、精进等法,对三藏及其注释无滞无碍,以无畏之智自在游行,又善于深入通达自宗他宗种种盘根错节的义理。这部《善悦美》正是《阿摩昼经》注释的隐蔽义开显。巴利
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya paramasukhumagambhīraduranubodhatthaparidīpanāya suvimalavipulapaññāveyyattiyajananāya ajjavamaddavasoraccasaddhāsatidhitibuddhikhantivīriyādidhammasamaṅginā sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṅgāsaṃhīravisāradañāṇacārinā anekappabhedasakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhinā mahāgaṇinā mahāveyyākaraṇena ñāṇābhivaṃsadhammasenāpatināmattherena mahādhammarājādhirājagarunā katāya sādhuvilāsiniyā nāma līnatthapakāsaniyā ambaṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthapakāsanā.